FCC ID: ZC7-MTPB1GN Mission Transceiver Panel Mount

 

Rypto ASM-MTP136D-000GN MTP136D-000GN Mission Transceiver Panel Mount (P25) INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL REV 1.00 March 21, 2024 Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. 966 Crowley Ave Unit #100 Kelowna, BC, Canada. V1Y 0L1 Telephone: +1-250-763-1088 Toll Free: +1-888-763-1088 Website: www.aem-corp.com 2023 Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. (AEM) All Rights Reserved CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO ANODYNE ELECTRONICS MANUFACTURING CORP. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 2023 Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. (AEM), All Rights Reserved This publication is the property of AEM and is protected by Canadian copyright laws. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means including electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of AEM. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS This product may be protected by one or more patents or designs of Tait Electronics Limited together with their international equivalents, pending patents, or design applications and registered Trade Marks: NZ409837, NZ409838, NZ508806, NZ508807, NZ509242, NZ509640, NZ509959, NZ510496, NZ511155, NZ511421, NZ516280, NZ519742, NZ520650, NZ537902, NZ521450, NZ522236, NZ524369, NZ524378, NZ524509, NZ524537, NZ524630, NZ530819, NZ534475, NZ534692, NZ535471, NZ537434, NZ546295, NZ547713, NZ569985, AU2003281447, AU2004216984, AU2005207405, AU2005267973, AO200811677, CA2554213, CA2574670, CN200830113833.4, EU1,532,866, EU1,599,792, EU0574655.9, EU000915475, GB23865476, GB23860110, GB2413249, GB2413445, US11/232716, US10/597339, US10/520827, US5,745,840, US10/547653, US10/546696, US10/546697, US10/520827, US10/547964, US10/523952, US11/572700, US29/306491. This product may also be made under license under one or more of the following U.S. Patents:

4,590,473, 4,636,791, 4,716,407, 4,972,460, 5,146,497, 5,148,482, 5,164,986, 5,185,795, 5,185,796, 5,271,017, 5,377,229, and 5,502,767. The IMBE voice decoding Technology embodied in this product is protected by Intellectual Property Rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communication Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. Protected by U.S.Patents 5,870,405, 5,826,222, 5,754,974, 5,701,390, 5,715,365, 5,649,050, 5,630,011, 5,581,656, 5,517,511, 5,491,772, 5,247,579, 5,226,084, and 5,195,166. Firmware Copyrights: The title to and ownership of copyrights for firmware embedded in this product and memories are reserved for Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp and other respective owners. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page i MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual Prepared By:

Checked By:

Approved By:

AEM MANUAL REVISIONS 1 Rev. #

Revision Description All 1.00 Initial release Date 21-Mar-2024 Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page ii MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual Table of Contents SECTION 1.0 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Product Description ........................................................................................................... 2 1.3 Design Features ............................................................................................................... 3 1.4 Specifications .................................................................................................................... 4 1.5 Product Approval/Certification ........................................................................................... 4 1.6 Product Limitations ........................................................................................................... 4 1.7 Regulatory Statements...................................................................................................... 5 ISED General Statements ..................................................................................... 5 1.7.1 1.7.2 ISED Additional Statement for Detachable Antenna .............................................. 5 1.7.3 FCC Statements for Class A Digital Device ........................................................... 6 1.7.4 Radio Frequency Exposure Information ................................................................. 6 1.7.5 Health Canada Warning Statement ....................................................................... 7 1.7.6 FCC Narrowbanding Regulations .......................................................................... 8 1.8 Unit Nomenclature ............................................................................................................ 9 SECTION 2.0 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................10 2.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................10 2.2 Unpacking and Inspection ................................................................................................10 2.3 Warranty ..........................................................................................................................10 2.4 Accessories Required but Not Supplied ...........................................................................10 Installation Procedure ......................................................................................................11 2.5 2.5.1 Warnings ..............................................................................................................11 2.5.2 Cautions ...............................................................................................................11 2.5.3 Antennas ..............................................................................................................11 2.5.4 Cabling and Wiring ...............................................................................................12 2.5.5 Bonding ................................................................................................................12 2.5.6 Adjustments and Connections ..............................................................................12 2.5.7 Pre-Installation Checks .........................................................................................13 2.5.8 Installation Configuration ......................................................................................14 2.5.9 Post-Installation Checks .......................................................................................19 2.6 Airworthiness Approval ....................................................................................................20 2.6.1 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ...............................................................20 Installation Drawings ........................................................................................................22 2.7 SECTION 3.0 OPERATION ......................................................................................................23 3.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................23 3.2 Navigating the MTP136D .................................................................................................23 3.2.1 Front Panel Controls .............................................................................................24 3.2.2 Screen Navigation ................................................................................................26 3.2.3 On screen indicators .............................................................................................28 3.3 Screen Overview..............................................................................................................32 3.3.1 Home Screen .......................................................................................................33 3.3.2 Menu ....................................................................................................................34 3.4 Basic Operations..............................................................................................................54 3.4.1 Changing the Focused Radio ...............................................................................54 Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page iii MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.2 Channels ..............................................................................................................54 3.4.3 Transmitting ..........................................................................................................60 3.4.4 Receiving .............................................................................................................61 3.4.5 Zones ...................................................................................................................66 3.4.6 Channel Signaling ................................................................................................69 3.4.7 Lists ......................................................................................................................75 3.4.8 MTP136D Brightness ...........................................................................................79 3.4.9 DTMF Signaling ....................................................................................................81 3.4.10 Sidetone ...............................................................................................................81 3.4.11 Auto Simplex ........................................................................................................81 3.4.12 Go Home Function ...............................................................................................82 3.4.13 Errors ...................................................................................................................82 3.5 Emergency Operation ......................................................................................................84 3.6 Advanced Features ..........................................................................................................85 3.6.1 Keys .....................................................................................................................85 3.6.2 Agile Edit ..............................................................................................................85 3.6.3 Permissions ..........................................................................................................85 3.6.4 Firmware Update ..................................................................................................87 3.6.5 Importing/Exporting Profiles ..................................................................................87 3.6.6 Configuring a Guard Radio ...................................................................................89 3.6.7 Change Radio Names ..........................................................................................89 3.6.8 Microphone Bias ...................................................................................................90 3.6.9 Power Up Channel and Zone................................................................................90 3.6.10 Hash .....................................................................................................................91 3.6.11 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) .........................................................................91 3.6.12 Reset to Defaults ..................................................................................................91 3.7 Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................93 Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page iv MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual List of Figures Figure 1: MTP136D-000GN ....................................................................................................... 2 Figure 2: On screen keypad selection numbers ........................................................................27 Figure 3: Quick Selection Window for a Channel Selection .......................................................27 Figure 4: Quick Selection Window for a Screen Item.................................................................28 Figure 5: General Screen Overview ..........................................................................................32 Figure 6: Focused Radio ...........................................................................................................33 Figure 7: Unfocused Radio........................................................................................................34 Figure 8: Home Screen Menu ...................................................................................................34 Figure 9: Radio Options Screen ................................................................................................35 Figure 10: Scan .........................................................................................................................37 Figure 11: Edit Menu .................................................................................................................37 Figure 12: Edit Menu - Locked Name ........................................................................................38 Figure 13: Selecting Zone for Active Radio ...............................................................................38 Figure 14: Selecting Channel for Focused Radio ......................................................................39 Figure 15: Format Menu ............................................................................................................40 Figure 16: Program Radio Screen .............................................................................................51 Figure 17: Keys Screen .............................................................................................................52 Figure 18: Brightness Screen ....................................................................................................53 Figure 19: Channel Attributes ....................................................................................................55 Figure 20: Home Screen Menu Edit Selected.........................................................................57 Figure 21: Edit Active Chanel on Focused Radio ......................................................................58 Figure 22: Channel Edit Screen ................................................................................................59 Figure 23: High Power Overtemperature Transmit Lockout Active ............................................61 Figure 24: Guard Radio Locked to a Zone (indicated by italic text) ............................................69 Figure 25: Format Display Menu ...............................................................................................73 Figure 26: List and List Member Edit Screens ...........................................................................75 Figure 27: Channel Select Screen Menu ...................................................................................78 Figure 28: Brightness Screen ....................................................................................................79 Figure 29: Simplex Channel ......................................................................................................82 Figure 30: Error View Screen ....................................................................................................83 Figure 31: Error View Screen Description .................................................................................83 Figure 32: Login Screen ............................................................................................................86 Figure 33: Home Screen with Admin Login Level ......................................................................86 Figure 34: Import Screen ..........................................................................................................87 Figure 35: Radio Options Screen with Custom Names ..............................................................90 Figure 36: Reset to Defaults......................................................................................................92 Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page v MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual List of Tables Table 1 : Approved Antenna Types ............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined. Table 2 :Unit Nomenclature ........................................................................................................ 9 Table 3: Accesories Required but not Supplied .........................................................................10 Table 4: Pre-Installation Checks ...............................................................................................13 Table 5: Installation Configuration Procedure When a Configuration File Is Provided. .............15 Table 6: Instal. Config. Procedure When a Configuration File is Not Provided. ........................18 Table 7: Post Installation Checks ..............................................................................................19 Table 8: Continued Airworthiness..............................................................................................22 Table 9: Installation Drawings ...................................................................................................22 Table 10: Front Panel Controls .................................................................................................26 Table 11: Screen Indictors ........................................................................................................31 Table 12: Home Screen Menu ..................................................................................................35 Table 13: Radio Options Screen Radio Dependent Options ...................................................36 Table 14: Radio Options Screen Radio Independent Options ................................................36 Table 15: Edit Submenu Items ..................................................................................................38 Table 16: More Submenu Items ................................................................................................40 Table 17: User Options Screen Radio Dependent Options.....................................................41 Table 18: User Options Screen Radio Independent Options ..................................................43 Table 19: Admin Options Screen Radio Dependent Options ..................................................44 Table 20: Admin Options Screen Radio Independent Options ................................................46 Table 21: List Menu Options .....................................................................................................46 Table 22: Data Menu Options ...................................................................................................47 Table 23: System Menu Options ...............................................................................................47 Table 24: Info Screen Radio Dependent Options ...................................................................47 Table 25: Info Screen Radio Independent Options .................................................................48 Table 26: Error Menu Options ...................................................................................................48 Table 27: Test Screen Radio Dependent Options ..................................................................49 Table 28: Test Screen Radio Independent Options ................................................................50 Table 29: PRGM Menu Options ................................................................................................51 Table 30: Keys Menu Options ...................................................................................................52 Table 31: Channel Atributes ......................................................................................................57 Table 32: Home Screen Edit Submenu Options ........................................................................58 Table 33: Channel Edit Screen Options ....................................................................................60 Table 34: Squelch Threshold Options .......................................................................................62 Table 35: Available Scanning Algorithms ..................................................................................63 Table 36: Channel Attributes Displayed while Main Radio is Scanning .....................................65 Table 37: Scanning Menu Options While Locked on a Chanel ..................................................66 Table 38: Scanning Menu Options While Not Locked on a Chanel............................................66 Table 39: Zone Options .............................................................................................................67 Table 40: Lists applied to Zone .................................................................................................67 Table 41: Zone Specific Permissions ........................................................................................68 Table 42: Zone Edit Screen Menu Options ................................................................................69 Table 43: Tones (CTCSS) .........................................................................................................71 Table 44: Codes (CDCSS) ........................................................................................................72 Table 45: Special NAC Codes ...................................................................................................72 Table 46: Channel Signaling Display Formats ...........................................................................73 Table 47: Quantity of Lists and List Members ...........................................................................75 Table 48: List Select Menu Options ...........................................................................................76 Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page vi MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual Table 49: List Edit Screen Options ............................................................................................76 Table 50: List Member Select Menu ..........................................................................................77 Table 51: List Member Select Screen Options ..........................................................................78 Table 52: Brightness Screen Items ...........................................................................................80 Table 53: Day and Night Transition Voltage ..............................................................................80 Table 54: Luminance During Day and Night Mode ....................................................................80 Table 55: Error Code Menu Options ..........................................................................................84 Table 56: Affects of Agile Edit Feature Disabled .......................................................................85 Table 57: On Screen Import Error Messages ............................................................................88 Table 58: Import Errors messages in import log file ..................................................................89 Table 59 : On Screen Export Error Messages ...........................................................................89 Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page vii MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual ABBREVIATIONS and ACRONYMS Abbreviation Definition AEM BNC CDCSS CRC CTCSS EIRP ELT FAA FCC FM GND ICA ICNIRP ID IEEE IKC ISED MIC Mon MTP NAC NVG NVIS P25 PTT RF RFI RSS RX STC TC TGID TIA TX USB VHF VSWR Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. Bayonet Neill Concelman Continuous Digital Code Squelch System Cyclic Redundancy Check Continuous Tone Code Squelch System Isotopically Radiated Power Emergency Locator Transmitter Federal Aviation Administration Federal Communication Committee Frequency Modulation Ground Instructions for Continued Airworthiness International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection Identification Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Installation Kit Crimp Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada Microphone Monitor Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Network Access Code Night Vision Goggle Night Vision Project 25 Push To Talk Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Interference Radio Standards Specifications Receive Supplemental Type Certificate Type Certificate Talk Group Identifier Telecommunications Industry Association Transmit Universal Serial Bus Very High Frequency Voltage Standing Wave Radio Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page viii MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual GLOSSARY of TERMS Term Active Channel Active Zone Agile Edit Channel Attributes Channel Signal Channel Signaling Codes Compatible Compliant CRC Digital Channel Discrete Input DTMF Duplex Focused Radio Half-Duplex Hash Key Keyed Label Latch List List member MCODE Definition The channel that is displayed by the focused radio. The zone that is displayed for the active channel. Agile edit allows for edits to be made to Lists (zones, channels, tones, codes, NAC, TGID) during flight. Settings that are applicable to a channel. This includes items such as the channel name, Tx frequency, channel signaling etc. A channel signal is any specific tone, code, TGID or NAC. Channel signaling provides different methods to allow multiple users to communicate on the same frequency without receiving messages from unwanted users. This is achieved by using tones, codes, NAC, TGID. This term is synonymous with Continuous Digital Code Squelch System

(CDCSS). This manual will refer to CDCSS as Codes. In the context of NVIS functionality: An interpretation of the NVIS requirements that states the device will mostly work with other night vision equipment. In the context of NVIS functionality: A stricter adherence to the MIL-STD-

3009 standard that means the device must strictly meet the requirements in the standard. Automated procedure used to identify data corruption or errors in data. A digital channel as defined by the P25 standard. Also known as a digital input. A hardware pin input that can only accept two states, ON or OFF. Also known by the trademark Touch-Tone. This provides a different audible tone for each Keypad button as well as the ability to enter numbers and letters using a single keypad button. The radio will use independent channel attributes for transmit and receive operation. This will allow the radio to transmit and receive on different frequencies. Defined as the radio that shows all channel attributes on the home screen. This can be selected by pressing the radio selector button. Allows for either transmit or receive functionality to be used at a time. A unique alphanumeric string that is calculated based on the active configuration. A password that is unique to each MTP136D and allows for the enabling of extended feature sets. Activating the transmit feature of the MTP136D by activating pin 13 MIC KEY IN. A user defined name that can be assigned to a specific Tone, Code, NAC or TGID. This name can be displayed instead of the predefined code. A feature held in an on state. A grouping of list members that have the same attributes. The different lists supported by the MTP136D are Tone, Code, NAC, TGID, Zones. A unique item within a list. This can be a Tone, Code, NAC, TGID or channel. A tone set standard created by Motorola. This is frequently referred to as Private Line (PL) code. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page ix MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Installations and Operation Manual Term Network Access Code Power Cycle Quick Selection Window Scanning Sidetone Simplex Talkgroup Tones Definition A 12-bit code that is added at the beginning of each transmission that allows for semi-private communication. This is the P25 equivalent of tones or codes. Also known as a system restarting the MTP136D. This is done by turning the MTP136D OFF and ON using the main volume knob. The quick selection window allows for keypad selection of screen items that have an item number above 9. Reference 3.2.2.2.1 Quick Selection Window for more information. Automated procedure where a defined list of channels is monitored for incoming radio transmissions. Microphone audio that is fed into the operators headphone. This provides the ability for the operator to hear themselves talk while transmitting. The MTP136D will only use a channels receive channel attributes for any transmit operation. This will cause the MTP136D to transmit and receive on the same frequency. Logically grouped users used to subdivide channel traffic within a radio system. This term is synonymous with Continuous Tone Code Squelch System

(CTCSS). This manual will refer to CTCSS as Tones. Unfocused Radio Defined as the radio that shows only minimal channel attributes on the WCODE Zone home screen. This can be selected by pressing the radio selector button. A CTCSS tone set that follows the Wolfsburg standard. A list of channels. Each zone has editable properties and permissions that are not associated with channel attributes. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page x MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 1.1 Introduction Section 1.0 Description Information in this section consists of product description, design features, specifications and regulatory statements for the MTP136D-000GN P25 Phase 1 Conventional Mission Transceiver Panel, herein subsequently referred to as the MTP136D. The MTP138-000GN is an analog only derivative version of the MTP136D-000GN with a starting frequency of 138MHz. Any references to digital (P25) modulation operation are not applicable to the MTP138-000GN within this manual. All other MTP138-000GN functionality remains unchanged with respect to the MTP136D. All subsequent derivative product information will be contained in the applicable manual supplement, which may be obtained from AEM as required. Review all notes, warnings, and cautions. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 1 of 94 1.2 Product Description MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount Radio is a stand-alone APCO P25 compatible VHF FM transceiver that is equipped with a main and guard radio. The programable guard radio has full feature equivalence to the main radio. The MTP136D is capable of semi-duplex communication and features three operating modes: narrowband analog, wideband analog, and digital P25 Phase I. The MTP136D transmit and receive frequency range is the 136 174 MHz VHF band with high (10W) or low (1W) transmit output power selectable from the front panel interface. Continuous Tone Code Squelch System (CTCSS) and Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System (CDCSS) encoding/decoding are selectable in analog mode. Network Access Codes (NAC) are available in P25 digital mode. The panel mount radio is controlled using its front panel mounted number pad, knobs, and switches. Radio channel information and functions are displayed on a NVIS high-resolution screen. The MTP136D is compliant to applicable equipment performance standards TIA-603-E, Project 25, TIA-102 and DO-160G environmental standards. Reference 2.7 Installation Drawings. IMPORTANT: The following features are disabled by default. Contact AEM prior to purchase to enable these features:

- Agile Edit (Allows for inflight channel, and zone edits).

- Wideband (25 kHz channel bandwidth) operation. Figure 1: MTP136D-000GN Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 2 of 94 1.3 Design Features MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The MTP136D is capable of half-duplex communication. This allows the MTP136D to receive simultaneously on both the main and guard radio or transmit on one radio The MTP136D is designed for high temperature operating environments allowing industry leading high power transmit durations. The MTP136D is factory configured to have a main radio and a dedicated guard radio. If desired, an administrator can alter the guard radio configuration to allow all main radio functions on the guard radio. Regardless of configuration, the main and guard radios will always operate independently from one another. The MTP136D supports the use of 5000 channels that can be arbitrarily assigned to 40 different zones. To accommodate changing mission requirements each channel and zone can be edited in flight using the agile edit feature without requiring a power cycle. Each zone can contain a mixture of analog and digital channels with each channel having fully independent and customizable parameters. To ensure the operator has quick access to the most commonly used channel signaling items (Tone, Code, NAC, TGID) while editing a channel, lists can be configured. Lists are fully customizable and allow the operator to only navigate through channel signaling items that are relevant to the mission. Lists do not limit the operator from accessing all available signaling items, they are only a quick selection method. The comprehensive set of MTP136D permissions allows the administrator to restrict agile edit functionality of specific channel attributes on a per zone basis. If it is undesirable to allow the operator to utilize agile edit, the feature can be disabled entirely. To monitor multiple channels at once, two priority channels and 5 scanning algorithms are supported: List, Priority, List + Priority, Zone, Zone + Priority. The scanning feature allows for the automatic monitoring of multiple channels and the opportunity for the operator to respond once a transmission is received. Fleet operation can be quickly configured and maintained by inserting a USB-C thumb drive into the MTP136D Data port. The data port allows importing and exporting of all channel and system configurations within several minutes. To quickly verify all MTP136D units are identically configured, several unique hash numbers can be viewed on screen. Hashes are unique numbers that are calculated using the current configuration of the MTP136D. This allows fleet managers to ensure correct configuration between units by comparing the hash numbers. The MTP136D panel backlighting is hardware and software dimmable to match the brightness level of other equipment in the cockpit. The hardware dimming is achieved through a single input that can be software configured to accept a 0-5V, 0-14V or a 0-28V input range. The MTP136D is easily integrated into tactical systems, upgrades, and is a plug-

and-play replacement for existing and legacy radios. The MTP136D is intended for single user operation and features one MIC Key input which functions as a Push To Talk (PTT). Different headset configurations are supported though a 12V configurable microphone bias. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 3 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 1.4 Specifications All requirements and specifications relating to mechanical, electrical, or environmental performance can be found in the Declaration of Design and Performance document listed in 2.7 Installation Drawings 1.5 Product Approval/Certification Declaration of Design and Performance to RTCA/DO-160G, TIA-EI-603-E, and TIA-

102-CAAB FCC/ISED Certification Rule 47, Part 22 & Part 90. FCC ID: ZC7-MTPB1GN ISED certification number: IC: 9601A-MTPB1GN HVIN: MTPB1GN Models (PMNs): MTP136D-000GN, MTP138-000GN FCC/ISED Emission Designators will be:

11K0F3E Analog Voice Analog FM NB Voice 16K0F3E Analog Voice Analog FM WB Voice 8K10F1E P25 Phase 1 CF4M Digital Voice 8K10F1D P25 Phase 1 C4FM Data/Control Channel 8K10F7W P25 Phase 1 C4FM Data/Control Channel 1.6 Product Limitations Front Panel USB is for maintenance activities only and is not intended for use during flight. USB port door is to be closed. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 4 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 1.7 Regulatory Statements 1.7.1 ISED General Statements 1.7.1.1 ISED non-interference disclaimer This device contains licensed transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licensed RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

a) This device may not cause interference. b) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class A specifications. CAN ICES-003(A) / NMB-003 (A). Lmetteur/rcepteur autorise contenu dans le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dInnovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada applicables aux appareils radio autorise. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

a) Lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage. b) Lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement. Cet appareil numrique de la Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 1.7.2 ISED Additional Statement for Detachable Antenna 1.7.2.1 RSS-Gen Transmit Antenna Statement This radio transmitter IC: 9601A-MTPB1GN has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Le prsent metteur radio IC: 9601A-MTPB1GN a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs cidessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. Under Innovation, Science and Economic Development regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by ISED. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropic radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 5 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Conformment la rglementation d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada, le prsent metteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou infrieur) approuv pour l'metteur par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. Dans le but de rduire les risques de brouillage radiolectrique l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dpasse pas l'intensit ncessaire l'tablissement d'une communication satisfaisante. Approved Antenna Types:

Maximum gain:

Antenna type:

Radiation pattern: Omni-Directional Impedance:

Connector type:

50 Ohm BNC-Female Comant CI-177-1 Comant CI-177-13 RAMI AV-14 3 dBi Whip 3 dBi Whip Omni-Directional 50 Ohm BNC-Female 3 dBi Wire Omni-Directional 50 Ohm BNC-Female Note: Alternate Antennas with an equal or lesser gain may be substituted. Table 1 : Approved Antenna Types 1.7.3 FCC Statements for Class A Digital Device 1.7.3.1 FCC Compliance Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

a) This device may not cause harmful interference, and b) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Please note that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 1.7.4 Radio Frequency Exposure Information 1.7.4.1 ISED/FCC RF Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC and ISED RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must not be co-located or Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 6 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. In order to avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC and ISED RSS-10 radio frequency exposure limits, this equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 45.3 inches (1.15 m) between the antenna and your body during normal operation. Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements FCC et ISED CNR-102 tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet metteur ne doit pas tre install ou utilis en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. Afin dviter la possibilit de dpasser les limites dexposition aux radiofrquences FCC et ISED, cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec une distance minimale de 45.3 inches (1.15 m) entre lantenne et votre corps pendant le fonctionnement normal. Les utilisateurs doivent suivre les instructions spcifiques dutilisation pour respecter la conformit lexposition aux RF. Enclosures with metal parts may change the RF performance of the device, including its compliance with RF exposure guidelines, in a manner that not been tested or certified. Les tuis dotes de pices mtalliques peuvent modifier les performances des radiofrquences de lappareil, y compris sa conformit aux directives dexposition aux radiofrquences, dune faon qui na pas t teste ou certifie. 1.7.4.2 Controlling Your Exposure to RF Energy RF is a form of electromagnetic energy (as is sunlight), and there are recommended levels of maximum RF exposure. To control your exposure to RF and comply with the maximum exposure limits for occupational/controlled environments, follow these guidelines:

a) Do not talk (transmit) on the radio more than the rated transmit duty cycle. This is important because the radio radiates more energy when it is transmitting than when it is receiving. b) While you are transmitting (talking or sending data) on the radio, you must ensure that there is always a distance of 45.3 inches (1.15 m) between people and the antenna. This is the minimum safe distance. c) Use the radio only with approved antennas and attachments, and make only authorized modifications to the antenna otherwise you could damage the radio and violate FCC regulations. For more information on what RF energy is and how to control your exposure to it, visit the FCC website at www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html. 1.7.5 Health Canada Warning Statement The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit an RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from the Health Canadas website http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 7 of 94 1.7.5.1 Compliance with RF Energy Exposure Standards MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual This two-way radio complies with these RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

a) United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR 1.1307, 1.1310, and 2.1091. b) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1992. c) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition. d) European Directive 2004/40/EC on minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from physical agents

(electromagnetic fields). This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure environments at operating duty factors of up to 50% talk to 50% listen. 1.7.5.2 Conformit Aux Normes Dexposition Lnergie RF Cette radio metteur-rcepteur se conforme aux normes et aux rglements dexposition lnergie RF :

a) La Commission fdrale de la communication des Etats-Unis, Code de rglements fdraux (CFR) Titre 47 Sections 1.1307, 1.1310 et 2.1091 (radios mobiles) ou 2.1093 (radios portatives). b) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95. 1-1992.12 For your safety c) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition. d) La directive europenne 2004/40/EC concernant les prescriptions minimales de scurit et de sant relatives l'exposition des travailleurs aux risques dus aux agents physiques (champs lectromagntiques). Cette radio se conforme aux limites dexposition de lIEEE (FCC) et ICNIRP pour les environnements dexposition au rayonnement RF professionnel et contrl aux cycles de marche de 50% en mode transmission et 50% en mode rception. 1.7.6 FCC Narrowbanding Regulations The following information applies to all radios, not just to those sold in countries where FCC regulations apply. From 1 January 2013 it is an FCC requirement that land mobile radio systems must not operate channels with a bandwidth greater than 12.5kHz in the 150174MHz frequency band. From this date all radios will be supplied with firmware that requires a software feature license to operate a wide bandwidth channel in this frequency band. The 25kHz Unrestricted Wideband feature license is available to any customer who is not subject to the relevant FCC regulations, or who has an FCC waiver. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 8 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Unit Nomenclature The product part number is defined as follows:

M T P 1 3 6 D - 0 0 0 G N 5 7 1 2 3 4 6 1.8

Item Product Family Description MTP: Mission Transceiver Panel Start Frequency

(in MHz) 136: 136 MHz 138: 138 MHz Feature Character D: Digital capable Blank: Analog only Major Derivative Identifier [0-9]

Minor Derivative Identifier [0-99]

Feature Character 0: Base product 00: Base product (P25 phase 1 conventional main & guard) G: Guard receiver installed Blank: No guard Feature Character N: NVIS compliant lighting Blank: Non-NVIS lighting Table 2 :Unit Nomenclature End of Section 1.0 Description Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 9 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Section 2.0 Installation 2.1 Introduction Information in this section consists of unpacking and inspection procedures, installation procedures, pre and post-installation checks, configuration procedures, and installation drawings. 2.2 Unpacking and Inspection Unpack the equipment carefully. Inspect the unit visually for damage due to shipping and report all such claims immediately to the carrier involved. Note that each unit should have the following:

a) MTP136D-000GN b) Acceptance Test Report c) Certificate of Conformity Verify that all items are present before proceeding and report any shortage immediately to your supplier. 2.3 Warranty Please refer to the standard product warranty conditions available on our website, www.aem-corp.com. 2.4 Accessories Required but Not Supplied Installation kit MTP136D-IKC (crimp) is required to complete the installation. The kit consists of the following:

Qty Description 1 1 1 D-Sub, Female Socket,15 Crimp Housing (Pins Included) Field Serviceable BNC Coax Connector D-Sub Backshell, Size 2

(15/26 Position) w/Jackscrews (Cable Clamp Included) Manufacturer Mfr Part #

Amphenol M24308/2-2F AEM Part #

120-21-008 Amphenol 31-202 120-51-001 Amphenol D15000GE0 120-28-013 Table 3: Accesories Required but not Supplied Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 10 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 2.5 Installation Procedure 2.5.1 Warnings WARNING High volume settings can cause hearing damage. Set the headset volume control to the minimum volume setting prior to conducting tests, and slowly increase the headset volume to a comfortable 2.5.2 Cautions listening level. CAUTION Verify all airframe connections are checked against the Interconnect drawing listed in 2.7 Installation Drawings 2.5.3 Antennas WARNING To limit exposure to radio frequency fields that exceed exposure limits for people occupying the aircraft, install the antenna such that it is mounted EITHER on a ground plane that is between the antenna and the occupants of the aircraft, OR further than 45.3 inches (1.15 m) from the occupants of the aircraft. Reference the Declaration of Design and Performance document listed 2.7 Installation Drawings for information regarding approved antennas to be used with the MTP136D. Proper antenna installation is vital to ensure reliable operation of the MTP136D and the aircraft. For best results the following should be taken into consideration where applicable:

a) The aircraft manufacturers installation instructions are followed. b) The antennas are as widely separated as practically possible and clear of large aircraft obstructions. c) The antenna is mounted a minimum of 3 ft (0.9 m) or more from any navigation receiver antennas. d) The antenna is mounted a minimum of 4 ft (1.2 m) or more from communication and ELT antennas. e) The antenna is not mounted at distances from the communication, navigation or ELT antennas that are , or whole number multiples of the navigation or communications system wavelengths. f) Antennas of like frequencies are not in proximity. g) As much as practically possible, the antenna is not mounted near areas where contaminants such as fuel, dirt, oil, or water are likely to be present. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 11 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Best in-flight performance can be expected when the antenna is bottom mounted. This reduces signal degradation caused by the masking effects of the fuselage and stabilizers. Poor performance during ground testing may be observed for bottom mounted antennas. If desired, the antenna may be roof mounted when located near the rotor blades. If undesired interferences are expected such as rotor modulation, coupling with audio systems, or fluctuation in instruments, it is required to provide a ground plane surface, for any blade or whip antennas, which has a minimum radius that is equal to the height of the antenna. Inadequate grounding can cause severe reflected power and high levels of Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) on the entire airframe. 2.5.4 Cabling and Wiring All wire shall be selected in accordance with the original aircraft manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions or AC43.13-1B Change 1, Paragraphs 11-76 through 11-

78. Unshielded wire types shall qualify to MIL-W-22759 as specified in AC43.13-1B Change 1, Paragraphs 11-85, 11-86, and listed in Table 11-11. For shielded wire applications, use Tefzel MIL-C-27500 shielded wire with solder sleeves (for shield terminations) to make the most compact and easily terminated interconnect. Follow the Interconnect drawing in 2.7 Installation Drawings as required. Allow 3" from the end of the shielded wiring to the shield termination to allow the connector hood to be easily installed. Refer to the Interconnect drawing in 2.7 Installation Drawings for shield termination details. Note that the hood is a

"clamshell" hood and is installed after the wiring is complete. Aircraft harnessing shall permit the unit to be removed for easy access to all adjustments. Maintain wire segregation and route wiring in accordance with the original aircraft manufacturers maintenance instructions. Unless otherwise noted, all wiring shall be a minimum of 22 AWG, except power and ground lines, which shall be a minimum of 20 AWG. Reference the Interconnect drawing for additional specifications. Check that the ground connection is clean and well secured, and that it shares no path with any electrically noisy aircraft accessories such as blowers, turn and bank instruments or similar loads. Power to this unit must be supplied from a separate circuit breaker or fuse (fast blow), and not attached to any other circuit breaker without additional protection. Verify that the selected circuit breaker size and wire gauge are adequate for the installation using the techniques specified in AC43.13-1B Change 1, Paragraphs 11-47 through 11-51 and 11-66 through 11-69. 2.5.5 Bonding Bonding is achieved through the Dzus mounting points during installation of the product. Dzus mounting points shall be bonded to the airframe ground. The use of a milli-ohmmeter is recommended to verify bonding. Reference AC 43.13-1B Change 1, Section 15 for additional information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 12 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 2.5.6 Adjustments and Connections The MTP136D is shipped from the factory with all internal adjustments set to the normal test levels. No internal adjustments are necessary. 2.5.7 Pre-Installation Checks Do not connect the MTP136D-000N to the wiring harness until the checks in Table 4 are completed. Referencing the Interconnect drawing in 2.7Installation Drawings, check the following:

# Check 1 Check P1 pin 3 or specific lighting bus voltage relative to power Passed ground P1 pins 8, 15. 2 Check P1 pins 7 and 14 for +28 Vdc relative to power ground P1 pins 8, 15. 3 Check P1 pins 10 for continuity to ground (less than 0.5). 4 Check P1 pins 4 and 5 for connection to ground when the Chan/Select +/- switch is installed and set to the intended switch positions. 5 Check all other connections to ensure that there are no unintended shorts or opens. 6 Check the antenna feedline at the MTP136D with a through-line wattmeter and suitable frequency elements to ensure correct antenna matching. Reflected power should be less than 10%. Anything higher should be investigated carefully, or RFI and system interference as well as possible radio damage may result. A Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) measurement over 3.0:1 represents a significant loss in signal power to the antenna. Check that forward power meets specifications over the frequency band of the radio. 6 Connect the MTP136D to the wiring harness. Ensure all connectors are tight, and the mechanical installation is sound. General Notes Table 4: Pre-Installation Checks Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 13 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 2.5.8 Installation Configuration Once all installations checks are completed the initial installation configuration can begin. Performing the following steps requires administrator permissions to be active. Follow the steps in 3.6.9 to login with administrator permissions. If a configuration file exists for the MTP136D for the specific aircraft installation follow Table 5: Installation Configuration Procedure When a Configuration File Is Provided. If a configuration dose not exist, follow the steps in Table 6: Instal. Config. Procedure When a Configuration File is Not Provided. Follow the procedure below when a configuration file has been provided for the specific aircraft installation.

# Question 1 Is a firmware upgrade required?

Completed Reference the SW Ver. For the main and guard radio and the Software Version of the MTP136D in 3.3.2.7.4.1 Info to identify the current firmware versions. Contact AEM for the latest firmware version number. New products are always shipped with the latest firmware. Yes Reference 3.6.3 Permissions for steps required to upgrade the firmware. No No action Required. Import the configuration file. Reference 3.6.3.1 Accessing Admin Permission Level for steps required to import the MTP136D configuration file. It is recommended to perform this step with the admin login level. Reference 3.6.3 Permissions for more information. 2 3 Do any keys have to be added?

(Commonly used for agile edit and wideband enable). Reference 3.6.1 Keys for more information. Yes Manually add all keys through the keys screen. Keys cannot be added by using the import feature. If desired record all keys used below:

No No action required. 4 Does the screen brightness of the MTP136D match the brightness of other cockpit equipment in day and night mode?

Yes No adjustment required. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 14 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual

# Question No Adjust the screen brightness to match cockpit illumination. Reference 3.4.8 MTP136D Brightness to adjust the brightness level until the MTP136D matches the illumination level of other cockpit equipment. 5 Verify the error log is empty. Completed If errors exist perform all necessary action to resolve the errors. Reference 3.4.13 Errors for more information regarding runtime errors and 3.6.5 Importing/Exporting for import and export faults. Were any errors noted in the error log?

Log all errors in the general notes section in this checklist. 6 Record the hash values, if not done previously. Store these values in a safe location or in this manual for future reference. Reference 3.6.10 Hash for more information. Admin:

Factory:

Channels:

ID Lists:

Hash Storage location:

7 Verify the MTP136D_ImportLog.json file has no errors. The import log is automatically saved to the connected storage device, states if the file import was successful and no faults occurred. Reverence 3.6.5.3 Import Error for more information. If the import was unsuccessful, correct the import file and repeat the procedure listed in this table. General Notes Table 5: Installation Configuration Procedure When a Configuration File Is Provided. Follow the procedure below when a configuration file has NOT been provided for the specific aircraft installation. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 15 of 94

# Question 1 Is a firmware upgrade required?

MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Completed Reference the SW Ver. in 3.3.2.7.4.5 PRGM to identify the current firmware version. Contact AEM for the latest firmware version number. New products are always shipped with the latest firmware. Yes Reference 3.6.4 Firmware Update for steps required to upgrade the firmware. No No action Required. 2 Has the MTP136D been installed previously?

Yes It is advised to reset the MTP136D to factory settings. See 3.6.12 Reset to Defaults for the required steps. No No action required. 3 Do any keys have to be added?

(Commonly used for agile edit and wideband enable). Reference 3.6.1 Keys for more information. Yes Manually add all keys through the keys screen. Keys cannot be added by using the import feature. If Desired record all keys used below:

No No action required. 4 Configure all items listed in the Admin Options screen. Reference 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options for more information 5 Configure all items listed in the User Options screen. Reference 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options for more information. 6 Configure all items listed in the Radio screen. Reference 3.3.2.1 Radio for more information. 7 Configure all required channel signaling lists. Reference 3.4.6 Channel Signaling and 3.4.7 Lists for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 16 of 94

# Question 8 Configure all zones and channels. For more information reference 3.4.5 Zones. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Completed Ensure the following for each zone:

Required zone permission are applied. Reference 3.4.5.4 Zone Permissions for more information. Channel signaling lists are applied. Reference 3.4.6 Channel Signaling for more information. All channels are configured correctly. Reference 3.4.2 Channels for more information. 9 Scanning priority channels are assigned. Reference 3.4.4.3 Scanning for more information. Is a dedicated guard radio required?

Yes Perform all steps listed in 3.6.6 Configuring a Guard Radio. No No action required, 10 Does the screen brightness of the MTP136D match the brightness of other cockpit equipment in day and night mode?

(Test best performed in a dark environment) Yes No adjustment required. No Adjust the screen brightness to match cockpit illumination. Reference 3.4.8 MTP136D Brightness to adjust the brightness level to match the illumination level of other cockpit equipment. 11 Verify the error log is empty. If errors exist perform all necessary action to resolve the errors. Reference 3.4.13 Errors for more information regarding runtime errors and 3.6.5 Importing/Exporting for import and export faults. Were any errors noted in the error log?

Log all errors in the general notes section in this checklist. 12 Export the configuration file. If a configuration file has not been created previously, export the current configuration file for future use. Reference 3.6.5.3 Import Error for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 17 of 94

# Question Name of the exported file:

Location of the exported file:

MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Completed 20 Record the hash values, if not done previously. Store these values in a safe location or in this manual for future reference. Reference 3.6.10 Hash for more information. Admin:

Factory:

Channels:

ID Lists:

Hash Storage location:

General Notes Table 6: Instal. Config. Procedure When a Configuration File is Not Provided. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 18 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 2.5.9 Post-Installation Checks Power up the aircrafts systems and confirm normal operation of all functions of the MTP136D. Refer to Section 3.0 Operation for specific operational details.

# Test 1 Confirm all radio functions. Passed Verify all receive and transmit operations. Check yoke (or cyclic) switch action. Check radio audio inputs and selection of same. 2 Verify audio quality. Unusual buzzes, hums or other background audio are symptomatic of multiple grounds, or noisy external systems such as blowers or pumps sharing wiring with the audio system. Failure to key or correctly modulate a transmitter is often the result of forgetting to connect all required grounds to the radio or external audio system. 4 Complete Installation Approval Test Procedure Perform all steps required in the Installation Approval Test Procedure document listed in 2.7 Installation Drawings. 5 Reset the MTP136D. If any settings or channels were altered during the post installation checks reupload the configuration file. 6 Complete documentation. Upon satisfactory completion of all performance checks, make all required logbook entries, electrical load, weight and balance amendments and other documentation as required by your local regulatory agency before releasing the aircraft for service. General Notes Table 7: Post Installation Checks Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 19 of 94 Notes: If receive audio cannot be heard, ensure the correct channel signaling is applied. Press the monitor button to temporarily ignore all channel signaling requirement. Reference 3.4.4.1 Monitor. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 2.6 Airworthiness Approval Airworthiness approval of the MTP136D may require completion of a TCCA Major Modification Report per CAR STD (AWM) 571 Appendix L, or a FAA Form 337. The sample wording for a description of the work is provided to assist the Installing Agency in preparing Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) when installing an Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Mount. This sample may be modified appropriately for new installations. It is the installers responsibility to determine the applicability of the method used. Installations performed outside Canada must follow the applicable aviation authoritys regulations. Sample Wording:

Installing an Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp MTP136D-000GN Mission Transceiver Panel in [aircraft location]. Installed in accordance with this MTP136D-000GN Operation and Installation Manual, Revision [ ], and AC 43.13-2, Chapters 2, and 3. The MTP136D-000GN interfaces with existing aircraft systems per the instructions in this Installation and Operation Manual. This MTP136D-000GN Installation and Operation Manual provides detailed installation instructions and wiring diagrams in Section 2.0 Installation. Power is supplied to the MTP136D-000GN through an [ ]-Amp circuit breaker. Aircraft equipment list, weights and balance amended. Compass compensation checked and found to conform to applicable regulations. 2.6.1 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness Maintenance of the MTP136D is on condition only. Periodic maintenance of this product is not required. The following sample Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) provides assistance in preparing ICA for the Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp MTP136D-000GN unit installation as part of a Type Certificate (TC) or Supplemental Type Certificate (STC) project to comply with CAR STD (AWM) 523/527/525/529.1529 or FAR 23/25/27/29.1529 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness. Items that may vary by aircraft make and model are shown in brackets ([ ]) and should be filled in as appropriate. Some of the checklist items do not apply, in which case they should be marked N/A (Not Applicable). Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 20 of 94 Section Item Description MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 1 Introduction 2 Description of the System/ Alteration 3 4 5 6 7 Control, Operation Information Servicing Information Maintenance Instructions Troubleshooting Information Removal and Replacement Information 8 Diagrams

[Aircraft that has been altered: Registration number, Make, Model and Serial Number]

Content, Scope, Purpose and Arrangement:

This document identifies the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness for an Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp MTP136D-000GN installed in an [aircraft make and model]. Applicability: Applies to an Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp MTP136D-000GN installed in an [aircraft make and model]. Definitions/Abbreviations: None, N/A. Precautions: None, N/A. Units of Measurement: None, N/A. Referenced Publications:

MTP136D-000GN Installation and Operating Manual STC/TC # [applicable STC/TC number for the specific aircraft installation]

Distribution: This document should be a permanent aircraft record. Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp MTP136D-000GN Mission Transceiver Panel Mount which adds a transceiver panel connection to an existing avionics system [include equipment/systems as appropriate]. Refer to 2.7 Installation Drawings of this manual for interconnect information. Refer to aircraft manufacturer approved interconnect for actual installation. Refer to Section 3.0 of this manual. N/A. Maintenance of the MTP136D-000GN is on condition only. Periodic maintenance is not required. Refer to 3.7 Troubleshooting of this manual for more information. Refer to Section 2.0 of this manual - the MTP136D-000GN Installation and Operating Manual. If the unit is removed and reinstalled, a functional check of the equipment should be conducted. Refer to Section 2.7 Installation Drawings of this manual for installation drawings and interconnect examples. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 21 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Special Inspection Requirements Application of Protective Treatments Data: Relative to Structural Fasteners Special Tools For Commuter Category Aircraft Only Overhaul Period Airworthiness Limitation Section Revision N/A. N/A. MTP136D-000GN and appropriate mounting hardware installation, removal and replacement should be in accordance with applicable provisions of AC 43.13-1B. N/A. A. Electrical loads: Refer to Section 1.0 of this manual the MTP136D-000GN Installation and Operating Manual B. Methods of balancing flight controls: N/A. C. Identification of primary & secondary structures: N/A. D. Special repair methods applicable to the airplane: N/A. No additional overhaul time limitations. N/A. To be determined by installer. Table 8: Continued Airworthiness Installation Drawings 2.7 DOCUMENT MTP136D-000GN-403-0 1.00 Mission REV DESCRIPTION TYPE Interconnect Drawing SERIAL#

096671+

Transceiver Panel MTP136D-000GN-405-0 1.00 Mission Connector Map 096671+

Transceiver Panel MTP136D-000GN-618-0 1.00 Mission Transceiver Panel MTP136D-000GN-922-0 1.00 Mission MTP136D-000GN-634-0 1.00 Mission Transceiver Panel Transceiver Panel Declaration of Design and Performance Mechanical Installation 096671+

096671+

Installation Approval Test Procedure 096671+

Table 9: Installation Drawings Section 2.0 Ends Following Above Documents Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 22 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.1 Introduction Section 3.0 Operation Information in this section consists of information to navigate the MTP136D, basic screen overview, basic operation, emergency operation, advanced features and troubleshooting information. Some sections of this manual may not be applicable to every derivative product. For example, the MTP138-000GN is an analog only derivative version of the MTP136D-

000GN with a starting frequency of 138MHz. Any references to digital (P25) modulation operation or a starting frequency lower than 138 MHz are not applicable to the MTP138-000GN within this manual. All other MTP138-000GN functionality remains unchanged with respect to the MTP136D. All subsequent derivative product information will be contained in the applicable manual supplement, which may be obtained from AEM as required. 3.2 Navigating the MTP136D The MTP136D can be navigated using three methods: rotary selector, keypad, or the CHAN/SELECT + and CHAN/SELECT pins that are commonly installed as buttons on the aircrafts cyclic stick. Each of these methods can be used interchangeably at any time. This manual uses the rotary selector as the primary means of navigation. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 23 of 94 3.2.1 Front Panel Controls MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3 4 5 6 1 7 2 9 8 Item Button Name Main Volume Control Knob

(MAIN VOL) Rotary Selector

(Push | Enter) Description The Main Volume control knob is used to turn on the MTP136D and adjust the volume of the main radio. The MTP136D is turned on by rotating the volume knob clockwise, past the detent position. An audible click can be heard when the detent position is passed. Continuing to rotate clockwise will increase the volume of the main radio from 0 to 100%. Reference the min volume setting 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options to set the minimum main radio volume. The Rotary Select is the primary method to navigate the MTP. The Rotary selector can be rotated to navigate through screen items and pressed to select screen items. The selector can be configured to navigate through the menu as clockwise or counterclockwise. Reference the scroll down setting in 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options for more information Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 24 of 94 Item Button Name Monitor

(MON) Channel Recall

(RCL) Radio Selector

(MAIN GUARD) Transmit Power

(HI LO) Guard Volume Control Knob

(GUARD VOL) Keypad MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Description Pressing the monitor button will activate the monitor feature which allows all audio, regardless of RF signal level or channel signaling, to be heard. The monitor feature can be activated on any MTP136D screen. The monitor function can be latched on by pressing and holding the MON button. See 3.4.4.1 Monitor for more information. Pressing the channel recall button will toggle between the current channel and the previous channel of the focused radio. The channel recall feature can be activated on any MTP136D screen. This feature can be altered to switch between the main and guard radio. Reference the primary input setting in 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options and the Recall Scope setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options for more information. Pressing the radio selector button will switch the focused radio between the main and guard radio. The focused radio can be switched on any MTP136D screen. Pressing the transmit power button will toggle the transmit power of the MTP136D between 1W and 10W. The transmit power can be switched on any MTP136D screen. The functionality can be altered to affect all channels or only the active channel. Reference 3.4.3.1Transmit Power for more information. The guard volume control knob is used to adjust the volume of GUARD radio. Turning the knob clockwise will increase the volume of the guard radio. The guard volume control knob has a detent position like the main volume control knob, but it has no functionality. Reference the min volume setting 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options to set the minimum guard radio volume. The keypad is used for both navigation and entering information. The keypad supports the use of entering letters and numbers by pressing the same key repeatedly. Reference 3.2.2.2 Navigation Using the Keypad for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 25 of 94 Item Button Name MENU Button MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Description The MENU button is part of the keypad and provides access to different screens. The Menu can be latched open by pressing and holding the Menu button. Data Port &

Cover

(DATA) Reference the menu latch setting in 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options for more information. The Data port is USB Type-C and provides access for updating all software components and channel configurations in the MTP136D. Reference 3.6.5 Importing/Exporting for channel imports/exports. Reference 3.6.4 Firmware Update for information regarding firmware updates. Table 10: Front Panel Controls 3.2.2 Screen Navigation The MTP136D screen can be navigated using three methods: the rotary selector, keypad, or discrete inputs. Each method can be used interchangeably at any time. This manual uses the rotary selector as the primary navigation method. 3.2.2.1 Navigation using the Rotary Selector When on the home screen, rotating the rotary selector will change the channel of the radio. When editing an item or navigating through a screen or menu, rotating the rotary selector will sequentially go through the menu items or its options. Pressing the rotary selector will cause the screen item to be selected for editing. Reference 3.2.3 On screen indicators for visual reference for when an item is selected for editing. The behaviour associated with rotating the rotary selector clockwise or counterclockwise can be changed. Reference the scroll down setting in 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options for more information. The functionality of rotating the rotary selector on the home screen can be changed from selecting the active channel, to selecting the focused radio. Reference the primary input setting in 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 26 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.2.2.2 Navigation Using the Keypad The keypad can be used to navigate through all menu items and most on screen selections. Pressing a keypad button will automatically select the item with the corresponding number. Entering the same number again as the currently selected item will select the item for editing. Figure 2: On screen keypad selection numbers 3.2.2.2.1 Quick Selection Window When the user wants to use the keypad to select a channel or an onscreen item that has 10 or more selectable items, the quick selection window will appear in the top left of the screen. To use the quick selection window to select a channel from the home screen, enter they channel number and press the rotary selector. To use the quick selection window to select a screen item, enter the screen item using the keypad and press the rotary selector. If the screen item is selected, entering the screen item number again and pressing the rotary selector will select the item for editing. Figure 3: Quick Selection Window for a Channel Selection Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 27 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Figure 4: Quick Selection Window for a Screen Item 3.2.2.3 Navigation Using the Discrete Inputs The MTP136D provides two discrete input pins on the main transceiver DB15 connector, CHAN/SELECT + and CHAN/SELECT . When these inputs are wired within the aircraft, they can be used to change the active channel as well as navigate through screen items. The discrete inputs have the same functionality as rotating the rotary selector. The CHAN/SELECT + pin has the same functionality as rotating the rotary selector clockwise. The CHAN/SELECT pin has the same functionality as rotating the rotary selector counterclockwise. 3.2.3 On screen indicators Several onscreen indicators exist to aid in navigating the MTP136D and identify what and how a setting can be manipulated. Screen Indicator Selected for navigation Description The item is currently selected. A selected item is marked with a green box. Selected for Editing The item is selected and can be edited. Character selected for editing A single character in a multicharacter item is selected for editing. The character will be highlighted in a green block, and the screen item will have a white border. Frequently seen while editing a channels frequency or the name/label of a list/list member. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 28 of 94 Screen Indicator Menu Item Active Italic text Monitor Indicator Receive Indicator Transmit Indicator Tx Power Indicator MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Description Menu item is currently active. Commonly seen while changing the channel signaling display format or enabling the scanning mode for a radio. Setting is locked from editing. The setting may require Administrator login level to perform edits, or it is non-

configurable regardless of permission level. Reference 3.6.3 Permissions for more information. The monitor (mon) indicator is highlighted when a RF carrier signal is detected, or the monitor function is activated. This indicator is highlighted even when the carrier signal is not strong enough to break squelch or when nonmatching channel signaling is received. The Mon indicator is highlighted when a carrier signal of sufficient strength is detected, and the signal is received with matching channel signaling. Audio will be routed to the headset when this indicator is highlighted. Transmit indicator. The MTP136D is actively transmitting on the focused radio when this indicator is highlighted. Tx power indicator. Reference 3.4.3.1 Transmit Power for more information. HI: All transmissions will be in high power (10W). The indicator will be highlighted when high power is selected. LO: All transmissions will be in low power (1W). Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 29 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Description The menu item is not available for edit. This is due to insufficient permission level, or the zone does not have list assigned to the current zone. Reference 3.6.5 Importing/Exporting for information regarding permissions. Reference 3.4.5 Zones for more information regarding unassigned lists. The channel is simplex linked. This bar is only shown while agile editing a channel. Reference 3.4.10 Sidetone for more information. A setting has multiple options that will be displayed in a dropdown list format. When a menu item is underlined a different set of menu items will be shown or a different screen will be opened. Screen Indicator Locked Simplex Linked Dropdown List Open submenu/screen Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 30 of 94 Screen Indicator Feature Restricted MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Description Occurs when the wideband modulation is restricted, Transmit Timeout or the high power overtemperature transmit lockout feature is active. Reference 3.6.1 Keys for more information regarding wideband modulation restrictions. Reference 3.4.3.2 Transmit Timeout for more information. Reference 3.4.3.3 High Power Overtemperature Transmit Lockout for more information. A setting or channel attribute has not been set and is available for editing. This is only visible while actively editing a channel on the home screen. Reference 3.4.2.3 Edit Active Channel. Attribute/Setting not set Table 11: Screen Indictors Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 31 of 94 3.3 Screen Overview MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual This section details how the different screens in the MTP136D are organized as well as the settings that are available on each screen. Reference Figure 5: General Screen Overview to see how the primary screens in the MTP136D are organized. Items that are duplicated in Figure 5, such as the Radio screen, under the Menu and Scan Menu will bring the user to the same screen. The document headings in this section have been organized to match the organizational structure shown in Figure 5, e.g. 3.3.2.2 Scan of the manual is a subheading under 3.3.2 Menu to match the structure shown in Figure 5. Figure 5: General Screen Overview Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 32 of 94 3.3.1 Home Screen MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The home screen provides channel and status information for the main and guard radio. The radio that shows all channel attributes is referred to as the focused radio

. The channel displayed by the focused radio will always be used for any transmit operations. The focused radio can be switched by pressing the radio selector button. The unfocused radio utilize all receive capabilities. is displayed with a reduced information set and continues to 1 2 2 1 Main Radio is focused Guard Radio is focused For information regarding the channel attributes displayed reference 3.4.2.2 Channel Attributes. For information regarding on screen indicators that are not channel attributes reference 3.2.3 On screen indicators. 3.3.1.1 Focused Radio The focused radio focused radio has all transmit and receive abilities available for use. is identified by having all channel attributes displayed. The Figure 6: Focused Radio Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 33 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.3.1.2 Unfocused radio shows minimal information about its active channel. The unfocused radio Although not all channel attributes is shown, all receive functions are fully operational. This allows received audio from the unfocused radio to be heard when a signal is received. The unfocused radio cannot be used for any transmission functions. Figure 7: Unfocused Radio 3.3.2 Menu The MTP136D Menu can be accessed at any time by pressing the Menu button from the Keypad. The Menu provides access to different screens that allow for the editing of channel and zone information as well as MTP136D settings. The menu will always display different information based on the screen the user is currently on. Reference Figure 5: General Screen Overview to view the different screens that can be selected from the Menu. The menu can be latched open by holding the Menu button. The latching feature is controlled by the menu latch and hold time setting, reference 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options. The MTP136D is factory programmed to latch the menu open when the Menu button is pressed and held. The menu is unlatched when the menu is pressed again. Figure 8: Home Screen Menu Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 34 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The home screen menu items are given a high-level overview in Table 12. More information is provided in subsequent sections. Item name Radio Scan Edit Zone Channel Format More Bright Description Allows editing of the operator preferences such as the active zone, active channel, enable scanning and channel signaling formats. Enables scanning for the focused radio. Change any channel attributes from the active channel. Change the zone of the focused radio. Change the channel of the focused radio to any channel in the active zone. Select the selective identifier display format. This menu item is only displayed when the focused radio is using channel signaling. Access additional screens. Change screen brightness. Table 12: Home Screen Menu 3.3.2.1 Radio The Radio Options screen allows access for adjustments or changes that are frequently required while in flight. Figure 9: Radio Options Screen Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 35 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The settings listed in Table 13 are individually configurable for the main and guard radio. Item name Zone Ch. Squelch Threshold Scan Scan Algo. Description Assign any zone to the selected radio. See 3.3.2.4 Zone for more information. Assign the active channel to the radio. The user can select any channel from the active zone. Change the Rx signal strength threshold for audio to be heard. See 3.4.4.2 Squelch for more information. Select if the scan mode is ON or OFF for the radio. Reference 3.4.4.3 Scanning for more information Select the scanning algorithm to be used while scanning. Reference 3.4.4.3 Scanning for more information. Table 13: Radio Options Screen Radio Dependent Options The settings listed in Table 14 change the behaviour of the MTP136D and are not specific to a radio. Item name Sidetone Description Enable or disable sidetone audio. See 3.4.10 Sidetone for more information. Sidetone Level Change the volume level of sidetone audio. See 3.4.10 DTMF Sidetone Level Labels Tone Format NAC Format TGID Format Sidetone for more information. Change the volume level of DTMF sidetone audio. See 3.4.10 Sidetone for more information. Enable or disable the use of labels for Tones, Codes, NAC, TGID. See 3.4.6.5 Channel Signaling Formats for more information. Change how tones and codes are displayed. Allows selection between: Frequency, Mcode, and Wcode. See 3.4.6.5 Channel Signaling Formats for more information. Change how NAC are displayed. Allows selection between a decimal and hex display format. See 3.4.6.5 Channel Signaling Formats for more information. Change how TGID are displayed. Allows selection between a decimal and hex display format. See 3.4.6.5 Channel Signaling Formats for more information. Table 14: Radio Options Screen Radio Independent Options Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 36 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.3.2.2 Scan Selecting this item will enable the scan mode for the focused radio. When the focused radio is scanning, the rotary selector can be used to change the scanning algorithm used. To disable the scan mode, press the Menu button and then press the scan menu option. This option is only available if the scanning mode is enabled by the administrator. Reference 3.4.4.3 Scanning for more information regarding the scanning functionality. Figure 10: Scan 3.3.2.3 Edit The Edit submenu allows the user to edit the information of the active channel of the focused radio. Figure 11: Edit Menu Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 37 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Item name All Name RX Freq TX Freq RX NAC/Tone/Code TX NAC NAC/Tone/Code Description Edit all information of the active channel. Edit only the name of the active channel. Edit only the receive frequency of the active channel. Edit only the transmit frequency of the active channel. Edit only the receive NAC/Tone/Code of the active channel. Edit only the transmit NAC/Tone/Code of the active channel. Table 15: Edit Submenu Items The Edit menu is only accessible if agile edit is enabled. If the zones edit permissions do not allow the user to edit a channel attribute, the Edit menu item that corresponds with the locked channel attribute will be locked. This is indicated with a next to the Edit menu item. Reference 3.4.5.4 Zone Permissions for more information. Figure 12: Edit Menu - Locked Name 3.3.2.4 Zone Selecting this item allows the user to change the zone of the active radio. For all possible methods to change the zone of a radio reference 3.4.5.1 Changing the Active Zone. Figure 13: Selecting Zone for Active Radio Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 38 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual This menu item may be locked if a radio has been locked to a specific zone. Reference the Zone Permission setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options for more information regarding radios that are locked to a zone. Reference section 3.4.5 Zones for more information regarding zones. 3.3.2.5 Channel Selecting this item will allow the user to select any channel in the active zone of the focused radio. Figure 14: Selecting Channel for Focused Radio 3.3.2.6 Format Select the display format for the channel signaling used for all radios. See 3.4.6.5 Channel Signaling Formats for more information. This menu will have different channel signaling formats available based on the channel signaling type applied to the active channel. If the active channel is not using any channel signaling this menu item will not be displayed. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 39 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Figure 15: Format Menu 3.3.2.7 More The More menu provides access to further screens that allow for the editing of all channel, zone and system settings. Item name Description Options Lists Allows access to change the behaviour of MTP136D functions Allows access and modification to the list types of Zone, Channel, Tone, Code, TGID, NAC. Allows for import/export of zone and channel attributes as well as MTP136D factory reset. Allows access to login as administrator, view system information, view and clear errors, and update the firmware. Table 16: More Submenu Items Data System 3.3.2.7.1 Options The options menu provides access to settings that control the behaviour of the MTP136D functions. The options submenu has two menu items, user and admin. The user menu item can be accessed and edited by the user login level. The admin menu item can only be accessed with the admin permission level. Reference 3.6.3.1 Accessing Admin Permission Level for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 40 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options The User Options screen allows function configurations that are intended for user access. The items in Table 17 can be uniquely set for the Main and Guard radio. Item name Priority Scan Rate Sets the interval of how long the radio can scan nonpriority Description Startup Zone Startup Channel channels before checking the priority channels for a received signal. This is applicable only for scanning algorithms that support priority channels. Reference 3.4.4.3.3 Priority Channels for more information. Select the zone that a radio will be set to when the MTP136D is turned on. Reference 3.6.9 Power Up Channel and Zone for more information. Options include:

Shutdown: Start the radio on the same zone that was used when the MTP136D was turned off. Custom: Always start the radio on a specific zone. Select the channel that a radio will be set to when the MTP136D is turned on. Reference 3.6.9 Power Up Channel and Zone for more information. Options include:

Shutdown: Start the radio on the same channel that was used when the MTP136D was turned off. This option is only available when the Startup zone is set to shutdown. Custom: Always start the radio on a specific channel from the custom startup zone. Table 17: User Options Screen Radio Dependent Options The items in Table 18 are applied across the MTP136D and are not specific to a radio. Item name Hold Time Description Change how long a button must be pressed for the following functions:

a) Latching the Menu Open. b) Latching the Monitor function on. c) Deleting an item that requires a hold time. Monitor Latch Changes the monitor latching behaviour. Reference 3.4.4.1 Monitor for more information. Options include:

OFF: Monitor function cannot be latched on. HOLD: Monitor function is latched on when the monitor is pressed for the duration of the system hold time. ON: Pressing the MON button will always latch the MON button. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 41 of 94 Item name Menu Latch Description Changes the menu latching behaviour. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Options include:

OFF: Menu screen cannot be latched open. HOLD: Menu screen can be latched open when the MENU button is pressed for the duration of the system hold time. ON: Pressing the MENU button will always latch the menu open. Auto Simplex Controls if Auto Simplex mode is enabled for all channels. Reference 3.4.11 Auto Simplex for more information. Options include:

Enabled: A channel can be set to use auto simplex. Disabled: A channel cannot be set to use auto simplex. Changes the visibility of the screen names. Screen Names Go Home Primary Input Options include:

Enabled: White text will show the name of the current screen in the bottom left of the screen. Disabled: The screen name will not be visible. Controls which actions will force the MTP136D to return to the home screen. In progress edits will be saved when the Go Home function is used. Reference 3.4.12 Go Home Function for more information. Options include:

PTT:

Return to the home screen when the PTT key is pressed. Radio Select: Return to the home screen when the radio Both:

selector button is pressed. Return to the home screen when the radio selector button or the PTT is pressed. Controls the behaviour of the following actions while on the home screen: rotating the rotary selector, pressing the keypad, using the rear Chan/Select pins. Options include:

Radio:

The focused radio is changed when any of the above actions are performed. Channel: The active channel is changed when any of the above actions are performed. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 42 of 94 Item name Scroll Down Description Controls how rotating the rotary selector navigates through menus and screens. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Options include:

Clockwise:

Rotating the rotary selector clockwise causes the screen to navigate down. Counterclockwise: Rotating the rotary selector counterclockwise causes the screen to navigate down. Table 18: User Options Screen Radio Independent Options 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options The Admin Options screen allows function configurations that are intended for admin access. This screen is only displayed when logged in with the admin permission level. Reference 3.6.3.1 Accessing Admin Permission Level for more information. The items in Table 19 can be uniquely set for the Main and Guard radio. Note: The heading titles Radio 1 and Radio 2 used on the admin options screen are equivalent to Main and Guard respectively. Item name Name Zone Permission Min Volume Startup Zone Description Change the name of the radio. These names are only used for display purposes while navigating the Menu and subsequent screens. Reference 3.6.7 Change Radio Names. Selects the permission level required to change the following:

1. The zone assigned to a radio. 2. The startup channel assigned to a radio. 3. The startup zone assigned to a radio. Options include:

User: The user can change the above-mentioned items Admin: Only the admin can change the above-mentioned items. Set the minimum volume for the radio. This ensures a transmission cannot be missed due to low volume. Select the zone that a radio will be set to when the MTP136D is turned on. Reference 3.6.9 Power Up Channel and Zone for more information. Options include:

Shutdown: Start the radio on the same zone that was used when the MTP136D was turned off. Custom: Always start the radio on a specific zone. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 43 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Item name Startup Channel Description Select the channel that a radio will be set to when the MTP136D is turned on. Reference 3.6.9 Power Up Channel and Zone for more information. Options include:

Shutdown: Start the radio on the same channel that was used when the MTP136D was turned off. This option is only available when the Startup zone is set to shutdown. Custom: Always start the radio on a specific channel from the custom startup zone. Table 19: Admin Options Screen Radio Dependent Options The items in Table 20 are applied across the MTP136D and are not specific to a radio. Item name PTT Timeout Attenuation Description Change the maximum continuous transmit time for the selected radio. Reference 3.4.3.2 Transmit Timeout for more information. Options include:

30-300s, None Note: The None options allows for unlimited continuous transmit time and is used for test purpose. The None feature is not recommended for regular flight operation as a stuck PTT key would not be automatically unkey. Controls attenuation level for incoming RF signals. This may be required if nuisance squelch breaks occur due to multiple antennas installed in close proximity. P25 Unit ID Options include:

0dB, 6dB, 12dB, 20dB Change the MTP136D unit ID that is provided during digital channel use. Digital Monitor TBD Mic. Bias Controls the microphone biasing voltage on pin 6 MIC AUDIO HI. Options include:

Enabled: Provides 12V output. Disabled: Provides 0V output. Controls the use enable/disable of DTMF Signaling function. Reference 3.4.9 DTMF Signaling for more information. DTMF Signaling Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 44 of 94 Item name Max Voltage MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Description Select the maximum input voltage that will be applied to pin 3, PANEL LIGHTING. Reference 3.4.8 MTP136D Brightness for more information. Options include:

5V: Dimming range will be 0-5VDC. 14V: Dimming range will be 0-12VDC. 28V: Dimming range will be 0-28VDC. LCD Dimming Controls if the LCD dimming level is affected by the voltage applied to pin 3, PANEL LIGHTING. Reference 3.4.8 MTP136D Brightness for more information. Options include:

Enabled: The analog dimming voltage from the PANEL LIGHTING pin and the software adjustment value will be used to calculate the LCD dimming level. Disabled: Only the software adjustment value will be used to calculate the LCD dimming level. Monitor Scope Controls if the monitor function affects all radios or only the focused radio. Options include:

All:

All radios will be affected when the monitor button is pressed. Active: Only the focused radio will be affected when the monitor button is pressed. Recall Scope Controls the behaviour of the Channel Recall button. Options include:

Radio 1 (Main Radio):

The channel recall button will only recall the channel last used on radio 1. Radio 2 (Guard Radio):

The channel recall button will only recall the channel last used on radio 2. Active:

The channel recall button will only recall the last channel used on the focused radio. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 45 of 94 Item name TX Power Scope Description Controls which channels are affected when the Transmit Power button is pressed. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Options include:

All:

The transmit power of all channels on both the main and guard radio will be toggled between Lo (1W) and Hi (10W). This setting will override, but not delete, the power level that was initially configured for each channel. Channel: The transmit power of the active channel of the focused radio will be toggled between Lo (1W) and Hi

(10W). Table 20: Admin Options Screen Radio Independent Options 3.3.2.7.2 Lists This menu allows the operator to create, edit, or delete any list or list member. Selecting any of the below items will open its respective List select screen i.e., selecting the NAC list will open the NAC List Select screen. See 3.4.7 Lists for more information. Reference Table 21 for more information for each menu item. Item name Zone Channel Tone Code TGID NAC Description See 3.3.2.4 Zone for more information. This menu item is only visible for the user if the Zone Permission setting is set to user. Reference 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options for more information. See 3.4.2.2 Channel Attributes for more information. See 3.4.6.1 Tone (CTCSS) for more information. See 3.4.6.2 Code (CDCSS)for more information. See 3.4.6.3 TGID for more information. See 3.4.6.4 NAC for more information. Table 21: List Menu Options Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 46 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.3.2.7.3 Data The Data menu allows for channel, zone, and system settings to be imported, exported or set to factory defaults. Item name Description Import Export Reset This screen allows for the import of all channel, zone, and system settings. Reference 3.6.5 Importing/Exporting for more information. This screen allows for the export of all channels, zones and system settings. Reference 3.6.5 Importing/Exporting for more information. Reset the MTP136D to all factory defaults. This will clear/reset all channel, zone, system settings and keys. Reference 3.6.12 Reset to Defaults for more information. 3.3.2.7.4 System Table 22: Data Menu Options They system menu provides access to items that are not required during regular use of the MTP136D. This menu provides access the screens listed in Table 23. Item name Description Info Login Errors Test Prgm Keys Provides general software information. Provides access to login screen. Provides access to the error submenu. Provides access to diagnostic items. Provides access to the firmware submenu. Provides the ability to enable extended feature sets. Table 23: System Menu Options 3.3.2.7.4.1 Info This screen provides software information about the MTP136D. The items in Table 24 are unique for the Main and Guard radio. All items are read only. Item name Description Descr. Description of the radio. This will always display VHF Radio for the MTP136D-000GN. Type of Radio Installed. This will always display P25 for the MTP136D-000GN. Type of Radio Installed. This will always display Digital for the MTP136D-000GN. The serial number of the installed radio. The firmware version of the installed radio. Type Mode Serial SW Ver. Table 24: Info Screen Radio Dependent Options Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 47 of 94 The items in Table 25 are applicable to the MTP136D and are not specific to a radio. All items are ready only. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Item name Model Serial Software Version CRC User Hash Admin Hash Factory Hash Channels Hash ID Lists Hash Description The model number of the MTP136D. The serial number of the MTP136D. The software version of the MTP136D. The current CRC value. See 3.6.11 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) for more information. Displays the unique hash that is created by calculating all user settings. Displays the unique hash that is created by calculating all admin settings. Displays the unique hash that is created by calculating all factory settings. Displays the unique hash that is created by calculating all channel and zone settings. Displays the unique hash that is created by calculating all List settings. This is calculated using only the Tones, Codes, TGID, and NAC Lists. Table 25: Info Screen Radio Independent Options 3.3.2.7.4.2 Login This screen allows the user to enter a password to gain access to the admin permission level. See 3.6.3.1 Accessing Admin Permission Level permission for more info. 3.3.2.7.4.3 Errors The Errors menu provides the user the ability view or export the error log. See 3.4.13 Errors for more information. Setting Name View Export Description View all errors that are recorded in the error log. Export the error log to a connected device. Table 26: Error Menu Options 3.3.2.7.4.4 Test This screen provides an overview of general system health and the status of the connected rear IO pins, faceplate buttons and knobs. When this screen is accessed, a white banner will appear at the bottom of the screen stating DIAGNOSTIC on the right side of the banner. This banner can only be cleared by restarting the MTP136D. All Test screen items can only be viewed, except for the Test Tone and Test Tone Level setting. These settings will automatically be reset to their default settings once the MTP136D is power cycled. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 48 of 94 The following items are viewable for each radio:

MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Item Name Volume Temperature Max TX Temp Overheated Description The volume level of the radio. The temperature of the internal radio module. Maximum temperature at which the radio will transmit. Reference 3.4.3.3 High Power Overtemperature Transmit Lockout for more information. Displays if the radio module is overheated or within normal operating temperature. Reference 3.4.3.3 High Power Overtemperature Transmit Lockout for more information. TX Power Limited Displays if the radio is limited to low power transmissions due Serial Port to overheating. Reference 3.4.3.3 High Power Overtemperature Transmit Lockout for more information. This setting will always state Control for the MTP136D-000GN. Table 27: Test Screen Radio Dependent Options The following items are applicable to the MTP136D and are not specific to a radio:

Item name Detent 1 Volume 1 Detent 2 Volume 2 Last Button PTT PTT Timeout PTT Timeout Description Displays if the main volume knob is in the fully counterclockwise position known as Detent. Displays the value of the main volume without the minimum volume offset. Displays if the guard volume knob is in the fully counterclockwise position known as Detent. Displays the value of the guard volume without the minimum volume offset. Displays the name of the last button that was pressed. Displays if the PTT key is activated. Displays the maximum time the radio can continuously transmit. Reference 3.4.3.2 Transmit Timeout for more information. Displayed if the radio has exceeded its maximum continuous transmit time. Reference 3.4.3.2 Transmit Timeout for more information. Displays if the rear pin 4 CHAN/SELECT + pin is asserted. Displays if the rear pin 5 CHAN/SELECT - pin is asserted. Increment Decrement Panel Dimming Displays the input voltage applied to pin 3 PANEL LIGHTING as a percentage. The percentage is scaled based on the Max Voltage setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options. When enabled this will play a 1 kHz test tone. This item is only accessible with admin login. Test Tone Options include:

Left: The tone will be routed to the connected headset. Right: The tone will be transmitted on the active channel of the focused radio when the user keys the radio. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 49 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Item name Test Tone Level Controls the tone level of the test tone. This item is only Description Mode accessible with admin login. The current mode of the USB-C Port. Options include:

Device: Will always be displayed when no USB device is detected, or an import/export is in progress. Host: This is displayed when the MTP136D is being controlled by a connected device. This occurs during software updates. Displays the remaining lifespan of the internal memory module. Displays the internal microcontroller temperature. Displays the temperature of the internal power supply. Displays the voltage supplied to the internal microcontroller. Displays the voltage from the internal 3.9V power supply. Displays the voltage from the internal 5V power supply. Displays the voltage from the internal 12V power supply. Displays the voltage from the internal 13.9V power supply. Table 28: Test Screen Radio Independent Options Memory Life MCU Temp. Supply Temp. 3.3V Supply 3.9V Supply 5V Supply 12V Supply 13.9V Supply Button Test The button test allows the user to quickly diagnose if a button is damaged. The test allows all buttons to be pressed without the MTP136D responding. To access the button test, navigate to the screen item Last Button on the Test screen and press the menu button. From the menu select Button Test. Any button that is pressed will be displayed by the Last button item on the test screen. To exit the Button test, press the menu button. Note: When testing the discrete inputs CHAN/SELECT + and CHAN/SELECT the screen item last button will display Encoder + and Encoder -

respectively. Reference the screen items increment and decrement to view the state of the CHAN/SELECT + and CHAN/SELECT pins. Screen Test The screen test allows the user to diagnose if any LCD pixel has become damaged by showing several different blocks of colours on screen. This test can be accessed by pressing the menu button on the Test screen and selecting the Screen test. The onscreen colour can be changed by rotating the rotary selector. The screen test is automatically exited once all screen colours have been displayed. The displayed colours blocks are: Black, Red, Green, Blue, White. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 50 of 94 3.3.2.7.4.5 PRGM MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The Program (PRGM) menu allows for firmware updates to the MTP136D and the main and guard radios. The PRGM menu is only selectable when the admin login level has been applied. Reference 3.6.3.1 Accessing Admin Permission Level for more information. The programming operation is started by selecting the device to be programmed from the PRGM menu, reference Table 29. Once the screen is opened and a USB device is inserted, press PRGM from the menu. Reference 3.6.4 Firmware Update for more information. Firmware updates and update instructions must be acquired from AEM directly. Note: Do Not Power Cycle the MTP136D While Programing. Setting Name Main Guard System Description Update the firmware of the main radio. Update the firmware of the guard radio. Update the firmware of the MTP136D. Table 29: PRGM Menu Options Figure 16: Program Radio Screen Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 51 of 94 3.3.2.7.4.6 Keys MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The keys screen allows the entering of keys. Keys are used to unlock extended functionality such as Agile Edit and Wideband modulation. Keys can be added or deleted by pressing the Menu button and selecting the desired option. Note: Keys cannot be transferred through the import/export functionality. Keys must be manually entered through the Keys screen. When adding keys, the entered key can be validated by pressing the rotary selector or pressing add from the menu. Reference 3.6.1 Keys for more information. Figure 17: Keys Screen When entering a key, pressing the menu provides the options listed in Table 30. Setting Name Delete Clear Add Description Delete the character currently selected by the blinking cursor. Clear the entire key that has been entered. Validate and enter the key. Table 30: Keys Menu Options Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 52 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.3.2.8 Bright The brightness screen allows for software adjustment of the LCD dimming. The Bright screen also allows the user to view the dimming adjustment provided by the hardware dimming bus and determine if the MTP136D is in day or night mode. The brightness screen can be accessed from multiple menu locations. Reference 3.4.8 MTP136D Brightness for details. Figure 18: Brightness Screen Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 53 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4 Basic Operations 3.4.1 Changing the Focused Radio The default configuration allows the focused radio to only be changed by pressing the radio selector. The focused radio can be switched on any MTP136D screen by pressing the radio selector. This behaviour can be changed by setting the primary input setting to radio. Reference 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options for more information. When the primary input setting is set to radio the following methods can be used to change the focused radio. a) Pressing the radio selector. b) Rotating the rotary selector. c) Using the discrete CHAN/SELECT + and CHAN/SELECT - inputs. d) Entering the radio number (1 for main or 2 for guard) using the keypad and then pressing the rotary selector. 3.4.2 Channels The MTP136D supports the use of 5000 channels and a minimum of 1 channel. A channel is always assigned to a zone and can only be used within the assigned zone. It is not possible to move a channel between zones. 3.4.2.1 Changing the Active Channel The radio options screen allows for the active channel of the unfocused and focused radio to be changed. Reference 3.3.2.1 Radio for more information. To change the channel of the focused radio the user must be on the home screen with the menu closed. When the primary input setting is set to Channel (default) the active channel can be changed using the methods listed below. See 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options for more information. a) Rotating the rotary selector. b) Using the discrete CHAN/SELECT + and CHAN/SELECT - inputs. c) Entering the channel number using the keypad and then pressing the rotary selector. d) Pressing the channel recall button. This will toggle between the current and the last selected channel used on the focused radio. If the primary input setting is set to Radio, the above methods are still valid;

however, the user must press the rotary selector before using the above methods. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 54 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.2.2 Channel Attributes Each channel has the following modifiable attributes. These attributes can only be changed by the user if the administrator has granted the appropriate zone-specific permissions. See 3.4.5.4 Zone Permissions for more information. Note: Channel attributes cannot be edited unless the agile edit key has been entered. Reference 3.6.2 Agile Edit for more information. 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 19: Channel Attributes 8 9 10 11

Item Modulation type Description The modulation type used on the channel. Options include:

N: Narrowband W: Wideband D: Digital The channel number range is between 1-5000. The channel number can only be edited by going to the Channel Select screen and moving the position of the channel in the list. Reference 3.4.7.2 Creating and Managing Lists Members for more information. The name of the channel allows for 18 ASCII Characters. Channel number Channel name Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 55 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual

Item Receive Frequency Description The frequency that will be used for all receive operations. The range allows for 136.0000-173.9975 MHz. Zone Name In Scan List This can only be changed from the Zone Edit screen. This field allows for 18 ASCII Characters. Reference 3.4.5.2 Edit a Zone for more information. The channel is included in the scanning list when the symbol is visible. Reference 3.4.4.3.5 Scanning List for more information. TX Power Indicator Tx power indicator. Reference 3.4.3.1 Transmit Power for more information. Options include:

HI: All transmissions will be in high power (10W). The indicator will be highlighted when high power is selected. LO: All transmissions will be in low power

(1W). Priority Scanning Indicators Receive Channel Signaling The channel is assigned as either the P1 or P2 channel when one of these symbols is visible. This is used for scanning algorithms that support priority channels. Reference 3.4.4.3.4 Set Priority Channels to set the channel as a priority channel. The receive channel signaling applied to the current channel. This can be set to use Tones, Codes, NAC, TGID. Reference 3.4.6 Channel Signaling for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 56 of 94

Item Transmit Channel Signaling Transmit Frequency MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Description The transmit channel signaling applied to the current channel. This can be set to use Tones, Codes, NAC, TGID. Reference 3.4.6 Channel Signaling for more information. The frequency that will be used for all transmit operations. The range allows for 136.0000-173.9975 MHz. Table 31: Channel Atributes 3.4.2.3 Edit Active Channel To quickly edit the active channel of the focused radio, press the Edit option from the home screen menu. Figure 20: Home Screen Menu Edit Selected The Edit Menu provides the ability to edit all or only specific channel attributes. Reference Table 32 for the available options. If any of the options listed in Table 32 are marked with the administrator restrictions. Reference 3.4.5.4 Zone Permissions for more information. icon, the user cannot edit the channel attribute due to Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 57 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Item name All Description Edit all information of the active channel. Name RX Freq TX Freq RX NAC/Tone/Code Edit only the receive NAC/Tone/Code of the active Edit only the name of the active channel. Edit only the receive frequency of the active channel. Edit only the transmit frequency of the active channel. channel. The user can only select a channel signal from the channels currently selected channel signaling type. TX NAC/Tone/Code Edit only the transmit NAC/Tone/Code of the active channel. Table 32: Home Screen Edit Submenu Options Once an item from Table 32 has been selected the user will be able to change the selected channel parameter as shown in Figure 21. Figure 21: Edit Active Chanel on Focused Radio Note: The - - symbols in Figure 21 indicate that the channel parameter has not been set. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 58 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.2.4 Edit All Channels in Active Zone To edit any channel in the active zone of the focused radio, access the Channel Select screen from the List Menu, and select channel to be edited. This opens the Channel Edit screen which provides the options listed in Table 33 for to edit the channel. Reference 3.4.7 Lists and 3.4.5 Zones for more information. Figure 22: Channel Edit Screen Item name Enabled Description No idea Name Scan Change the name of the channel. Controls if the channel is included in the scan list. Reference 3.4.4.3.5 Scanning List for more information. Options include:

Yes: The channel is in the scan list. This channel will be scanned in all List scanning algorithms. No: The channel is not in the scan list. This channel will not be scanned in any List scanning algorithms. Modulation Change the modulation type of the channel. Options include:

Options include:

Digital Wideband Narrowband Tx Power Rx/Tx Frequency Set the frequency that will be used. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 59 of 94 Item name Rx/Tx Tone Type Select the channel signaling type that will be used. Reference Description 3.4.6 Channel Signaling for more information. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Options Include:

Tone Code NAC Rx/Tx Tone Type 3.4.2.5 Edit All Channels in Any Zone Table 33: Channel Edit Screen Options To edit all channels in any zone, select the zone to be edited from the zone select screen. Reference 3.4.7 Lists for more information. From the zone select screen use the Channels screen item to open the channel select screen. Reference 3.4.5.2 Edit a Zone for more information. When the channel select screen is open all information presented in 3.4.2.4 Edit All Channels in Active Zone is applicable. 3.4.3 Transmitting The main and guard radios are capable of transmitting in the 136-174 MHz range. The MTP136D is only half-duplex capable which does not allow for transmit and receive functionality at the same time, or to transmit simultaneously on the main and guard radio. The MTP136D will transmit when the PTT switch is keyed (Pin 13 MIC KEY). Keying the PTT will begin a transmission on the active channel of the focused radio. It is not possible to transmit using the unfocused radio. 3.4.3.1 Transmit Power Transmission can occur with two power levels HI (10W) and LO (1W). The power level is changed between HI and LO by pressing the transmit power button. The transmit power button can be configured to change the power level of the active channel on the focused radio, or to affect all channels on both the main and guard radio. Reference the TX Power Scop in Table 20: Admin Options Screen Radio Independent Options for more information. 3.4.3.2 Transmit Timeout To ensure the operator does not inadvertently transmit for an extended period, a customizable transmit timeout timer is implemented. This timer automatically stops any active transmission after the time set by the PTT Timeout in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options is exceeded. To resume transmitting the operator must unkey and then rekey the PTT. There is no time delay required to be able to rekey the PTT. Under special circumstances the administrator can disable the transmit timeout timer using the PTT Timeout setting. This is not recommended as the operator could inadvertently transmit indefinitely. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 60 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.3.3 High Power Overtemperature Transmit Lockout The high power overtemperature transmit lockout forcefully stops all high-power transmissions when the MTP136D internal temperature limit of 100C is reached. When the temperature limit is reached, the MTP136D will automatically force any active transmissions into the Low transmit power mode and continue the transmission. The user is notified of the high power overtemperature transmit lockout by 3 blinks of the transmit power indicator and the transmit power indicator indicating as LO! The overtemperature lockout is automatically removed once the MTP136D is below the internal temperature limit. Figure 23: High Power Overtemperature Transmit Lockout Active The MTP136D will never limit low power transmissions or receive functionality due to overtemperature limitations. The temperature and overheated menu items on the Test screen can be used to identify the MTP136D internal temperatures and provide indication if a radio has overheated. Reference 3.3.2.7.4.4 Test for more information. 3.4.4 Receiving Both the main and guard radio are capable of receiving in the 136-174 MHz range. The MTP136D is only half-duplex capable which does not allow the MTP136D to transmit and receive at the same time. The main and guard radios can receive audio simultaneously. This allows received audio from both radios to be heard in the operators headset at the same time. Received audio will always be routed to the headset regardless of the radio being focused or unfocused. If the user suspects that communication is not being heard due to a low RF signal level or nonmatching signaling tones, the monitor function can be activated, or the squelch threshold can be decreased. Reference 3.4.4.1 Monitor and 3.4.4.2 Squelch Threshold for more information. This scenario can be identified when the MON indicator is highlighted, but the RX indicator is not. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 61 of 94 3.4.4.1 Monitor MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The monitor function allows the operator to bypass and defeat any channel signaling and receive signal strength requirements. When the monitor function is activated, the operator will be able to hear all noise, weak signals, and communications regardless of any channel signaling requirements. The monitor function can be turned on temporarily by pressing the monitor button or can be latched on by pressing and holding the monitor button for a duration set by the hold time setting. The MTP136D is factory programmed to latch the monitor function when the monitor button is pressed and held. The Monitor function is unlatched when the monitor button is pressed again. The latching feature is controlled by the monitor latch and hold time setting, reference 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options. Reference the monitor scope setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options to select if pressing the monitor button will override squelch the focused radio or both radios. While digital monitor is enabled; activating the monitor function while having an active digital channel will set the applied NAC to the listen to all NAC F7E. When enabled the digital monitor allows only signals within the current TGID to be heard. When disabled the user will hear all communication in and out of the set TGID. Reference the digital monitor setting in 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options. 3.4.4.2 Squelch Threshold The squelch threshold controls how strong a received signal must be in order to hear audio in the headset. This allows for noise and undesired strong signals to be rejected. The squelch threshold can be uniquely set for each installed radio. To change the Squelch threshold, reference the Squelch Threshold setting in 3.3.2.1 Radio. The three supported squelch thresholds are detailed in Table 34. Squelch Threshold Description Low Medium High This will allow weak signals to be heard by the operator. This is recommended when operating across large distances, or where RF traffic is minimal. This will allow most communication signals to be heard by the operator. This is recommended setting for urban and semi urban environments where medium RF activity is expected. This will allow only strong communication signals to be heard by the operator. This is recommended in environments where high RF activity is expected. Table 34: Squelch Threshold Options 3.4.4.3 Scanning The scanning feature allows for the automatic detection of signals across a predefined list of channels. Once a signal is detected the radio will temporarily Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 62 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual remain on the channel (locked) where the signal was received and provide the user an opportunity to reply on that channel. The scanning feature can be used individually for the main and guard radio, or simultaneously. The scanning feature must be enabled by the administrator for each zone. Reference the scan setting in 3.4.5.4 Zone Permissions for details. Scanning can be enabled or disabled on a per radio basis using the following methods:

a) Focus on the desired radio and press Scan from the home screen menu. b) Edit the Scan setting from the Radio Options screen. Reference 3.3.2.1 Radio for more information. The scan algorithm can be changed on a per radio basis using the following methods:

a) Rotating the rotary selector while actively scanning on the focused radio. b) Edit the Scan Algo. Setting from the Radio Options screen. Reference 3.3.2.1 Radio for more information. Symbol Scanning Algo. Scanned Channels List Only channels in the scan list are scanned. Priority Only P1, P2, and the Home channels are scanned. List + Priority All priority, Home, and list channels are scanned. Zone Only channels in the active zone are scanned. Zone + Priority All priority, Home, and zone channels are scanned. 3.4.4.3.1 General Scanning Behaviour Table 35: Available Scanning Algorithms All scanning algorithms operate using the same general rules. The only difference between the scanning algorithms are the channels that are scanned. The following is true for all scanning algorithms:

a) The MTP136D will remain actively scanning unless the user chooses to exit the scanning mode. b) The MTP136D will assign the home channel to be the active channel when the scanning algorithm is entered. c) The MTP136D will always scan the scan list in the numerical order of the scan list. d) Priority channels are scanned in the order of P1, P2, Home. e) When a radio signal lock is lost, the MTP136D will stay on that channel for three seconds before scanning other channels. f) After transmitting on a signal locked channel, the MTP136D will stay on that channel for three seconds before scanning other channels. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 63 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual g) All channels in the scan list, except P1, P2, Home, can be temporarily deleted from the scan list by pressing delete from the menu. The deleted channel will automatically be reinserted into the scan list once the scanning is exited. 3.4.4.3.2 Home Channel The Home channel is automatically set to be the active channel when the scanning mode is entered. The Home channel is a priority channel and is assigned the lowest priority. The following is always true for the home channel. a) The home channel is always the active channel when the scanning mode is entered. b) The home channel is included in every scanning algorithm. c) The home channel will be used to transmit if the radio is not locked on a channel. d) The home channel cannot be deleted from the scanning list. 3.4.4.3.3 Priority Channels The MTP136D supports the use of two priority channels for each configured zone. These are named P1 and P2. When the selected scanning type supports the use of Priority channels, the priority and home channels will be scanned at a higher scanning interval than all other channels. These channels will be scanned in the sequence of P1, P2, Home followed by as many scan list channels that can be scanned within the timeframe set by the priority scan rate. Reference for 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options more information regarding the Priority scan rate. When priority channels are supported by the scanning type the following will always be true:

a) When a signal is received on P1, the MTP136D will remain on P1 until the signal is lost. b) When a signal is received on P2, the MTP136D will periodically scan P1 and check for a radio signal. If a signal is present on P1 the MTP136D will lock onto P1. The MTP136D will perform this check at an interval specified by the priority scan rate. c) When a signal is received on Home, the MTP136D will scan P1 and P2 to check for a radio signal. If a signal is present on P1 or P2 it will lock onto that channel. The MTP136D will perform this check at an interval specified by the priority scan rate. d) A priority channel cannot be deleted from the scanning list. Note: A priority channel can still be assigned as a regular scan list channel. 3.4.4.3.4 Set Priority Channels The priority channels can be set using the following methods:

a) Using the P1 and P2 settings described in 3.4.5.2 Edit a Zone. b) Using the Scan menu setting referenced in 3.4.7.2 Creating and Managing Lists Members. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 64 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.4.3.5 Scanning List The scanning list is a list of channels that are used during the scanning algorithms List and List + Priority scanning. This list identifies which channels will be continuously scanned during the previously listed scanning algorithms. A channel marked with the channel in the scan list reference 3.4.2 Channels. symbol is included in the scanning list. To add or remove a 3.4.4.3.6 Set Scanning List A channel can be added into the zones scan list by following the methods listed in 3.4.2 Channels and editing the In Scan List status shown in Table 31: Channel Atributes. 3.4.4.3.7 Home Screen while Scanning While a radio is scanning it will display different information based on the radio being focused and if has locked onto a channel. Reference Table 36 and the sections below for more information regarding what the MTP136D displays for each radio status. In all images in Table 36 the main radio is in the scanning mode while the guard radio is not. Focused Radio Unfocused Radio Not Locked on a Channel Locked on a Channel Table 36: Channel Attributes Displayed while Main Radio is Scanning When a radio is focused and locked on a channel the following items are available from the menu. Setting Name Description Scan Next Stay Delete Exit scanning mode. Remove channel lock and continue scanning. Stay on current channel and exit scanning for the focused radio. Temporarily remove the locked channel from the scan list. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 65 of 94 Settings Bright Open the settings menu. Open the Brightness screen. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Table 37: Scanning Menu Options While Locked on a Chanel When a radio is focused and not locked on a channel the following items are available from the menu. Item name Description Radio Scan More Opens the Radio screen. Exits the scanning mode for the focused radio. Opens the More Menu. Table 38: Scanning Menu Options While Not Locked on a Chanel 3.4.5 Zones A Zone is a list of channels and permissions. The MTP136D supports the use of 40 zones which are accessible to both the main and guard radio. There is no limit as to how many channels can be added per zone, providing the total number of channels across all zones does not exceed 5000. Zones are categorized as lists and follow the same menu structure as all lists. Channels are considered list members when in reference to zones. For steps required to create, edit, or delete a zone, or a channel reference 3.4.7 Lists. Each zone has the ability to apply one channel signaling list for each channel signaling type (Tones, Codes, TAC, TGID). A zone can only be edited by the user if the administrator has granted the appropriate zone specific permissions. See 3.4.5.4 Zone Permissions for more information. Note: Zones cannot be edited unless the agile edit key has been entered. Reference 3.6.1 Keys for more information. 3.4.5.1 Changing the Active Zone The active zone for a radio can be changed from the following locations:

a) The active zone for any radio can be changed from the radio options menu. Reference the zone option in 3.3.2.1 Radio for more information. b) The zone of the active radio can be changed from the zone option from the home screen menu. Reference zone in Table 12: Home Screen Menu for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 66 of 94 P1 P2 Code NAC TGID MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.5.2 Edit a Zone To manage all zones or create a new zone reference 3.4.7.1 Creating and Managing Lists. The Zone select screen provides the ability to edit all information for every zone in the MTP136D. Once a zone has been selected for editing the Zone edit screen will open. The settings listed in Table 39 are individually configurable for each zone. Setting Name Description Name Channels Change the name of the zone. Edit a channel in the zone. See 3.4.2 Channels for more information. Select the main priority channel that will be used in the scanning algorithms that support priority channels. Select the secondary priority channel that will be used in the scanning algorithms that support priority channels. 3.4.5.3 Applying a Channel Signaling List to a Zone Table 39: Zone Options Every zone supports the simultaneous use of all four channel signaling list types. A channel signaling list can be applied from the zone edit screen. Reference Table 40 for the settings available on the zone edit screen that allow for the assignment of channel signaling lists to a zone. Setting Name Description Tone Apply a Tone list to the zone. If none is selected, then all tones can be selected. Apply a Code list to the zone. If none is selected, then all codes can be selected. Apply a NAC list to the zone. If none is selected, then all NAC items can be selected. Apply a TGID list to the zone. If none is selected, then all TGID items can be selected. 3.4.5.4 Zone Permissions Table 40: Lists applied to Zone The following permission settings control zone specific access of various agile edit functionality. All permissions are unique to each zone. These permissions, except for the protected screen item, can only be viewed with the admin login level. Setting Protected Description An indicator that is viewable by the admin and user. This indicator will state Yes when one or more items in this table are set to the admin permission setting. If no items in this table is set to admin, the indicator will state No. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 67 of 94 Write Name Scan Modulation Rx Frequency Rx Tone Type Rx Tone/Code Rx NAC Rx TGID Tx Frequency Tx Tone Type Tx Tone/Code Tx NAC Tx TGID MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Controls the ability for the user to change the settings listed in Table 39: Zone Options. This setting will limit the users ability to create or delete a channel in the zone and stop the user from deleting the zone. It will not limit the users ability to edit an existing channel. This setting will also automatically set all settings in this table to either user or admin, as selected. The admin can still overwrite each setting in this table manually as required. Controls the ability for the user to change the name of a channel. Controls the ability for the user to enable scanning for the selected zone. Controls the ability for the user to change the modulation type for channels. Controls the ability for the user to change the channels receive frequency. Controls the ability for the user to change a between tones or codes for receive. Controls the ability for the user to change the applied tone or code for receive. Controls the ability for the user to change a channels NAC for receive. Controls the ability for the user to change a channels TGID for receive. Controls the ability for the user to change the channels transmit frequency. Controls the ability for the user to change a between tones or codes for transmit. Controls the ability for the user to change the applied tone or code for transmit. Controls the ability for the user to change a channels NAC for receive. Controls the ability for the user to change a channels TGID for transmit. Table 41: Zone Specific Permissions 3.4.5.5 Zone Edit Screen Menu Pressing the menu button while on the Zone edit screen will show the options in Table 42. Setting Name Description Channel Tone Opens the channel select screen. If all settings in Table 41, except write, are set to admin, the user cannot use this setting and will be marked with the Opens the tone list edit screen. If no tone list has been assigned to the zone the used. symbol is shown, and this setting cannot be symbol. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 68 of 94 Code NAC TGID MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual symbol is shown, and this setting Opens the Code list edit screen. If no code list has been assigned to the zone the cannot be used. Opens the NAC list edit screen. If no NAC list has been assigned to the zone the cannot be used. Opens the TGID list edit screen. If no TGID list has been assigned to the zone the cannot be used. symbol is shown, and this setting symbol is shown, and this setting 3.4.5.6 Locking a Radio to a Zone Table 42: Zone Edit Screen Menu Options The main and guard radio can be locked to a specific zone by the administrator. A radio is locked to a zone by setting the Zone Permissions setting to admin and then selecting the active zone for the desired radio. When a radio is locked to a zone the user cannot use any methods to change the zone for the locked radio. Reference 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options for more information regarding the Zone Permissions setting. Figure 24: Guard Radio Locked to a Zone (indicated by italic text) This feature is primarily intended to support the configuration of a dedicated guard radio. Reference 3.6.6 Configuring a Guard Radio for the required steps to setup a radio as a dedicated guard radio. 3.4.6 Channel Signaling Channel signaling provides different methods to allow multiple users to communicate on the same frequency without receiving messages from unwanted users. Standard industry usage of these methods is beyond the scope of this manual and will not be covered. The Tones, Codes, NAC, and TGID can be applied individually for transmit and receive operations on a per channel basis. Reference 3.3.2.5 Channel Methods to apply channel signaling is covered in the channels section. When applying channel signaling to a channel, the following must be noted:

a) When a zone has an applicable list applied, rotating the rotary selector will only show the channel signaling available in the applied list for the specified channel modulation. signaling b) When a zone does not have an applicable list applied, rotating rotary selector will show all possible channel signaling for the specified channel modulation. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 69 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual c) They keypad can be used to enter any channel signaling item, using the active display format, regardless of the list that is applied to the zone. Lists provide the user a custom selection of frequently used channel signaling Tone, Code, NAC and TGID values for quick access. Lists allow the operator to only scroll through frequently used channel signals by using the rotary selector. Lists are a shortcut method to access frequently used channel signals, but do not limit the user from accessing any available channel signals. Any channel signals can be applied by entering the selective identifier with the keypad, even when a list has been applied to a zone. Each zone supports having one channel signaling list applied for each list type

(Tone, Code, NAC, TGID). A list can be assigned to as many zones as desired. See 3.4.5.3 Applying a Channel Signaling List to a Zone for the required steps. For more information regarding lists reference 3.4.7 Lists. For information regarding the display format reference 3.4.6.5 Channel Signaling Formats. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 70 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.6.1 Tone (CTCSS) The MTP136D supports the use of the extended 50 CTCSS subaudible tone set. CTCSS codes can be used for wideband and narrowband channels. All supported CTCSS tones are listed below by their applicable display format. 7Z 7A 2B 3Z 3A 3B 4Z 4A 4B 5Z 5A FREQ MCODE WCODE FREQ MCODE WCODE FREQ MCODE WCODE 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 159.8 2 162.2 165.5 165.5 2 167.9 171.3 171.3 2 173.8 177.3 177.3 2 179.9 183.5 183.5 2 186.2 189.9 189.9 2 192.8 196.6 196.6 2 199.5 199.5 2 203.5 206.5 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 254.1 XZ WZ XA WA XB WB1 YZ YA YB ZZ ZA ZB 1Z 1A 1B 2Z 2A 1 51 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31 52 32 53 33 54 34 55 35 56 36 57 37 58 61 38 62 41 42 43 47 44 45 46 63 M1 8Z M2 M3 M4 9Z M5 M6 M7 0Z 5B 6A 6B 6Z Table 43: Tones (CTCSS) 1 Also know as SP. 2 No Motorola Code assigned to this CTCSS frequency. Tone will remain displayed in Frequency format when format is set to MCODE. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 71 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.6.2 Code (CDCSS) The MTP136D supports the use 106 CDCSS codes. CDCSS codes can be applied for narrowband and wideband channels. The following CDCSS codes are supported. 0nn 017 023 025 026 031 032 036 043 047 050 051 053 054 065 071 072 073 074 1nn 114 115 116 122 125 131 132 134 143 145 152 155 156 162 165 172 174 2nn 205 212 223 225 226 243 244 245 246 251 252 255 261 263 265 266 271 274 3nn 306 311 315 325 331 332 343 346 351 356 364 365 371 CDCSS Codes 4nn 411 412 413 423 431 432 445 446 452 454 455 462 464 465 466 5nn 503 506 516 523 526 532 546 565 6nn 606 612 624 627 631 632 654 662 664 7nn 703 712 723 731 732 734 743 754 3.4.6.3 TGID Table 44: Codes (CDCSS) The radios support the use of talkgroups in the range of $0001 and $FFFF. Talkgroups are a group of users within a trunked radio system. The talkgroup $0000 is not supported by the MTP136D. 3.4.6.4 NAC The radios support the use of all NAC codes in the range of $000 $FFF. NAC codes can only be used for digital channels. Frequently used special P25 NAC codes are shown below:

Code Description

$293 This is the default NAC code and commonly used on interoperability channels and ham radio equipment.

$F7E This code will cause the MTP136D to ignore all receive NAC codes. This is the equivalent of having no signaling selected in analog channel modulation. 0xF7F The MTP136D will allow all incoming NAC codes and will transmit using the received NAC code. Table 45: Special NAC Codes Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 72 of 94 3.4.6.5 Channel Signaling Formats MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The MTP136D supports displaying channel signaling using different display formats. This allows the operator to view and enter a channel signaling in the format they are most familiar with. The selected display format is the only format that can be used to edit a channels signal using the keypad. The selected display format will be applied to the main and guard radio. In addition to industry standard display formats, custom labels can be applied to channel signals. See 3.4.7.2 Creating and Managing Lists Members to edit a list members label. When the label display format is enabled, it will take priority over all other display formats. The user cannot select a channel signal by entering its label using the keypad. Note: Do not set a channel signal to have more than one label e.g. CTCSS tone 67.0 should not have an assigned label of Tone 1 and Tone 2. The options listed in Table 46 show the supported display formats for each channel signaling type. Channel Signaling Type Display Formats Tone Label, Frequency, Mcode (Motorola code), Wcode (Wolfsburg code) Label, Code Label, Hex, Decimal Label, Hex, Decimal Table 46: Channel Signaling Display Formats Code NAC TGID Figure 25: Format Display Menu The display format can be changed in the following locations:

a) The Format option from the Home Screen Menu. Reference 3.3.2 Menu for more information. b) The Radio Options Screen. Reference 3.3.2.1 Radio for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 73 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual c) The format option from the agile edit screens menu. Reference 3.3.2.3 Edit for more information. d) The format option from the menu of the channel edit screen. Reference 3.4.7.2 Creating and Managing Lists Members for more information. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 74 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.7 Lists Lists are a collection of similar items, such as channels, zones, tone, codes, NAC, TGID. The items in these lists are called list members. Lists and list members can be copied, inserted, moved, or deleted. Due to the complexity of features available to zones and channels, additional information is detailed in 3.3.2.4 Zone and 3.4.2 Channels. All selection and edit screens will only allow for edits if the agile edit key is entered. Reference 3.6.1 Keys for more information. Figure 26: List and List Member Edit Screens List Zone Channel N/A Tone Code TGID NAC 8 8 8 8 QTY of Lists QTY of Members 40 5000 (see note) 5000 (see note) 96 96 96 96 Table 47: Quantity of Lists and List Members Note: The MTP136D supports a total of 5000 channels that can be divided across a maximum of 40 zones. There is no limit as to how many channels can be added per zone, providing the total number of channels across all zones does not exceed 5000. This allows the MTP136D to be configured to utilize only one zone, which has the ability to hold all 5000 channels. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 75 of 94 3.4.7.1 Creating and Managing Lists MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual The menu structure for creating, copying, moving and deleting a list is identical for all list types. From the list select screen the user can either select a list for editing or press the menu button for more options. Pressing the menu button on the list select screen will show the options in Table 48. Setting Description Edit Insert Edit the currently selected list. This opens the list edit screen. Create a new list. Copy Move Once pressed the user must select in what position the list is to be placed in the list select screen using the rotary selector. Once the list is in the desired position the rotary selector must be pressed to save the lists position as well as the list itself. Create a new list by copying all properties of the selected list. Once pressed the user must select in what position the list is to be placed in the list select screen using the rotary selector. Once the list is in the desired position the rotary selector must be pressed to save the lists position as well as the list itself. Move the selected list to a different position in the list select screen. The list is moved by rotating the rotary selector. Moving a list does not change any information in the list. Once the list is in the desired position the rotary selector must be pressed to save the lists position. Delete Delete the selected list. Table 48: List Select Menu Options When editing a channel signaling list (Tone, Code, NAC, TGID), the options in Table 49 are available. Setting Name Tones/Codes/NACS/TGID The name of the screen item will change based on Description Change the name of the list. Write Access the list type selected. Selecting this item will open the corresponding list member select screen. Controls what permission level is required to edit the list. This option is only visible when logged in as Admin. When set to admin the user cannot edit any items in the list member select screen. Table 49: List Edit Screen Options Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 76 of 94 3.4.7.2 Creating and Managing Lists Members MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual List members are any Channel, Tone, Code, NAC, TGID that are used in a list. A list member can be created, copied, edited, moved, or deleted by opening the menu of the list member select screen. From the list member select screen the user can either select a list member for editing or press the menu button for more options. Pressing the menu button on the list member select screen will open the options shown in Table 51. Setting Edit Insert Description Edit the currently selected list member. This opens the list member edit screen. Create a new list member. Copy Move Delete Scan Once pressed the user must select in what position the list member is to be placed in the list member select screen using the rotary selector. Once the list member is in the desired position the rotary selector must be pressed to save the lists members position as well as the list member itself. Create a new list member by copying all properties of the selected list member. Once pressed the user must select in what position the list member is to be placed in the list select member screen using the rotary selector. Once the list member is in the desired position the rotary selector must be pressed to save the list members position as well as the list member itself. Move the selected list member to a different position in the list member select screen. The list is moved by rotating the rotary selector. Moving a list does not change any information in the list. Once the list is in the desired position the rotary selector must be pressed to save the lists position. Delete the selected list. Only available on the channel select screen. This allows for the assignment of P1, P2, or scan list enrolment for the currently selected channel. The screen indicators for P1, P2 and will be displayed when selected for the channel. Reference Figure 27 for visual reference. Table 50: List Member Select Menu Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 77 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Figure 27: Channel Select Screen Menu A list member can be selected for editing by pushing the rotary selector on the desired list member or by selecting edit from the list member select menu. When editing a channel signaling list member (tone, code, NAC, TGID), the options in Table 51 are available. For options available when editing a channel, reference 3.4.2.4 Edit All Channels in Active Zone. Setting Label Description Change the label that will be used for the label display format. The label is unique to the list member in which the list member is created. This allows different lists to have a unique label for each channel signaling value. Tones/Codes/NACS/TGID Change the applicable channel signaling value. Write Access Controls what permission level is required to edit the channel signaling list member. This setting is only displayed when logged in with the admin permission level. The available options are as follows:

Admin: Admin login level is required to edit the channel signaling list member. User: User login level is required to edit the channel signaling list member. Table 51: List Member Select Screen Options Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 78 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.8 MTP136D Brightness The MTP136D allows for individual control of the brightness of the faceplate (all buttons and knobs) and the screen. The screen and faceplate support day and nighttime brightness modes which is selectable by the hardware dimming bus. 3.4.8.1 Screen Brightness The screen brightness can be viewed and controlled from the brightness screen. Thie brightness screen is accessible from several menus including the home screen menu. 2 3 1 4 5 Item Item name Adj Dim Mode Screen Brightness Figure 28: Brightness Screen Description A software adjustment value that allows the operator to closely match the dimming level of other cockpit equipment. This can be adjusted at any time using the rotary selector. The dimming value that is provided by the hardware dimming bus. This item is only visible when the LCD dimming setting is enabled. Reference 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options for more information. Shows the brightness mode used for both the faceplate and the screen dimming level. The mode can be set as either day or night. The screen brightness level that is currently used. This level is achieved by multiplying the brightness level of the dimming bus (dim) and the software adjustment (adj) level. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 79 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Limit When an adjustment level has reached the maximum or minimum dimming level, the Limit indicator will be displayed. The Adj, Dim and screen brightness all have individual limit indicators. All values on the Brightness screen have a value range of 0-100%. Table 52: Brightness Screen Items If desired, the LCD brightness level can be configured to be unaffected by the dimming bus. This will cause the screen brightness to be controlled entirely by the Adj from the brightness screen; however, the dimming bus will continue to determine the screen mode: day or night. The LCD screen brightness can be linked to the dimming bus by enabling the LCD Dimming setting (default). Reference 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options for more information. 3.4.8.2 Panel Brightness The faceplate brightness is always directly linked to the voltage supplied by the dimming bus (pin 3 PANEL LIGHTING) and cannot be adjusted using software. 3.4.8.3 Day and Night Mode The MTP136D brightness can be placed in two modes, Day and Night. The Day brightness mode provides maximum brightness while Night dimming mode allows for low light operating conditions. The brightness mode is entirely selected by the input voltage provided by the dimming bus (pin 3 PANEL LIGHTING). When the dimming bus voltage is below the transition voltage listed in Table 53, the brightness will be in DAY mode. Any value above the transition voltage will set the brightness to Night mode. Panel Lighting Voltage (Vdc) 0 5 0 14 0 28 Night to Day Mode Transition Voltage (Vdc) 1.0 0.1 2.8 0.3 5.6 0.6 Day to Night Mode Transition Voltage (Vdc) 1.25 0.1 3.5 0.3 7.0 0.6 Table 53: Day and Night Transition Voltage Reference Table 54 for the maximum screen luminance level during Day and Night mode. Specification Luminance (fL) Day Mode Night Mode

>150 5 2.5 Table 54: Luminance During Day and Night Mode 3.4.8.4 Dimming Bus Input Voltage Range The pin 3 PANEL LIGHTING input supports three airframe dimming bus voltage ranges (+5V, +14V and +28V) to facilitate the installation in various aircraft systems. Reference 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options to edit the Max Voltage setting to change the lighting bus voltage range. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 80 of 94 The 0-100% scaled input value of the dimming bus can be viewed using the Panel Dimming setting. Reference 3.3.2.7.4.4 Test for more information. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.4.9 DTMF Signaling The MTP136D supports the full range of 16 DTMF tones 0-9, A-D, *, #". This feature allows the operator to call landlines, open repeaters etc. when communicating with compatible equipment. To enable DTMF Signaling reference the DTMF Signaling setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options. DTMF tones can be used at any time while transmitting. The tones 0-9, are accessible by pressing the corresponding keypad button. The tones A-D, *, # are accessible by pressing the menu button while transmitting. If it is desired to enter multiple A-D, *, # tones sequentially, it is recommended to latch the menu open to make it easier to enter multiple tones. The sidetone DTMF volume can be changed using the DTMF sidetone level setting. Reference 3.3.2.1 Radio for more information. 3.4.10 Sidetone Sidetone allows the operator to hear their own voice while transmitting. This is done by routing the microphone audio into the headphone audio stream. Sidetone is enabled by default to allow operation in a cabin management or audio management system that requires sidetone from the MTP136D. The Sidetone can be disabled entirely for integration where sidetone is provided by the audio management controller. Refence the sidetone setting in 3.3.2.1 Radio. The Sidetone output level can be adjusted to match system installation requirements. Refence the sidetone level setting in 3.3.2.1 Radio. 3.4.11 Auto Simplex Auto simplex allows the user to edit a channels receive frequency and applicable channel signaling and have the MTP136D automatically update the channels transmit frequency and channel signaling to match. A channel is auto simplex linked when both the transmit and receive frequency and channel signaling are identical. An auto simplex linked channel is marked by a simplex auto link bar. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 81 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Figure 29: Simplex Channel To unlink a channel from auto simplex the user must change the channels transmit frequency or channel signaling. Reference the Auto Simplex setting in 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options to Enabled/Disable the Auto Simplex function. 3.4.12 Go Home Function The Go Home function allows the user to immediately return to the home screen regardless of what screen is open or if an item is being edited. When this function is used any item that is actively edited will be automatically saved. This feature can be activated by keying the PTT or by pressing the radio selector button. Reference 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options to edit the Go Home setting. This function is disabled by default. 3.4.13 Errors If a fault occurs during runtime operation, the MTP136D will automatically attempt to recover from the fault. If the MTP136D is not able to recover from the fault the error will be logged in the error log and displayed to the operator. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 82 of 94 1 2 4 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3 5 Figure 30: Error View Screen

Item Name Error Name Description The name of the error that occurred. Error Description Description of the error. Error Source Shows the software category from which the error came. This is not related to the severity of the error. Error Occurrences Lists how many times this error has occurred. Errors Remaining Lists how many errors have not been viewed Figure 31: Error View Screen Description When a fault occurs, all available information is displayed. Contact AEM with the exported error log for more detailed information. To close the displayed fault, the rotary selector must be pressed. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 83 of 94 Reference Table 55 for the options available when pressing the menu button on the Error View Screen. MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Item Name Description Clear Suppress Suppress All The error will be logged in the error log and future occurrences of the same fault will be displayed. The error screen will not be displayed for all future occurrences of the same error code until the MTP136D is power cycled. The error occurrence will be logged in the error log. The MTP136D will not show the error screen for any faults until the MTP136D is power cycled. All faults will be recorded in the error log. Table 55: Error Code Menu Options In case of an unrecoverable fault the operation of the MTP136D cannot be guaranteed. If the error persists or inhibits safe operation, contact AEM for servicing. 3.4.13.1 View Error Log Reference 3.3.2.7.4.3 Errors for the required steps to view the error log. The information provided in the section above is applicable while viewing the error log. 3.4.13.2 Export Fault Log The MTP136D supports exporting the error log. To export the error log, navigate to the errors menu, see 3.3.2.7.4.3 Errors, and select the Export menu item. With the export screen open, insert the USB stick. The exported file will be named MTP136D_Errors.json. Note: The USB stick must be formatted to FAT 32 and should only contain files related to the MTP136D. 3.5 Emergency Operation The MTP136D is a supplemental communication radio and is not intended to be used as the primary communication radio. Supported emergency operating voltages can be found in the Declaration of Design and Performance in 2.7 Installation Drawings. In case of Emergency operation, or MTP136D failure, the MTP136D will not adversely affect other avionics equipment. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 84 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.6 Advanced Features 3.6.1 Keys Special function keys are unique to each MTP136D that allow for the enabling of extended feature sets. These features involve the agile edit and the wideband modulation features. Keys can be added or removed as required. Reference 3.3.2.7.4.6 Keys for more information. Keys are persistent through the reset to default function. Reference 3.6.12 Reset to Defaults for more information. Reference 3.6.2 Agile Edit for more information regarding the feature set enabled by agile edit. Note: Keys must be acquired directly from AEM. 3.6.2 Agile Edit Agile edit allows for edits to be made to Lists (zones, channels, tones, codes, NAC, TGID) during flight. When agile edit is disabled, changes can only be made using the import feature. To enable agile edit the agile edit key which can be obtained from AEM. Reference 3.6.1 Keys for more information. Reference Table 56 for the features that are allowed or blocked when the agile edit key is removed. Allowed Features All MTP136D parameters can still be imported/exported as required. Reference Settings that are not related to lists

(Zone, Channels, Tones, Codes, NAC, TGID) are not affected by the Agile Edit key. A channels transmit power can be changed. Blocked Features Lists and list members cannot be edited, moved, copied, created or deleted. This includes all channels and zones. All selection and edit screens in 3.4.7 Lists will not accept any edits. The Edit screen cannot be accessed Table 56: Affects of Agile Edit Feature Disabled 3.6.3 Permissions The MTP136D supports a comprehensive set of permissions that allow for highly customizable access to channel, zone and system configurations. This allows for easy fleet management and regulatory compliance requirements. Two access levels are supported, user and administrator. The user login level is always the startup login level and has no ability to modify any administrator permissions. The user can only view/edit settings as allowed by the administrator. If a setting is displayed in Italic text, then it is locked from editing for the current login level. Reference 3.2.3 On screen indicators for more info regarding italic text and other onscreen indicators. The administrator level can restrict the users ability to change zone permissions, see 3.4.5.4 Zone Permissions, and has access to the admin options screen, see 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 85 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Permission levels are always upheld regardless how the setting is accessed. This ensures the user cannot change an administrator setting/configuration by using the USB import function, a connected controlling device or the user interface. 3.6.3.1 Accessing Admin Permission Level Navigate to the login screen and sign in as the administrator. This is done by entering the password: iac. This access level is maintained until the MTP136D is restarted. Figure 32: Login Screen Once logged in the MTP136D will display the admin login level at the bottom left of the screen. Figure 33: Home Screen with Admin Login Level Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 86 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.6.4 Firmware Update All firmware in the MTP136D can be updated using the USB-C port. This allows the internal radio modules and the system firmware to be updated by the administrator. To identify the current firmware version, reference the SW Ver. in 3.3.2.7.4.5 PRGM. Firmware updates and update procedures can be obtained directly from AEM. Firmware updates can only be performed at the administrator login level. Note: Do not turn off the MTP136D during software and firmware updates. 3.6.5 Importing/Exporting Profiles 3.6.5.1 Importing Profiles The MTP136D supports the import of profiles containing channel and system settings. To import a profile, select the Import from the menu as shown in 3.3.2.7.3 Data, and insert the USB drive. Both the user and the admin can import and export profiles. The user will be able to import and export all channel and user system settings. The admin will be able to import/export all channel, user and admin system settings. Note: a) The USB stick must be formatted to FAT 32. b) The import/export file must be named MTP136D.json. c) The channel/system file is a human readable text file in the JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) format. d) It is not required for the MTP136D to be restarted after a failed or successful import or export. Figure 34: Import Screen With the USB stick inserted, press the menu button, and then select the Import or Export menu item. The import file can contain as much or as little information as Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 87 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual required. This allows for the import of channel and system settings, only system or channel settings, partial channel, or partial system settings. If a channel or setting does not match the current login permission the entire import will be cancelled and will revert to the information previously stored in the MTP136D. It is recommended to only perform the import with admin login level as this will ensure the import will not fail due to lacking permissions. 3.6.5.2 Creating a Channel/System Configuration File The channel/system profile can be created using three methods. a) Using the online MTP136D radio profile tool. This tool allows for easy creation of channels, zones, and system settings. Contact AEM to obtain a link to the MTP136D profile editor tool. b) Manually configure a MTP136D through the user interface to have all desired channel and system settings. Once the MTP136D has been appropriately configured, navigate to the export screen, as shown in 3.3.2.7.3 Data. c) Manually edit an existing channel/system file using a JSON editor. This is not the recommended option as syntax errors can easily be introduced, causing a failed import. 3.6.5.3 Import Error If an error occurs during the import of the MTP136D.json file, the screen will indicate the failed import. All import errors will automatically be saved in an Import log on the connected USB Device. The import log will contain all information regarding the import including if the import was successful. The import log will always be named MTP136D_ImportLog.json. Onscreen messages that are shown because of an import error are listed in Table 57. On Screen Message File does not exist File invalid. See MTP136D_ImportLog.json for details Disk error Explanation File MTP136D.json was not found, ensure the name matches exactly. The profile file contains errors. Review generated import log for all details and correct all errors. The USB drive was prematurely removed or is not compatible. Try again or try a different device. Table 57: On Screen Import Error Messages The error messages that are recorded in the import log are listed in Table 58. Import Errors Invalid Type Invalid Value List Full File Empty Explanation Data type on the indicated line is of the incorrect type. Value on the indicated line is invalid for the given field. The list this field belongs to is full and cannot accept any more members. Profile file is empty. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 88 of 94 Import Errors Multiple Root Objects Only one root object is allowed. Explanation MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Missing Key Missing Colon Missing Comma or Curly Bracket Missing Comma or Bracket Missing Quotation Mark Number Too Large Missing Fraction Missing Exponent Invalid String Syntax Error They required key has not been entered. Import file is missing a colon. Import file is missing a comma or curly bracket. Import file is missing a comma or bracket. Import file is missing a quotation mark. An entered number is numerically too large. A fractional part of a number is missing e.g. a number was entered as 10 instead of 10.0. Missing exponent of an exponential notation number e.g.

"1e" should be "1e0". String contains unsupported characters. Unknown syntax error. Table 58: Import Errors messages in import log file 3.6.5.4 Export Errors If an error occurs during an export the screen messages listed in Table 59 will be shown. On Screen Message Explanation Disk error USB drive was prematurely removed or is not compatible. Try again or try a different device. Table 59 : On Screen Export Error Messages 3.6.6 Configuring a Guard Radio The MTP136D allows either the main or guard radio to be configured as a dedicated guard radio. To configure a radio as a guard radio, the following steps must be performed:

a) Create a zone that only contains dedicated guard channel(s). b) Lock the guard zone to the desired radio as shown in 3.4.5.6 Locking a Radio to a Zone. c) Set all permissions listed in Table 41: Zone Specific Permissions, to admin. This will remove the users ability to change the channel attributes for all channels in the guard zone. d) Set the minimum volume level of the guard radio to ensure communications cannot be missed due to low volume. Reference the Min Volume setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options. 3.6.7 Change Radio Names The MTP136D supports changing the name of each installed radio. By default, the main radio (Radio 1) is named Main while the guard radio (Radio 2) is named Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 89 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Guard. The name of the radios can be changed to any 18-character name. Reference the name setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options to change the name for a radio. The name of the Radio is displayed in several locations including the Radio Options screen. Reference Figure 35 to see the custom radio names being used. Figure 35: Radio Options Screen with Custom Names 3.6.8 Microphone Bias The MTP136D can be configured to provide a bias to the microphone of a connected headset. When enabled a +12VDC microphone biasing voltage will be present on the MIC AUDIO HI (PIN 6) input of the system interface connector. The biasing voltage is not provided by default. Verify with the aircraft and headset manufacturer to identify if a microphone biasing voltage is supplied from another source or is required for microphone operation. Reference the Microphone Bias item in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options to enable or disable the microphone bias. 3.6.9 Power Up Channel and Zone Each radio in the MTP136D can be configured to start on a specific channel and zone. This configuration can be individually set for each radio by the user or the administrator. The user will be able to choose the startup channel and zone when the Zone Permission setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options is set to user. The channel and zone can be selected by the user from the Startup Zone and Startup Channel settings shown in 3.3.2.7.1.1 User Options. The administrator will be able to choose the startup channel and zone when the Zone Permission setting in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options is set to admin. The channel and zone can be selected by the admin from the Startup Zone and Startup Channel settings shown in 3.3.2.7.1.2 Admin Options. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 90 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.6.10 Hash To provide easy overview of fleet configuration, the MTP136D utilizes a series of hashes to quickly confirm the system configuration, lists and channel configuration. A hash is a unique number that is continuously updated as settings, and values are changed. A Hash cannot be directly edited, only viewed. When the value of a hash from one MTP136D matches the value of another MTP136D it is can easily be confirmed that all settings are identical between units. If a difference in the hash numbers is identified between two MTP136D units, it is recommended to perform a file export for both MTP136D units. The exported files can then be analyzed using several free online tools that allow for file comparisons or diff functions. These tools will allow for automatic line by line comparisons between the exported files. Reference the hashes listed in 3.3.2.7.4.1. Info for more information. 3.6.11 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is an automated test for errors in software. This test is automatically performed by the MTP136D at power on and during runtime. Reference the CRC item in 3.3.2.7.4.1 Info for more information. If the CRC fails, proper MTP136D operation is not guaranteed. If the fault persists after a power cycle, contact AEM for further instructions. 3.6.12 Reset to Defaults The MTP136D can be reset to the default factory conditions when required. This function can be accessed at the user and admin level. When performing a reset to default as a user, no administrator settings will be reset. When performing a reset to default at the admin level all settings will be reset When performing a reset to defaults, it is recommended to first export the MTP136D system configuration file. This ensures no accidental information loss can occur. Once the reset to defaults function is completed the instructions in 2.5.8 Installation Configuration should be repeated to ensure the installation specific configurations are restored. To reset the MTP136D reference the reset to default setting in 3.3.2.7.3 Data. Once on the reset screen, open the menu and press Reset. Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 91 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Figure 36: Reset to Defaults Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 92 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual 3.7 Troubleshooting Reference the table below for common issues. If a problem persists or a serious problem occurs, discontinue using the MTP136D and contact AEM for servicing and further troubleshooting information. Problem Radio continuously states Radio Initializing Unable to edit a list or its list members

(Zone, Channel, Tone, Code, NAC, TGID) Cannot hear sidetone Poor audio quality Channel signaling lists are not working Unable to transmit Solution A radio is unable to initialize successfully. Contact AEM for servicing. Agile Edit may not be enabled. Reference 3.6.2 Agile Edit for more information. Administrator has restricted the edit ability for the user. Reference 3.6.3 Permissions for more information. Increase the sidetone volume using the sidetone setting listed in 3.3.2.1 Radio. Ensure the MTP136D was correctly installed as listed in 2.5 Installation Procedure. Contact AEM for further guidance. Apply the desired channel signaling list to the desired zone. Reference 3.4.5.3 Applying a Channel Signaling List to a Zone for more information. The TX timeout limit was reached. The PTT must be rekeyed. Reference 3.4.3.2 Transmit Timeout for more information. The high power overtemperature transmit lockout is activated. Reference 3.4.3.3 High Power Overtemperature Transmit Lockout for more information. Frequently Overheating The MTP136D is designed for high temperature Channel attribute is not valid?

operating environments and should not overheat during normal use. If frequent overheating occurs ensure the MTP136D is installed correctly and is not near high heat emitting equipment. If issues persist, contact AEM for further troubleshooting steps or replacement. Increase the receive sensitivity to avoid noise squelch breaks. Reference 3.4.4.2 Squelch Threshold for more information. Hearing static or adjacent channel communication Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 93 of 94 MTP136D Mission Transceiver Panel Installations and Operation Manual Problem Unable to hear a received signal Solution Ensure the volume is sufficiently high to hear the audio. Adjust the volume knob of the radio. Ensure the squelch sensitivity is not set to high and that the correct channel signaling is applied. This is indicated when the Mon indicator is highlighted but the RX indicator is not. Reference 3.4.4.2 Squelch Threshold and 3.4.6 Channel Signaling for more information. To quickly test if the squelch sensitivity or incorrect channel signaling is the cause of the problem, press the Mon button. This will remove all squelch level and channel signaling requirements. Reference the Import log for all failed imports and exports. Reference 3.6.5.3 Import Error for more information. The wideband key has not been entered. Reference 3.6.1 Keys for more information. If a button is not functioning mechanically, perform the button test as described in section 3.3.2.7.4.4 Test. To verify a pixel is damaged on the screen perform the screen test as stated in 3.3.2.7.4.4 Test. If the damage exists, contact AEM for servicing. File import failed Unable to use wideband modulation Button press is not working Suspected damaged screen pixels End of Section 3.0 Operation Rev. 1.00 ENG-FORM: 804-0100.DOTX March 21, 2024 Page 94 of 94

 

 

TM9300 DMR Mobile Radios TM9400 P25 Mobile Radios Service Manual MMB-00004-09 Issue 09 June 2023 Contact Information Tait Communications Corporate Head Office Tait International Limited P.O. Box 1645 Christchurch New Zealand Imported into the EU by:

Tait Communications GmbH Stipcakgasse 40 1230 Vienna Austria Imported into the UK by:

Tait Europe Limited Unit A, Buckingham Business Park, Anderson Road Swavesey Cambridge, CB24 4UQ United Kingdom For the address and telephone number of regional offices, refer to our website:

www.taitcommunications.com Copyright and Trademarks All information contained in this document is the property of Tait International Limited. All rights reserved. This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, stored, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-

readable form, without prior written permission from Tait International Limited. The word TAIT and the TAIT logo are trademarks of Tait International Limited. All trade names referenced are the service mark, trademark or registered trademark of the respective manufacturers. By using a Tait product you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of the Tait Software Licence Agreement.Please read the Tait Software Licence Agreement carefully before using this Tait product. If you do not agree to the terms of the Tait Software Licence Agreement, do not use the Tait Product. The full agreement is available at https://

www.taitcommunications.com/our-resources/

compliance#Tait_Software_Licence_Agreement. Disclaimer There are no warranties extended or granted by this document. Tait International Limited accepts no responsibility for damage arising from use of the information contained in the document or of the equipment and software it describes. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that use of such information, equipment and software complies with the laws, rules and regulations of the applicable jurisdictions. Enquiries and Comments If you have any enquiries regarding this document, or any comments, suggestions and notifications of errors, please contact your regional Tait office. Updates of Manual and Equipment 2 In the interests of improving the performance, reliability or servicing of the equipment, Tait International Limited reserves the right to update the equipment or this document or both without prior notice. Intellectual Property Rights This product may be protected by one or more patents or designs of Tait International Limited together with their international equivalents, pending patent or design applications, and registered trade marks, for a complete list please check https://www.taitradio.com/

our-resources/legal#Intellectual_Property Environmental Considerations Tait International Limited is an environmentally responsible company which supports waste minimization, material recovery and restrictions in the use of hazardous materials. The European Unions Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive and UK WEEE Regulation 2013 requires that this product be disposed of separately from the general waste stream when its service life is over. For more information about how to dispose of your unwanted Tait product, visit the Tait WEEE website at www.taitcommunications.com/our-

resources/compliance#WEEE. Please be environmentally responsible and dispose through the original supplier, or contact Tait International Limited. Tait will comply with environmental requirements in other markets as they are introduced. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Contents Preface . 7 Scope of Manual . 7 Related Documentation . 7 Safety and Compliance . 7 Document Conventions . 8 Acronyms . 8 Publication Record . 10 Safety and Compliance Information. 11 Radio Frequency Exposure Information . 11 Radio Frequency Emissions Limits in the USA . 12 Radio Frequency Emissions Limits in Canada . 12 USA Public Safety Bands . 13 Frequency Band Reserved for Distress Beacons. 13 Australia and New Zealand Citizens Band . 14 Health, Safety, and Electromagnetic Compatibility in Europe . 15 Interference with Electronic Devices . 16 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres and Blasting Areas . 17 Radio Installation and Operation in Vehicles . 17 Radio Protection When Charging the Vehicle Battery . 17 Electromagnetic Compatibility in European vehicles . 18 Unapproved Modifications or Changes to Radio . 18 High Radio Surface Temperatures. 18 1 Introduction . 19 1.1 Frequency Bands. 20 1.2 RF Output Power. 20 1.3 Accessories . 21 1.4 Labels . 23 Specifications . 24 1.5 Tait Product Numbering . 25 1.6 1.6.1 Product Codes . 25 Item Part Numbers (IPNs) . 28 1.6.2 1.6.3 Type Codes (Compliance Codes) . 28 2 General Servicing Information . 29 Repair Recommendations . 29 2.1 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Contents 3 2.4 2.2 2.3 Repair Categories. 29 2.1.1 2.1.2 Required Training, Tools, and Equipment . 30 2.1.3 Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) . 31 2.1.4 Repair Resources . 32 Tait Support Website . 32 Servicing Precautions . 33 2.3.1 Avoid Unauthorized Changes . 33 2.3.2 Maintain the Seal on the Radio . 33 2.3.3 Protect Screw Thread . 34 2.3.4 Torque Correctly . 34 2.3.5 Disconnect Looms and FPC Cables Carefully. 35 2.3.6 Prevent Scratches . 35 2.3.7 Observe ESD Precautions . 36 2.3.8 Observe Transmitter Safety Precautions . 37 Tools, Equipment, and Consumables . 38 2.4.1 Service Kit . 38 Consumables . 38 2.4.2 2.5 Radio Connectors . 40 2.5.1 Overview . 40 RF Connector . 43 2.5.2 2.5.3 Power Connector . 43 2.5.4 Auxiliary Connector. 44 Internal Options Connector . 46 2.5.5 Provision for External Options Connector. 46 2.5.6 2.5.7 Control Head Connectors. 47 2.5.8 Microphone Connector. 48 2.5.9 Programming Connector (Programming Control Head) . 48 Shielding Cans and Connectors. 49 SMT Repairs (PCB Components) . 54 2.7.1 Obtaining a Replacement PCB Component. 55 Tools for SMT Repairs. 56 2.7.2 2.7.3 Consumables for SMT Repairs . 56 2.7.4 SMT Repair Techniques. 57 Test Equipment . 60 2.8 Setting Up the Test Equipment . 61 2.9 2.10 Programming and Calibration Applications . 63 2.11 Upgrading the Radio Firmware . 63 2.11.1 Viewing the Firmware Version. 63 2.11.2 Upgrading Firmware . 63 2.11.3 Installing Firmware . 63 2.12 Computer-Controlled Test Mode (CCTM) . 64 2.12.1 Placing the Radio in Computer-Controlled Test Mode . 64 2.12.2 Entering a CCTM Command . 65 2.6 2.7 4 Contents TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.12.3 CCTM Commands. 66 2.12.4 CCTM Error Codes . 70 2.13 Pressing Keys When Turning On the Radio . 70 2.14 Visual and Audible Indicators . 71 2.14.1 Visible Indicators . 71 2.14.2 Audible Indicators . 71 2.15 RSSI Performance Characteristics . 73 3 Disassembly and Reassembly . 74 3.1 Removing and Mounting the Control Head . 75 3.2 Disassembling the Radio Body . 76 3.3 Reassembling the Radio Body . 82 3.4 Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head. 86 3.4.1 Graphical Control Head. 86 3.4.2 2- or 3-Digit Control Head. 89 3.4.3 Programming Control Head. 92 3.4.4 Handheld Control Head . 93 4 5 Servicing Procedures. 96 Initial Tasks . 96 4.1 4.2 Checking the User Interface . 101 Responding to Error Messages . 103 4.3 Checking the Transmit and Transmit-Audio Functions . 104 4.4 4.5 Check the Receive and Receive-Audio Functions . 106 Final Tasks. 108 4.6 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head . 114 5.1 Power Supply Faulty . 115 LCD Display Faulty . 119 5.2 5.3 LCD Backlighting Faulty . 122 LCD Heating Faulty . 124 5.4 5.5 Function Key LEDs, Status LEDs or Backlighting LEDs Faulty. 125 5.6 On/Off Key Faulty . 132 Function, Scroll, or Selection Keys Faulty . 134 5.7 5.8 Speaker Faulty. 136 5.9 Volume Control Faulty . 137 5.10 PTT Faulty. 139 6 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head. 141 6.1 Display Faulty but not LEDs. 144 6.2 Some LEDs Faulty . 145 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Contents 5 7 6.3 All LEDs Faulty . 146 6.4 Display and All LEDs Faulty . 146 6.5 Some but not All Keys Faulty . 147 6.6 All Keys Faulty . 147 6.7 Speaker Faulty . 148 6.8 Volume Control Faulty . 148 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head. 149 7.1 Power Supply Faulty . 150 LCD Display Faulty . 156 7.2 7.3 LCD Backlighting Faulty . 159 7.4 Status LEDs Faulty . 161 7.5 Keypad Backlighting Faulty . 163 7.6 On/Off Key Faulty. 167 7.7 PTT Faulty. 169 7.8 Keys Faulty . 170 7.9 Microphone Faulty . 173 7.10 Communications Faulty. 176 8 Spare Parts . 179 8.1 Illustrated Spare Parts Catalogue. 180 9 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit. 191 9.1 Test Equipment Setup . 191 9.2 Operation . 193 9.2.1 Rx / Tx/PTT Switch . 193 9.2.2 Speaker / Radio / Load Switch. 194 PCB Information . 194 Parts List (PCB IPN 220-01418-03) . 194 9.3.1 9.3.2 Board Layout . 195 Circuit Diagram . 196 9.3.3 9.3 Tait General Software Licence Agreement . 197 6 Contents TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Preface Scope of Manual This manual describes repairs to a TM9300 and TM9400 mobile radio. Because board replacement is often the most cost-effective solution for this radio, no detailed circuit descriptions or faultfinding procedures to board component level are provided for the main board. If you have in-depth product knowledge and intend to perform board-level diagnosis and/or the replacement of board components, please refer to the relevant PCB Information document available on request from Tait Support. Related Documentation Downloading Documentation Download the latest issue of a document from the Tait Support website. See Tait Support Website on page 32. PCB Information Documents You can request PCB Information Documents from Tait Support. For more information see Obtain a PCB Information Document on page 55. Safety and Compliance For your personal safety please read the important information provided in the Safety and Compliance Information on page 11. Do this before using or servicing a TM9300 or TM9400 mobile radio. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Preface 7 Document Conventions Please follow exactly any instruction that appears in the text as an alert. An alert provides necessary safety information as well as instruction in the proper use of the product. This manual uses the following types of alert:

Warning This alert is used when there is a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Caution This alert is used when there is a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Notice This alert is used to highlight information that is required to ensure procedures are performed correctly. Incorrectly performed pro-

cedures could result in equipment damage or malfunction. This alert is used to highlight significant information that may be required to ensure procedures are performed correctly, or draw your attention to ways of doing things that can improve your efficiency or effectiveness. This symbol highlights information that is relevant to radios with a transmit power >25W.

>25W This symbol highlights information that is relevant to radios with a transmit power of 25W. 25W Acronyms Abbreviation ADC CCTM CMOS CODEC CTCSS DC DSP ESD ESN FPC FPGA GPIO Description Analog-to-Digital Converter Computer-Controlled Test Mode Complementary Metaloxide Semiconductor Coder-Decoder Continuous Tone-Controlled Subaudible Signalling Direct Current Digital Signal Processor Electrostatic Discharge Electronic Serial Number Flexible Printed Circuit Field-Programmable Gate Array General Purpose Input/Output 8 Preface TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Abbreviation GPS IFAMP IPN LCD LED LPF MMI NPN NTC PA PCB PNP PTT RF RSN RSSI SFE SMA SMD SMPS SMT SPKR UI USB VCO Description Global Positioning System Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Item Part Number (Tait part number) Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low Pass Filter Man Machine Interface Negative-Positive-Negative Negative Temperature Coefficient Power Amplifier Printed Circuit Board Positive-Negative-Positive Press-to-Talk Radio Frequency Radio Serial Number Received Signal Strength Indicator Software Feature Enabler Sub-Miniature Version A Surface Mount Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surface Mount Technology Speaker User Interface Universal Serial Bus Voltage-Controlled Oscillator TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Preface 9 Publication Record Issue Date 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 May 2013 December 2013 September 2014 September 2015 May 2016 November 2016 Description First release Information added for the hand-held control head and H5 band. Minor corrections and additions. Information added for H7 band and CCTM commands 611 and 612. Pin 15 of the auxiliary connector now defined simply as ground. Minor corrections and additions. Information added for 2-digit control head, programming control head, L3 band, and RSSI performance characteristics. Minor corrections and additions. Information added for G1 band. Updated product code of thermal grease. Updated product code of cutters. Information added regarding the transmit band receiver frequency ranges. These have been updated:

Transmit frequency range: 757-870MHz Receiver frequency range: 757-776MHz; 850-

870MHz. October 2017 General updates:

Information added for C0 band. October 2018 Multiple urgent changes. June 2023 Updated table 8.1 (p.181) Updated drawing p.180 Updated section 3.4.2 Updated section 6 Updated section 8 Updated contents page Updated section 2.5.5 - p.44 Updated section 3.2 p.75 Updated section 3.3 - p.83 Updated Safety + Compliance section - p.18 Updated frequency bands for Introduction section p.20, 25, +26 Updated frequency bands for Servicing Procedures section p.110 AUX_GPIO4 is output only 10 Preface TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Safety and Compliance Information Before servicing the radio, you must read the important safety and compliance information below. For information about the way your radio operates, see the users guide or contact your radio provider. Radio Frequency Exposure Information Using this Radio For your own safety and to ensure you comply with the United States Federal Communication Commissions (FCC) radio frequency (RF) exposure guidelines, and those from other administrations, please read the following information before using this radio. You should use this radio only for work-related purposes (it is not authorized for any other use) and if you are fully aware of, and can exercise control over, your exposure to RF energy. To prevent exceeding RF exposure limits, you must control the amount and duration of RF that you and other people are exposed to. It is also important that you:

Do not remove the RF exposure label from the radio. Ensure this RF exposure information accompanies the radio when it is transferred to other users. Do not use the radio if you do not adhere to the guidelines on controlling your exposure to RF. Controlling Your Exposure to RF Energy This radio emits radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves primarily when calls are made. RF is a form of electromagnetic energy (as is sunlight), and there are recommended levels of maximum RF exposure. To control your exposure to RF and comply with the maximum exposure limits for occupational/controlled environments, follow these guidelines:

Do not talk (transmit) on the radio more than the rated transmit duty cycle. This is important because the radio radiates more energy when it is transmitting than when it is receiving. While you are transmitting (talking or sending data) on the radio, you must ensure that there is always a distance of 35 inches (0.9m) between people and the antenna. This is the minimum safe distance. For 110W mobiles, the minimum safe distance is 44 inches (1.1m). Use the radio only with Tait-approved antennas and attachments, and make only authorized modifications to the antenna otherwise you could damage the radio and violate FCC regulations. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Safety and Compliance Information 11 Compliance with RF Energy Exposure Standards For more information on what RF energy is and how to control your exposure to it, visit the FCC website at www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/

rf-faqs.html. This two-way radio complies with these RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 Parts 1.1307, 1.1310, and 2.1091. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1992. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition. European Directive 2008/40/EC on minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from physical agents (electromagnetic fields). This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure environments at operating duty factors of up to 50% talk to 50% listen. Radio Frequency Emissions Limits in the USA CFR Title 47 Part 15.19 (a) (1) -

Receivers Part 15 of the FCC Rules imposes RF emission limits on receivers. This radio complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. CFR Title 47 Part 15.19 (a) (3) -

All Others This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radio Frequency Emissions Limits in Canada This device complies with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 12 Safety and Compliance Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 USA Public Safety Bands Low-power channels Use of Encryption The Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 Subpart R deals with the use of frequencies in the 757 to 776MHz and 794 to 806MHz bands. This radio complies with CFR Title 47 Parts 90.531 (b) (3) and 90.531 (b) (4). These sections state that only low-power transmission is permitted on the following channels:

Regional Planning channels, as defined in Part 90.531 (b) (3). Itinerant channels, as defined in Part 90.531 (b) (4). This radio complies with CFR Title 47 Part 90.553 (a). This section states that:

Encryption is not permitted on the nationwide Interoperability calling channels. These channels are defined in Part 90.531 (b) (1) (ii). Radios using encryption must have a readily accessible switch or control to allow the radio user to disable encryption. Frequency Band Reserved for Distress Beacons Frequency band 406 to 406.1 MHz is reserved for use by distress beacons. Transmissions should not be made within this frequency band. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Safety and Compliance Information 13 Australia and New Zealand Citizens Band AS/NZS 4365 deals with the use of frequencies in the 476.425 to 477.4125MHz band. Products capable of operating in this band have been approved for operation in the UHF Citizens Band Radio Service which is licensed in Australia by the ACMA Radiocommunications (Citizens Band Radio Stations) Class Licence and in New Zealand by the MBIE General User Radio Licence for Citizens Band Radio. Operation is subject to conditions contained within those licences. Repeaters operate by receiving a transmission on one channel and re-

transmitting it on another. Operators are required to avoid using local repeater input channels, which will be in the range of 31 to 38 (and 71 to 78 when authorized), unless it is intended to use the repeater facility, and to avoid using local repeater output channels, which will be in the range 1 to 8 (and 41 to 48 when authorized), at any time. Operators must always listen in on a channel (or observe a channel-busy indicator) to ensure it is not already being used before transmitting. No voice transmissions are permitted on data channels 22 and 23. Equipment meeting this standard will inhibit voice operation on channels 22 and 23. Operators must be aware of the consequences of narrowband (2.5kHz deviation) transmissions being received on older wideband equipment, and wideband (5.0kHz deviation) transmissions being received on newer narrowband equipment. They should also be aware of the possibility of interference due to older equipment being operated on channels adjacent to new narrowband channels. The list of currently authorized channels can be obtained from the ACMA website in Australia and the MBIE website in New Zealand. In Australia:

Except in an emergency, a CB transmitter must not be operated on UHF channels 5 and 35. Channel 11 is the customary calling channel for establishing communications. Channel 40 is the customary road vehicle channel. 14 Safety and Compliance Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Health, Safety, and Electromagnetic Compatibility in Europe In the European Community, radio and telecommunications equipment is regulated by Directive 1999/5/EC, also known as the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive. The requirements of this directive include protection of health and safety of users, as well as electromagnetic compatibility. Intended Purpose of Product This product is an FM radio transceiver. It is intended for radiocommunication in the Private Mobile Radio (PMR) or Public Access Mobile Radio (PAMR) services, to be used in all member states of the European Union (EU) and states within the European Economic Area

(EEA). Restrictions This product can be programmed to transmit on frequencies that are not harmonized throughout the EU/EEA, and will require a licence to operate in each member state. This product can be programmed for frequencies or emissions that may make its use illegal. Where applicable, a license must be obtained before this product is used. All license requirements must be observed. Limitations may apply to transmitter power, operating frequency, channel spacing, and emission. Declaration of Conformity Brief Declarations of Conformity appear on page 2 of this document. To download the formal declaration of conformity, go to www.taitradio.com/eudoc. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Safety and Compliance Information 15 Interference with Electronic Devices Warning Some electronic devices may be prone to malfunction due to a lack of protection from the RF energy that is present when your radio is transmitting. Examples of electronic devices that may be affected by RF energy are:

aircraft electronic systems vehicular electronic systems such as fuel injection, anti-skid brakes, and cruise control medical devices such as pacemakers and hearing aids medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Switch off the radio before boarding an aircraft. Using your radio while in the air is not permitted. Consult the manufacturer (or its representative) of any such electronic devices to determine whether electronic circuits in those devices will perform normally when the radio is transmitting. If you have a pacemaker:

immediately turn off the radio if you suspect it is interfering with the pacemaker keep the radio at least 6 inches (15cm) from the pacemaker while the radio is on use the radio on your right side to minimize interference never carry the radio in a breast pocket. If there is interference between your hearing aid and the radio, please discuss an alternative solution with the hearing aid manufacturer. 16 Safety and Compliance Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres and Blasting Areas Warning Unless the radio is specifically certified for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere, turn off the radio before entering such an atmosphere. An explosion could cause serious injury or death. Examples of potentially explosive atmospheres include filling stations, and any environment where there are flammable liquids, gases, or dusts. Warning Turn off the radio before approaching blasting caps, a blasting area, or any area where you are instructed to turn off a two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Interference with blasting operations could cause serious injury or death. Radio Installation and Operation in Vehicles Warning Keep the radio away from airbags and airbag deploy-

ment areas. Do not install, charge, or place a radio near such areas. An activated airbag can propel radio equipment with sufficient force to cause serious injury to vehicle occupants. An airbag may not perform to specification if obstructed by radio equipment. Warning To avoid damage to existing wiring, airbags, petrol tanks, fuel and brake lines, or battery cables, refer to the installa-

tion guide for the radio, and to the vehicle manufacturers manual, before installing electronic equipment in the vehicle. Using a handheld microphone or a radio while driving a vehicle may violate the laws and legislation that apply in your country or state. Please check the vehicle regulations in your area. Radio Protection When Charging the Vehicle Battery Always remove the fuses from the radio power cable before charging the vehicle battery, connecting a second battery, or using power from another vehicle (e.g. when jump-starting the vehicle). TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Safety and Compliance Information 17 Electromagnetic Compatibility in European vehicles In the European Community, radio equipment fitted to automotive vehicles is regulated by Directive 72/245/EEC and its amendments. The requirements of this directive cover the electromagnetic compatibility of electrical or electronic equipment fitted to automotive vehicles. Mobile radios only: To meet the requirements of Directive 72/245/EEC and its amendments, installation of this product in a vehicle must be performed according to the instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer. Notice Failure to install the product correctly may void the vehicles type-approval. The owner could be held responsible for any damage resulting from vehicle failure that can be attributed to RF energy inter-

fering with the vehicle systems. Unapproved Modifications or Changes to Radio The radio is designed to satisfy the applicable compliance regulations. Do not make modifications or changes to the radio that are not expressly approved by Tait International Limited. Failure to do so could invalidate compliance requirements and void the users authority to operate the radio. High Radio Surface Temperatures Caution The bottom surface of the radio and the heatsink fins can become hot during prolonged operation. Do not touch these parts of the radio. EN 62368 Requirements

(25 Watt Mobiles) This radio complies with the European Union standard EN 62368 when operated up to the rated 33% duty cycle of two minutes transmit and four minutes receive, and with ambient temperatures of 30C or lower. Caution Operation outside these limits may cause the external tem-

perature of the radio to rise higher than this standard permits. 18 Safety and Compliance Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 1 Introduction The TM9300 and TM9400 series is a range of high-performance microprocessor-controlled DMR and P25 mobile radios for voice and data communication. The radios are designed for installation in vehicles but can also be used in desktop, remote-monitoring and similar applications. Figure 1.1 TM9300 and TM9400 mobile radios front view -

graphical control head rear view -

graphical control head front view -

2-digit control head

(TM9315 only) Introduction 19 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 1.1 Frequency Bands The radio is available with the following frequency bands:

VHF 136MHz to 174MHz (B1) 174MHz to 225MHz (C0) UHF 320MHz to 380MHz (G1) 378 MHz to 470MHz (HK) 450MHz to 520MHz (H7) 757MHz to 870MHz transmit, 757MHz to 776MHz and 850MHz to 870MHz receive (K5) 896MHz to 941MHz transmit, 935MHz to 941MHz receive (L3) A different main board is used to implement each band; the rest of the radio remains the same. For an explanation of how the product code identifies the frequency band see Tait Product Numbering on page 25. 1.2 RF Output Power The radio bodies are available with >25W and 25W RF output power. The two RF output power options are implemented by different main boards in the radio body, mechanically different radio bodies, and different power connectors. For information on which control head is currently available with each radio model, contact your regional Tait office. The >25W radio is available in the following frequency bands:

B1 (50W) HK (40W) H7 (40W) K5 (35W/30W) L3 (30W) The 25W radio is available in the following frequency bands:

>25W 25W 20 Introduction TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 B1 C0 G1 H51 H71 1.3 Accessories Audio Accessories The TM9300 and TM9400 mobile radios can be used with an extensive range of audio accessories, installation kits, internal options boards and other accessories such as a desktop power supply. For an up-to-date list of compatible accessories, please go to the TM9300 and TM9400 areas of the Tait website, www.taitradio.com. The radios allow for the connection of a comprehensive range of audio accessories:

rugged microphone (standard) desktop microphone keypad microphone handset high-power remote speaker horn speaker remote PTT kit and hands-free kit. Installation Kits The radio is delivered with a vehicle installation kit, including a U-bracket. Installation of the radio is described in the installation guide

(MMB-00002-xx). Optional installation kits are:

remote control head kit for remote installation of the control head dual control head installation kit for remote installation of two control heads connected to one radio body hand-held control head installation kit hand-held control head installation kit for remote/covert installation security bracket for secure and quick-release installation ignition-sense kit. An overview of these installation options is contained in the installation guide (MMB-00002-xx). 1. Radios approved for operation on the Australia and New Zealand Citi-

zens Band have a maximum RF output power of 5W. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Introduction 21 Internal Options Boards The radio provides space for an internal options board inside the radio body connecting to an internal options connector. An aperture for an external options connector is also provided. Tait offers the following internal options boards:

line-interface board RS-232 board options-extender board. Desktop Power Supply A desktop power supply including the parts for mounting the radio is available for desktop installations. 22 Introduction TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 1.4 Labels Radio Body The following labels are attached to the radio body:

compliance information serial number and product code hot surface safety warning RF exposure safety warning Figure 1.2 Labels of the TM9300/TM9400 radio body S/N 20085566 762-870MHz T02-00014-XBAA J/N: 102266277 016 1312 Control Head The control head label provides the product code and serial number. PCBs The PCB label provides important information about the board assembly it is attached to. Do not remove the PCB labels. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Introduction 23 Figure 1.3 Information on a PCB label board product code

(sometimes called item code) factory job number (J) T02-00103-ACAA J:103064642 Q:124 S: 5001605 board serial number (S) 1.5 Specifications For current specifications, please refer to the latest issue of the appropriate specifications manual:

TM9300 Specifications Manual - MMB-00005-xx TM9400 Specifications Manual - MMB-00009-xx. 24 Introduction TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 1.6 Tait Product Numbering Tait uses different coding schemes for products, subassemblies and individual parts. 1.6.1 Product Codes For the TM9300 and TM9400 mobile radios, the Tait product codes follow the format T02-nnnnn-XXXX, where T02 identifies the code to be for a mobile radio nnnnn (numeric) identifies the type of product or subassembly

(see Table 1.1 below) XXXX (alphabetic or numeric) identifies the configuration nnnnn The five numeric digits identify what the product is, for example, a DMR radio. Table 1.1 lists the nnnnn value for some TM9300 and TM9400 products. nnnnn in the TM9300/TM9400 product range Table 1.1 Product code T02-00011-XXXX T02-00012-XXXX T02-00013-XXXX T02-00014-XXXX T02-00002-XXXX T02-00006-XXXX T02-00071-XXXX T02-00073-XXXX T02-00076-XXXX T02-00085-XXXX Product TM9300 radio body (restricted functionality) TM9300 radio body (full functionality) TM9400 radio body (restricted functionality) TM9400 radio body (full functionality) TM9300 main board TM9400 main board TM9300/TM9400 graphical control head TM9300/TM9400 hand-held control head TM9300 2-digit control head TM9300 programming control head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Introduction 25 XXXX The final four alphabetic or numeric digits of the product code describe how this particular instance of the product is configured. In the product code of a radio body, such as:

T02-00011-XXXX (TM9300, restricted functionality) T02-00012-XXXX (TM9300, full functionality) T02-00013-XXXX (TM9400, restricted functionality) T02-00014-XXXX (TM9400, full functionality) XXXX defines:

X X X X Software Features A A Default RF connector and factory-placed options A B N P BNC Mini UHF No options fitted Voice storage No options fitted Voice storage Transmit power and frequency band B C F H J P R V W X Y 25W

>25W 136 to 174MHz (B1) 174 to 225MHz (C0) 320 to 380 MHz (G1) 450 to 520MHz (H7) 400 to 470MHz (H5) 136 to 174MHz (B1) 378 to 470 MHz (HK) 450 to 520MHz (H7) 400 to 470MHz (H5) 757MHz to 870MHz transmit, 757MHz to 776MHz and 850MHz to 870MHz receive (K5) 896MHz to 941MHz transmit, 935MHz to 941MHz receive (L3) Not all frequency bands may be available for TM9300 and TM9400. 26 Introduction TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 In the product code of a TM9300 or TM9400 control head, such as:

T02-00071-XXXX XXXX defines:

X X X X Label and lens A B TM9300, black Tait lens TM9400, black Tait lens Colour A Black Reserved Default Local/remote configuration A A C D E Local Primary remote, terminated, NTID=2 (single or dual head) Secondary remote, not terminated, NTID=4 (dual head) Secondary remote, terminated, NTID=4 (dual head) In the product code of a main board, such as T02-00002-XXXX (TM9300) T02-00006-XXXX (TM9400) XXXX defines:

X X A A Interface variants A A Default Factory-placed options No options fitted Voice storage Transmit power and frequency band A B B C F H J P R V W X Y 25W

>25W 136 to 174MHz (B1) 174 to 225MHz (C0) 320 to 380 MHz (G1) 450 to 520MHz (H7) 400 to 470MHz (H5) 136 to 174MHz (B1) 378 to 470 MHz (HK) 450 to 520MHz (H7) 400 to 470MHz (H5) 757MHz to 870MHz transmit, 757MHz to 776MHz and 850MHz to 870MHz receive (K5) 896MHz to 941MHz transmit, 935MHz to 941MHz receive (L3) The type of antenna connector (mini-UHF or BNC) is configured at radio body level. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Introduction 27 1.6.2 Item Part Numbers (IPNs) A 10-digit number in the format xxx-xxxxx-xx identifies a Tait Item Part Number (IPN). Although you can quote an IPN to order a part, it is usually best to order the spares kit that contains that part. For more information refer to Spare Parts on page 179. In a part number, the -xx represents the issue number. Unless otherwise indicated, you can generally order only the most recent issue of a part. On a board, the last two digits of the IPN represent the issue number of the PCB used: this also indicates which PCB Information applies. See also Obtain a PCB Information Document on page 55. 1.6.3 Type Codes (Compliance Codes) In addition to a product code, each radio also has a type code, often identified on the product by the word Type. The type code is a regulatory compliance code that identifies the unique characteristics of each individual radio. The type code is printed on the label on the bottom side of the radio body. See Figure 1.2 on page 23. The characters used in the type code are numeric or uppercase alphabetic. The type code consists of six or eight characters in the format:

TMBcdxyy

= Tait where:

T M = mobile radio B cd

= TM9300/TM9400 series

= the frequency band of the radio

(see Frequency Bands on page 20) x

= a unique character representing the distinct set of compliance attributes that belong to this radio There is no immediate or obvious association between the characters used for x and yy, and the attributes they signify. They are simply a code. 28 Introduction TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2 General Servicing Information This chapter provides information that will enable you to service a TM9300 and TM9400 radio. It includes the following sections:

Repair Recommendations Tait Support Website Servicing Precautions Tools, Equipment, and Consumables Radio Connectors Shielding Cans and Connectors SMT Repairs (PCB Components) Test Equipment Setting Up the Test Equipment Programming and Calibration Applications Computer-Controlled Test Mode (CCTM) Pressing Keys When Turning On the Radio Visual and Audible Indicators 2.1 Repair Recommendations Notice Tait recommends that warranty repairs be performed at a regional Tait office or at the Global Repair Centre. 2.1.1 Repair Categories Repairs were previously designated Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3, with restrictions on who could perform each level of repair. These categories no longer apply and you are able to perform a repair if properly equipped and trained to do so. See Required Training, Tools, and Equipment on page 30. Dealers, distributors, and customers who have their own servicing facilities are encouraged to perform repairs, but to escalate complex or unsuccessful repairs to your regional Tait office for resolution. Regional Tait offices handle repairs that require more advanced capabilities. In addition to specialized skills, up-to-date product and procedure knowledge, and specialized equipment, the regional Tait offices also have ready access to parts and spares. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 29 TM9300/TM9400 Tasks The Global Repair Center delivers advanced support and expertise to the regional Tait offices. An experienced and fully equipped service team handles repairs submitted by the regional Tait offices. TM9300/TM9400 servicing includes tasks of varying degrees of difficulty, from simple to more complex. Simple tasks include, for example:

upgrading the firmware on the radio programming, calibrating, or configuring the radio, including customizing encryption settings using a spares kit, where one exists, to replace mechanical or electro-

mechanical parts such as:

the keypad (replace the control head assembly) the main board or control head board (replace the board assembly) fitting an options board. More complex tasks include:

faultfinding and diagnosing board-level components replacing board components for which no spares kit or instructions are yet available performing advanced reconfiguration. 2.1.2 Required Training, Tools, and Equipment Notice Do not attempt a repair that is beyond your current capabili-

ties or you could cause permanent damage to the radio. To repair a TM9300 or TM9400, you require:

Relevant and current product training. The instructions provided by the latest issue of this service manual and the documentation it references. Tools, spares kits, and equipment specific to the repair are identified in this service manual. These may include:

Standard service centre tools and equipment an anti-static work area, see page 36 a service kit (see page 38), which also provides an assembly toolkit containing the necessary special drivers and bits. product-specific consumables, see page 38 relevant test equipment, see page 60 the programming and calibration applications running on a test computer, see page 63 30 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 For board-level repairs you will also require:

in-depth product knowledge the correct issue of the PCB Information document for the board under repair, see Obtain a PCB Information Document on page 55 expertise in SMT repair of circuit boards, see SMT Repairs (PCB Components) on page 54 relevant SMT repair tools and consumables, see Tools for SMT Repairs on page 56 and Consumables for SMT Repairs on page 56 2.1.3 Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) MTTR Industry best practice is to provide a Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) for each product. The MTTR is an estimate of the average time needed to isolate and correct a fault in the product. It includes troubleshooting and diagnosing, disassembling the unit, replacing faulty part(s), reassembling the unit, configuration and testing, and completing administrative tasks. A repair is generally considered cost-effective only if it can be com-

pleted within the MTTR time frame. The cost of a repair, in parts and labour, must never exceed the cost of a replacement unit. The recommended maximum repair time for any one repair to a TM9300/

TM9400 is a total of one hour, comprising:

20 minutes to diagnose the fault 20 minutes to do the repair 20 minutes to recalibrate and test the radio. Before starting a repair, best practice is to establish whether you can, within the MTTR times specified:

positively identify the problem determine the solution complete the repair and related testing. A fault that has a known or readily identifiable cause and a clear solution

(generally using a spares kit) can usually be resolved within the MTTR. If a repair is likely to exceed the MTTR, contact your regional Tait office. It will have the necessary expertise and specialized equipment to complete the repair or suggest replacement as a more cost-effective option. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 31 2.1.4 Repair Resources Increasingly sophisticated products can be difficult and time-consuming to service. To assist you, Tait provides:

detailed servicing instructions comprehensive product training advanced assistance through regional Tait offices, see page 29 the Tait Support website. 2.2 Tait Support Website You can download the latest issue of the programming and calibration applications, radio firmware, and any released documentation (including user documentation in other languages) from the TM9300 and TM9400 area of the Tait Support website, http://support.taitradio.com For information on downloading radio firmware, contact Tait. If you cannot see the item you are looking for, it may be available only from the secured area of the website. Tait Support will supply the login information. The Single Sign-On feature automatically assigns an appropriate level of access. When you log in to the secured area, all relevant TM9300 and TM9400 servicing documentation is available to you. Tip: If you have registered but cannot see the Username and Password fields along the top of the screen, click Show Single Sign-On Bar at the top right corner of the main page. Requesting Access 32 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.3 Servicing Precautions For your safety and to prevent damage to the radio, the following precautions are recommended. 2.3.1 Avoid Unauthorized Changes This radio is designed to satisfy stringent compliance regulations. Make a change to the radio only if the change is expressly approved by Tait. See also Repair Recommendations on page 29. Notice Unauthorized changes could violate compliance require-

ments and/or void the customers authority to operate the radio. 2.3.2 Maintain the Seal on the Radio The TM9300/TM9400 is uniquely designed to meet published specifications for protection against entry (ingress) by water and dust. Be aware of this point of difference when servicing the radio. The mobile radio requires informed handling. Disassemble and reassemble the radio in strict accordance with Chapter 3, Disassembly and Reassembly. Instructions in that chapter identify where extra care is required. To maintain the sealing of the radio to IP54 standards, ensure that all bungs and seals are fitted after servicing the radio. These are for the auxiliary, RF, external options, and programming connectors:

bung for auxiliary connector rubber seal for RF connector bung for aperture for options connector (connector not fitted) cover seal for options connector (connector fitted). In addition, ensure that the grommet sealing the aperture to the microphone connector of the control head is properly fitted. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 33 2.3.3 Protect Screw Thread For a description of the screws used in each radio assembly, see Chapter 3, Disassembly and Reassembly. A hole in a new chassis or front panel starts as a simple hole without a thread. When a screw is tightened in the hole for the first time, that screw cuts the thread. To prevent damage to the screw holes on this radio, always re-use the same thread:

1. Before tightening a screw, place the screw in the hole and wind the screw slowly backwards (counter-clockwise) while exerting a gentle downward pressure on the driver. 2. When you feel the screw engage with the thread that was cut before, stop. Start winding the screw gently forwards (clockwise). 3. Tighten the screw and then torque to specification. 2.3.4 Torque Correctly When tightening a screw or nut, apply the exact torque specified in the reassembly instructions. Under-torquing can cause problems with microphonics and heat transfer; over-torquing can damage the radio. For the torque drivers needed to service this radio see Chapter 3, Disassembly and Reassembly. For the screws used in this radio and the torque to apply to each screw see described in the diagrams in Chapter 3, Disassembly and Reassembly. 34 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.3.5 Disconnect Looms and FPC Cables Carefully When disconnecting a wire loom or an FPC cable from a board, do not apply excessive pressure to either the loom wires or the connector clip. If you do, the connector clip will pop off the board and you will have to order and install a new connector which includes the clip. Figure 2.1 Disconnecting looms and FPC cables wire loom connector b connector clip FPC cable connector c In the example shown in b, use pliers to pull directly on the plastic connector in the area indicated by the arrows. Do not pull directly on the wires, as this will damage the loom. In the example shown in c, use your fingers or tweezers to loosen, but not fully remove, the connector clip that locks the FPC cable in place. Work the connector clip loose by sliding first one side of the clip and then the other gently away from the connector. The clip is loosened, but should remain attached to the connector. You can then slide the FPC cable out from the connector. 2.3.6 Prevent Scratches Protect the mechanical parts of the radio from scratches by working on a cleared area of a non-scratch bench top. The bench top must also meet the anti-static requirements outlined below. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 35 2.3.7 Observe ESD Precautions Anti-Static Bench Kit For information about anti-static precautions and the dangers of electrostatic discharge, refer to standards such as ANSI/ESD S2 0.20 and BS EN 100015-4 or go to the Electrostatic Discharge Association website www.esda.org/. Notice This equipment contains devices that are susceptible to dam-

age from electrostatic discharge (ESD). Handle every device carefully and in strict accordance with the procedures defined in the data book provided by the manufacturer. Tait recommends that you buy an anti-static bench kit from a reputable manufacturer. The bench must have:

a dissipative rubber bench top a conductive wrist strap a connection to ground. Install and test the bench kit in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. See Figure 2.2. Figure 2.2 Typical anti-static bench setup dissipative rubber bench mat conductive wrist strap common point ground

(building ground or mains ground) Carrying, Storing, or Shipping Components Also take strict anti-static measures when carrying, storing, or shipping a circuit board or its components:

To carry, store, or ship a circuit board use an anti-static bag. To carry, store, or ship a component use foil, an anti-static bag, or an anti-

static tube. You can also use an anti-static tray to carry a circuit board or component. 36 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.3.8 Observe Transmitter Safety Precautions To prevent injury or damage during test transmissions, general servicing, and transmitter faultfinding, carefully observe the following transmitter safety precautions. Caution Do not touch the antenna while the transmitter is operating, or you may receive RF burns. Notice Do not allow the radio to overheat during test transmissions. Excessive heat may damage the radio. See below. To protect against overheating:

After completing a measurement or test that requires activation of the transmitter, immediately return the radio to receive mode. If you must extend transmission time, consider disabling the PA and/or driver. Do this by removing the gate or drain feeds, or use CCTM commands 30 and 31. Secure the main-board assembly in the chassis with the two external screws and one of the internal screws. The heat-transfer block must be secured to the main board. The lid of the radio body may be left off. After completing any measurement or test requiring activation of the transmitter, immediately return the radio to the receive mode. Notice Do not operate the transmitter without a suitable antenna load. The radio is designed to operate with a 50 termination imped-

ance. Transmitting without a suitable load can damage the power output stage of the transmitter. Notice Ensure that all instruments are protected at all times from accidental transmissions. Under certain circumstances, the micropro-

cessor can activate the transmitter. While servicing, do not program or operate the transmitter on a reserved frequency band. 156.8MHz 375kHz, 243MHz 5kHz, and 406.0 to 406.1MHz are reserved worldwide for use by distress beacons. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 37 2.4 Tools, Equipment, and Consumables Use the kits and tools described here when servicing a mobile radio. See also Tait Support Website on page 32. 2.4.1 Service Kit The TM8000/TM9000 Service Kit (T02-00031-0007) includes:

the special tools needed to service the radio a test unit, and the items needed to connect a radio to a test unit the programming and calibration cables and adapters Table 2.1 shows the contents the kit. Table 2.1 Contents of the TM8000/TM9000 Service Kit (T02-00031-0007) Product code Item TMAA20-03 TMAA23-02 TMAA20-04 TMAA21-01 Cable (25W power connector to banana plugs plus speaker connector) Cable (>25W power connector to banana plugs plus speaker connector) Cable (RJ12 socket to RJ45 plug) Cable (DB15 socket to RJ45 plug plus speaker connector) T03-00118-0601 Programming cable (USB to RJ11) TOPA-SV-024 Test unit 2.4.2 Consumables Thermal Grease If you remove the RF board from the chassis, or disassemble the main-

board assembly, you will need to check that the thermal grease on the underside of the main board (> 25W) and the heat-transfer block has not been contaminated. If the thermal grease is contaminated, or if the RF board has been replaced, the thermal grease must be re-applied. Notice Thermal grease is essential to the proper operation of the radio. Do not omit to apply it. Caution Keep thermal grease away from your eyes. Contact with this product may cause temporary redness and discomfort of the eye. If con-

tact occurs, immediately flush the affected eye with clean water. Do not expose your skin to thermal grease for extended periods. Prolonged contact with this product may cause skin irritation. If skin irritation occurs, use soap and water to wash the affected skin. 38 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Thermal grease is a white grease that helps protect sensitive components from overheating. By filling surface irregularities and air voids, thermal grease increases heat transfer to the heat sink. Thermal grease is used to transfer heat away from the transmitter circuitry. Thermal grease is available in a 142g squeeze tube, and to order quote IPN 490-11302-00. For details of how to apply the thermal grease, see Fitting the Main-Board Assembly to the Chassis on page 84. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 39 2.5 Radio Connectors This section describes the specifications and pinouts of the connectors of the radio body and the control head. 2.5.1 Overview Figure 2.3 provides an overview of the connectors:

Figure 2.3 Connectors (radio with graphical control head) Figure 2.4 shows the connectors of the radio body. Figure 2.5 shows the connectors of the control head. For information on the factory connector of the main board and the internal connectors of the control head, refer to the PCB information of the main boards and the control head board. 40 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 2.4 Connectors of the radio body (25W radio) front view control head connector provision for external options connector provision for additional connector auxiliary connector power connector rear view RF connector internal options microphone top view TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 41 Figure 2.5 Connectors of the graphical control head microphone connector front view control head connector rear view without adapter flange Figure 2.6 Connectors of the 2-digit control head microphone connector connector for speaker front view control-head connector pads for leads of concealed microphone connectors for optional circuit board rear view 42 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.5.2 RF Connector The RF connector is the primary RF interface to the antenna. The RF connector is a standard mini-UHF connector or a BNC connector with an impedance of 50 . Notice The maximum RF input level is +27dBm. Higher levels may damage the radio. Table 2.2 RF connector - pins and signals Pinout Pin Signal Name Signal Type B C rear view 1 2 RF GND RF analog RF ground 2.5.3 Power Connector

>25W 25W The power connector is the interface for the primary 13.8V power source and the external speaker. The primary power source can be the vehicle battery or a mains-fed DC power supply. There are different power connectors for the >25W and 25W radios. Notice The speaker load configuration is balanced; the speaker out-

put lines must not be connected to ground. Connecting a speaker output line to ground will cause audio power amplifier shutdown. Table 2.3 Power connector (radio) pins and signals Pinout Pin Signal name Description Signal type 1 2 3 4

>25W radio rear view 25W radio 1 2 3 4 rear view GND SPK SPK+

Earth return for radio body power source. External speaker output. Balanced load configuration. External speaker output. Balanced load configuration. 13V8_BATT DC power input for radio body and control head. Ground Analog Analog Power TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 43 2.5.4 Auxiliary Connector The auxiliary connector is the standard interface for external devices that are typically connected to a radio. The auxiliary connector is a 15-way standard-density D-range socket. The auxiliary connector provides a serial port, three programmable input lines, four programmable digital I/O lines and audio I/O. The I/O lines can be programmed for a variety of functions, logic levels, and in some cases, direction. Audio lines can also be programmed to tap into, or out of, different points in the audio processing chain. For more information refer to the online help of the programming application. 44 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Table 2.4 Auxiliary connector pins and signals Pinout Pin Signal name Description 12 AUX_GPI1 5 AUX_GPI2 4 AUX_GPI3 10 AUX_GPIO4 B C D E F G H I J 1) 1!

1@

1#

1$

1%

rear view General purpose digital input. Programmable function. General purpose digital input. Programmable function. With LK3 fitted, GPI2 is an emergency power sense input.1 General purpose digital input. Programmable function. With LK2 fitted, GPI3 is a power sense input.1 High current open collector output only. Some models contain a hard-

ware configuration with this line available as a program-

mable input or low current output. 2 9 1 AUX_GPIO5 AUX_GPIO6 AUX_GPIO7 Programmable function and direction. Pads available to fit a higher power driver transistor on GPIO4 line 11 AUX_TXD 3 7 AUX_RXD AUD_TAP_IN Asynchronous serial port -

Transmit data Asynchronous serial port -

Receive data Programmable tap point into the Rx or Tx audio chain. DC-coupled. 13 AUD_TAP_OUT Programmable tap point out of the Rx or Tx audio chain. DC-coupled. 14 AUX_MIC_AUD Auxiliary microphone input. Electret microphone biasing provided. Dynamic microphones are not supported. Analog RSSI output2. Switched 13.8V supply. Supply is switched off when radio body is switched off. Ground RSSI

+13V8_SW3 15 GND 6 8 Signal type Digital, 3V3 CMOS Digital, 3V3 CMOS Digital, 3V3 CMOS Digital, open collector output, 3.8V compatible, 2A maximum, no pullup. Digital, 3V3 CMOS Digital, 3V3 CMOS Analog Analog Analog Analog Power Ground 1. For more information on hardware links refer to the Installation Guide (MMB-00002-xx). 2. Refer to RSSI Performance Characteristics on page 73 for more information. 3. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to the Installation Guide (MMB-00002-xx). TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 45 2.5.5 Internal Options Connector When installing an internal options board, the internal options connector is the electrical interface to the main board of the radio body. The internal options connector provides similar I/O to the auxiliary connector. The internal options connector is an 18-pin 0.1 inch pitch Micro-MaTch connector. Notice The digital I/O signals are intended to interface directly with compatible logic signals only. Do not connect these signals to external devices without appropriate signal conditioning and ESD protection. Table 2.5 Internal options connector pins and signals Pinout Pin B D F H J 1!

1#

1%

1&

C E G I 1) 1@

1$

1^

1*

top view 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal name 13V8_SW1 Description Switched 13V8 supply. Supply is switched off when the Radio Body is switched off. Signal type Power AUD_TAP_OUT Programmable tap point out of the Rx or Tx audio chain. DC-coupled. Analog ground. AGND IOP_MIC_AUD Internal options microphone input RX_BEEP_IN AUD_TAP_IN RX_AUD RSSI 16 17 18 DGND IOP_RXD IOP_TXD Electret microphone biasing provided. Dynamic microphones are not supported. Receive sidetone input. AC-coupled. Programmable tap point into the Rx or Tx audio chain. DC-coupled. Receive audio output. Post volume control. AC-coupled. Analog RSSI output. output of data. Programmable function and direction. With LK4 fitted, GPIO7 is a power sense input2. Digital ground. Asynchronous serial port -

Receive data. Asynchronous serial port -

Transmit data. 915 IOP_GPIO17 General-purpose port for input and Analog Ground Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Digital. 3V3 CMOS Ground Digital. 3V3 CMOS Digital. 3V3 CMOS 1. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to the Installation Guide (MMB-00002-xx). 2. For more information on hardware links refer to the Installation Guide (MMB-00002-xx). 2.5.6 Provision for External Options Connector The radio has a mechanical interface for the external connector of an internal options board. This external options connector can be a 9-way standard-density or 15-way high-density D-range connector. If no internal options board is installed (standard configuration), the hole for the external options connector is sealed by a bung. 46 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.5.7 Control Head Connectors The control head FPC cable connects the connector on the front of the radio body to the connector on the rear of the control head. The connector on the front of the radio body is an 18-way two-row right-

angled IDC (insulation displacement connector) SMD header socket. The connector on the rear of the control head is an 18-way 0.1 inch pitch Micro-MaTch SMD socket. Table 2.6 Control head connectors pins and signals Pinout Pin Signal name Description CEGI1)1@1$1^1*

BDFHJ1!1#1%1&

front view of radio B D F H J 1!

1#

1%

1&

C E G I 1) 1@

1$

1^

1*

top view of control head board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RX_AUD

+13V81 CH_TXD CH_PTT Receive audio output. Post volume control. AC-coupled. Power supply output from radio body power source. Asynchronous serial port -

Transmit data. PTT input from microphone. Also carries the hookswitch signal. CH_MIC_AUD Fist microphone audio input. AGND CH_RXD Analog ground. Asynchronous serial port -

Receive data. Digital ground. DGND CH_ON_OFF Hardware power on/software-

controlled power off input. Active low. 10 VOL_WIP_DC DC signal from volume pot wiper

(not used, connected to AGND). Data output signal to control head. Latch enable output to control head. General purpose digital input/output. 11 CH_SPI_DO 12 CH_LE 13 CH_GPIO1 14

+3V3 Power supply to control head digital circuits. 15 CH_SPI_DI Data input from control head. 16 CH_SPI_CLK Clock output to control head. 17 SPK Speaker audio output for non-remote control head. Balanced load configuration. Speaker audio output for non-remote control head. Balanced load configuration. 18 SPK+

Signal type Analog Power Digital. 3V3 CMOS. Digital Analog Ground Digital. 3V3 CMOS. Ground Digital Analog Digital. 3V3 CMOS. Digital. 3V3 CMOS. Digital. 3V3 CMOS input. Open collector output with pullup. Power Digital. 3V3 CMOS. Digital. 3V3 CMOS. Analog Analog 1. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to the Installation Guide (MMB-00002-xx). TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 47 2.5.8 Microphone Connector The microphone connector of the control head is an RJ45 socket. When the control head is connected to the control head connector of the radio body using the FPC cable provided, the microphone connector uses the following eight control head connector signals:

Table 2.7 Microphone connector pins and signals Pinout Pin Signal name Description Signal type B I front view 1 MIC_RX_AUD Receive audio output. 2

+13V81 Analog Power 3 MIC_TXD 4 MIC_PTT 5 MIC_AUD 6 GND 7 MIC_RXD 8 MIC_GPIO1 3.3V CMOS Power supply output. Switched off when radio body is switched off. Asynchronous serial port -

Transmit data. PTT input from microphone. Also carries hookswitch signal. Fist microphone audio input. Ground. Asynchronous serial port -

Receive data. General purpose digital input/output. Open collector out Analog Ground 3.3V CMOS Digital 3.3V CMOS in 1. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to the Installation Guide (MMB-00002-xx). 2.5.9 Programming Connector (Programming Control Head) The programming connector of the programming control head is an RJ45 socket. When the programming control head is connected to the radio body, the programming connector uses the following signals. Table 2.8 Programming connector pins and signals Pinout Pin 1 2 Signal name PRG_RX_AUD

+13V81 Description Receive audio output. Power supply output. Switched off when radio body is switched off. Asynchronous serial port -

Transmit data. PTT input from microphone. Also carries hookswitch signal. PRG_TXD PRG_PTT BI front view 3 4 5 6 7 8 PRG_MIC_AUD Fist microphone audio input. AGND PRG_RXD Analog ground Asynchronous serial port -

Receive data. Hardware power on/software-

power off input. Active low. PRG_ON_OFF Signal type Analog Power 3.3V CMOS Digital Analog Ground 3.3V CMOS Digital 1. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to the Installation Guide (MMB-00002-xx). 48 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.6 Shielding Cans and Connectors All shielding cans used in the TM9300 and TM9400 are press fit shields. Figure 2.7 and Figure 2.8 identify the cans and connectors on booth sides of the main board. Figure 2.7 Shielding cans and connectors (top side of main-board assembly) B1 band (50W) shown TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 49 Figure 2.8 Shielding cans and connectors (bottom side of main-board assembly) SK103 RF Connector Copper Plate Copper Plate PWRCTRL NB SYNTH SK100 Control Head Connector PL100 Power Conenctor EXCITER DDSBOT B1 band (50W) shown SK101 Auxiliary Connector 50 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 2.9 identifies the cans and connectors of the graphical control head board. Figure 2.9 Shielding cans and connectors of the graphical control head board pads for leads of concealed microphone connector for loom of LCD assembly E702 E100 E701 connector for speaker E200 connector for control head loom Removing a Can If possible, use a can removal tool to remove and install a shielding can. Follow the instructions provided with the tool. If no can removal tool is available, use a hot air gun as described here. Notice A hot air gun provides little control and can damage a board. Even in skilled hands, a hot air gun causes rapid uncontrolled rises in component temperature, both under the can that is being removed and under adjacent cans. To remove a can:

1. 2. Set the temperature and airflow on the hot air tool. If using a Leister hot air tool, for example, select the 5mm nozzle and set:

for a VCO can: temperature 4 and airflow 1 for a standard can: temperature 34 and airflow 12, depending on the thickness of the can. It is good practice to use flux when removing thicker cans. See Apply-

ing Flux on page 57. Apply heat directly to the top edges of the can. The heat flows down the sides, to the solder joint. Move the hot air gun along all edges of the can in one continuous movement, adjusting your speed as necessary:

Do not allow too much heat to flow onto the surrounding board. Do not stop in one spot for too long or you will burn the board and/or overheat the component. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 51 Installing a Can Caution Do not burn yourself on the heated can. 3. When the solder has completely refilled, insert the tips of a pair of footed tweezers into the holes in the top of the can. For a VCO can, use a pair of fine point tweezers. Use the tweezers to lift the can from the board. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Ideally, discard any can that is removed and replace it with a new can. Using flux and hot air, reflow the solder on the track of the can. Use solder wick to remove any excess solder from the track or, if there is insufficient solder on the track, pre-fill the lands with solder wire and iron. The track must be even and smooth or the can will twist or warp when you replace it on the board. Clean the area with isopropyl alcohol or aerosol flux cleaner. Prepare the can:

If the original can is undamaged and its sides are straight, re-use the original can. The solder left on the bottom aids installation. Observe the special precautions you were shown during training. If a new can is needed, tin the bottom of the can. Make sure that the amount of solder on the track will enable the can to lie flat without twisting or warping:

To remove excess solder, use solder wick or similar. To add solder, pre-fill the lands with solder wire and apply the soldering iron. Using too little solder will prevent the can staying secured. See Achieving Quality Solder Joints on page 58. Notice Solder balls under a can may cause components to short. If you use solder paste, clean the area thoroughly afterwards to remove all traces of solder balls. Apply flux gel to the track and then use hot air to reflow the solder on the track. Allow the lead-free solder time to reflow. See Working with Lead-free Solder on page 57. The track must provide a smooth, even surface for the can. Apply flux gel sparingly either to the lands or to the bottom of the can, and then align the can on the lands. Using the same hot air tool settings as you used earlier to remove the can, apply heat directly to the top edges of the can. The heat flows down the sides to the solder joint. Move the hot air gun along all edges of the can in one continuous movement, adjusting your speed as necessary. Allow the lead-free solder time to reflow. 52 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 6. 7. 8. Make sure that the can is level on the board. If necessary, use a pair of tweezers to apply a little pressure to the can. Use a magnifying lamp or a microscope to visually check all sides of the can for proper wetting. Make sure that reflow was successful and that the can is sitting correctly on the board. A bottom lip causes the can to sit slightly proud of the board once soldered. Optional. To prevent movement of the can, apply solder paste to the outside of the can only and use a soldering iron to tack the diagonal corners of the can into position. Clean the area thoroughly afterwards to remove all traces of solder balls. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 53 2.7 SMT Repairs (PCB Components) Notice Do not undertake repairs to SMT components unless trained and equipped to do so. See also Repair Recommendations on page 29. Attempting a repair without the necessary training, tools, and equip-

ment can cause permanent damage to the radio. The most cost-effective way to resolve a problem with a PCB or SMT component may be to replace the board. See Removing the Main-Board Assembly on page 77 and Removing the Main-Board Assembly on page 77. If you have in-depth product knowledge and intend to perform board-level diagnosis and/or the replacement of board components, please refer also to the relevant PCB Information document. Do not use the standard SMT repair techniques when replacing the inductors L1M and L3M. The standard techniques tend to produce excessive heat, which will damage these components. Do not use a hot-air tool or heat gun. Instead use solder paste and a standard soldering iron with an iron tip with a specified temperature of 600F (315C). The inductors are part of the SMPS of the power-supply circuitry on the bottom-side of the board. Figure 2.10 shows the locations of the components. Non-standard Procedures Figure 2.10 Locations of Territory inductors L1M and L3M bottom side

(VHF board shown) PL100 L3M L1M 54 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.7.1 Obtaining a Replacement PCB Component To obtain a replacement PCB component, complete the following steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Obtain a PCB Information Document. Identify the Damaged Component. Consult the Technical Notes. Verify the Specifications. Order the Replacement Component. Obtain a PCB Information Document Notice Always make sure that you have the correct PCB Information document for the board under repair. Identify the Damaged Component Consult the Technical Notes To obtain the correct PCB Information document for the board under repair:

1. 2. 3. Use your password to log into the secured area of the Tait Support website. From the PCB label, record the serial number of the board. The serial number is the S number. For example, 5135164. Using the contact details provided on the Tait Support website, request the PCB Information document. You will need to quote the serial number of the board. Use the PCB Information document for the board under repair to identify the IPN of the damaged component. Technical notes are published on the Tait Support website. Before ordering a replacement component, consult all technical notes that apply to the board. They may provide technical details that are not yet in the manuals. A major change in the design of a board - e.g. a layout change - is signalled by an increment of the boards issue number. In this case the IPN changes, new PCB Information is published, and a technical note is created. In the event of a minor change - e.g. a new component - the boards issue number stays the same. But if the minor change is important, a technical note is created. The IPN and the PCB Information document wont alert you to a minor change: only the technical notes will. Best practice is to print and store a copy of all relevant technical notes. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 55 Verify the Specifications Before ordering a part, make sure the specifications of the damaged part are identical to the specifications provided by the Parts List in the relevant PCB Information document. It is vital for tolerances to be the same. When the replacement component arrives, verify specifications again before installing the part. Order the Replacement Component If the component can be ordered as part of a spares kit, order the spares kit rather than the individual parts. See Spare Parts on page 179. If the item can be ordered as a stand-alone part, order it in the usual way. 2.7.2 Tools for SMT Repairs To repair or replace SMT components on a PCB, a can removal tool is recommended but is not mandatory. See Removing a Can on page 51. If the repair involves lead-free solder, the following tools are recommended:

Tool Brush for cleaning IPN 936-00001-33 Cutters, medium (small and large are also available) 365-00013-00 Pliers Tweezers, footed Tweezers, pointed 936-00000-96 936-00002-50 936-00000-50 2.7.3 Consumables for SMT Repairs For lead-free SMT repairs, the following consumables are recommended:

Consumable Flux gel, in syringe Hakko Goldilocks cleaner units Hakko Goldilocks refills Mini flux pen Solder paste Solder wick, standard Solder wick, narrow Solder wire, 0.35mm IPN 937-00002-76 937-00002-16 937-00002-15 937-00001-02 937-00002-81 937-00002-26 937-00002-19 937-00002-77 56 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Consumable Solder wire, 0.7mm Solder wire, 0.56mm Tip tinner IPN 937-00002-78 937-00002-79 937-00001-53 Syringe needles and push rods are also available on request. 2.7.4 SMT Repair Techniques Notice Do not undertake repairs to SMT components unless trained and equipped to do so. If you attempt a repair without the necessary equipment, tools, or training, you could permanently damage the radio. See also Repair Categories on page 29. Follow these specific repair guidelines in addition to the standard repair techniques that apply to the replacement of SMT components. Working with Lead-

free Solder Lead-free solder contains tin, silver, and copper. Observe the following guidelines and precautions when working with it. To order the tools and consumables referred to below see Tools for SMT Repairsand Consumables for SMT Repairs on page 56. Controlling the Heat If a component is located in a thermal drain area, the recommended maximum temperature when working with lead-free solder is:

608F (320C) for the smallest components 698F (370C) or 752F (400C) for bigger components. Notice Lead-free solder has a higher melting point than leaded solder and so takes longer to achieve proper wetting. Be patient. Do not increase the heat setting to make the solder melt faster. Increasing the temperature will destroy the flux solvent, creating unstable and brittle solder joints. Although it takes longer to heat a capacitor than a resistor, a capacitor is more susceptible to heat damage. Applying Flux Flux aids heat transfer. If components and cans are located in a thermal drain area, flux gel enables you to rework more quickly than a mini flux pen does and is more robust. To make flux flow more easily, warm the syringe needle on the flux gel. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 57 Because flux is a combination of resins and solvents, it evaporates almost immediately when heated. Although flux gel is a no-clean flux, use it sparingly and clean it off using a brush and isopropyl alcohol or aerosol flux cleaner. Achieving Quality Solder Joints If possible, reflow a component off the board, apply flux, and then reflow a new component on without adding more solder. If you must add solder, remove all old solder first. Do not mix lead-free solder and leaded solder in a single joint. Doing so creates an alloy of unknown parameters: the joint may become harder and more brittle, and its melting temperature may be higher. When you clean the tip of the soldering iron, do not make the sponge too damp. A cold sponge reduces the tip temperature. With lead-free solder, in particular, the drop and subsequent rise in temperature can affect the formation of the solder joint. Relative to leaded solder joints, lead-free solder joints look dull and grainy. This is a cosmetic difference only. All acceptance criteria remain the same. For the standards see the IPC A-610D Acceptability of Electronic Assemblies. Maintaining the Soldering Iron When you use lead-free solder, the iron tip of the soldering iron may corrode quickly and become untinnable. To prevent damage to the soldering iron:

Always leave a generous amount of solder on the tip and turn off the soldering iron when you are not using it. Use tip tinner/cleaner to remove built up oxides and help prolong tip life. Tait recommends you use the Hakko Goldilocks-type tip cleaner. See Consumables on page 38. Removing and Installing an 0402 Component Removing an 0402 Component To remove an 0402 component from a board:

1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the correct temperature setting for the hot air gun, based on the size of the component to be removed. See Controlling the Heat on page 57. Notice Do not overheat the component. Shield any heat-sensitive components. You can use a slightly thicker can for this. Adjust the hot air gun to the correct temperature and set the airflow to 1. Apply flux to the area as described above. 58 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 5. 6. Using a pair of tweezers to hold the component firmly, apply the hot air gun until the solder for the component has completely reflowed. Lift the component from the board. Do one of the following:

If you can attach a replacement component without adding more solder, retain the existing solder. If you need to add solder, remove and discard the reflowed solder. To remove solder, use narrow solder braid; do not cut standard braid down to size. If approved solder wire was used, no cleaning is required. If solder paste was used, clean the area as described above. Installing an 0402 Component 1. 2. 3. Adjust a hot air gun to the correct temperature (see above) and set the airflow to 1. Use a pair of tweezers to pick up the replacement component and place the component in the center of the pad. Hold a component across its body. Do not hold a component by its end caps. If the part is a resistor, ensure that the numbers on the resistor are visible (uppermost). Starting with the hot air gun 2cm (4/5in) above the component and working in a circular motion, slowly bring the hot air gun closer to the component. Notice Do not apply heat for longer than a few seconds or the heat will damage the board, the component, and everything around the com-

ponent. 4. When the solder starts to melt, remove the hot air gun and allow the component to cool slightly. Remove the pair of tweezers, apply flux, and then apply the heat again for only a few seconds. The component self-aligns. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 59 2.8 Test Equipment

>25W 25W To service the radio, the following test equipment is required:

a test computer, on which the calibration application and the relevant programming application is loaded an oscilloscope a digital current meter capable of measuring up to 20A a multimeter DC power supply (capable of 13.8V and 20A for the >25W radios, and 10A for the 25W radios) one of the following:

an RF communications test set with an audio bandwidth of at least 10kHz an RF signal generator, an audio signal generator, an audio analyzer, an RF power meter, and a modulation meter. See Setting Up the Test Equipment on page 61. To test and main-

tain the radio using a Test Unit (TOPA-SV-024) see TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit on page 191. a spare control head a T02-00031-0007 service kit. 60 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.9 Setting Up the Test Equipment Figure 2.11 Radio test equipment setup Test computer T03-00118-0601 programming cable USB 2.0 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit computer connector

(RJ11) Radio radio connector

(DB15) speaker connector microphone connector (RJ45) mobile radio power connector auxiliary connector

(DB15) TMAA23-02 cable

(>25W radios) TMAA20-03 cable

(25W radios) RF comms set RF in/out

(N-type) AUDIO OUT

(BNC) AUDIO IN HI

(BNC) audio monitor out (BNC) Oscilloscope AC input

(BNC) transmit audio connector (BNC) receive audio /

SINAD connector

(BNC) TMAA21-01 cable RF connector

(mini UHF or BNC) DC power banana plugs TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 61 Connect the Test Equipment Connect the radio to the Test Unit (TOPA-SV-024) as shown in Figure 2.11 on page 61. Set the Test Unit Switches Set the Portable/Mobile switch to Mobile. Notice The wrong switch position can damage the Test Unit and/or cause incorrect SINAD readings. To test receive functions, set the Test Unit switches as follows:

hook switch: Off Hook mode switch: Rx audio in switch: Off audio out switch: Speaker or Load:

Speaker causes received audio to be output from the Test Unit speaker. Load causes a 16 load to be switched into the circuit in place of the Test Unit speaker. The signal is terminated in the dummy load, and no speakers are activated. For the operation of these switches see Chapter 9, TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit. To test transmit functions, set the Test Unit switches as follows:

hook switch: Off Hook mode switch: Rx initially; when ready to transmit, Tx/PTT. This switch functions in the same way as the PTT switch on the radio. audio in switch: Mic Audio audio out switch: (anything) When you program or calibrate a radio, the switches have no effect. It is good practice to set the mode switch to Rx. Install the Programming and Calibration Applications Install the two programming applications and the calibration application on the test computer. See next. 62 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.10 Programming and Calibration Applications Servicing tasks require the following software applications:

calibration application programming application. These applications are provided on the Programming/Calibration CD

(T02-00031-0003 for TM9300 or T02-00031-0004 for TM9400). Install the relevant applications on the test computer. They can also be downloaded from the Tait Technical Resources website. For detailed instructions in the use of an application, start the application and then access the Help. 2.11 Upgrading the Radio Firmware Before servicing the radio, make sure that the radio database version and the radio operating band support the firmware version that is currently installed on the radio. 2.11.1 Viewing the Firmware Version To view the installed firmware version number, do one of the following:

Keep the PTT key depressed as you turn on the radio. The screen displays the firmware version number. See also Pressing Keys When Turning On the Radio on page 70. From the relevant programming application, select Radio > Interrogate. The screen that appears displays the product code, radio band and model, and firmware, hardware and database version numbers. 2.11.2 Upgrading Firmware Please contact your Tait dealer, if you need a firmware update. 2.11.3 Installing Firmware To install a firmware upgrade on the radio:

From the relevant programming application select Tools > Download. For details, see the Help for the programming application. The firmware is transferred from the computer to the radio. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 63 2.12 Computer-Controlled Test Mode (CCTM) Use computer-controlled test mode (CCTM) to test the basic functions of the radio and the integrity of the radio hardware. Some CCTM commands cause the radio to carry out particular functions; others read settings and parameter values from the radio. To use CCTM:

1. 2. 3. Connect the radio to the test equipment. See Setting Up the Test Equipment on page 61. Place the radio in computer-controlled test mode. See Placing the Radio in Computer-Controlled Test Mode, below. All radio keys, inputs, displays, and tones under software control are temporarily disabled while the radio is in CCTM. The radio uses param-

eters from its own configuration file, except for parameters that are spe-

cifically overridden by a CCTM command. Enter CCTM commands on the test computer. See Entering a CCTM Command on page 65. Commands are relayed to the radio via the Test Unit (TOPA-SV-024) and responded to by the radio. If the radio generates results that can be viewed, these are displayed on the computer. If it generates an error see CCTM Error Codes on page 70. To exit CCTM:

If using the calibration application, turn off the radio. When the radio is turned on again, it is no longer in test mode. If using a terminal program, enter the Reset CCTM command,

^ 0x5E. 2.12.1 Placing the Radio in Computer-Controlled Test Mode Enter CCTM from a terminal program such as the HyperTerminal utility that was supplied with Microsoft Windows XP and can be installed on Windows 7, or an equivalent such as TerraTerm. Select the settings for the communications port before placing the radio in CCTM. 1. 2. Select Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications >

HyperTerminal [or equivalent]. On the computer, select the communications (COM) port that the radio is connected to. 64 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 3. 4. 5. Select the following settings for the COM port:

bits per second: 19200 data bits: 8 parity: none stop bits: 1 flow control: none Click the OK button and save the file with a suitable name. This file contains the port settings. To use the same port settings in future HyperTerminal sessions, open the file. The timing of the following steps is important: you must enter the char-

acter % within half a second of the letter v appearing. Place the radio in CCTM:

a. Enter the character ^. The radio is reset and the lowercase letter v appears. (If uppercase V appears, there is a fault. Check the COM port settings and try again.) b. Within half a second, enter the character %. The character appears and Test Mode appears on the radio display. If this does not happen, repeat 5 until the radio enters CCTM. 2.12.2 Entering a CCTM Command Place the radio in CCTM and then use the computer to either select or enter a CCTM command. Allow the radio time to respond to a command before you enter another command, or test results may be unreliable. Although the command prompt appears on a new line on the computer screen when the radio receives a command, you must also wait for the radio to respond. To enter a CCTM command from the calibration application:

Do one of the following:

Choose the name of the command from the drop-down list. The corresponding number appears in the next field. Enter the number(s) associated with the command. The corresponding name appears in the previous field. If a command consists of a sequence of numbers, press the spacebar once to separate the numbers in the sequence. Press Enter only once, after the final number in the sequence. To enter a CCTM command from a terminal program:

Enter the command number. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 65 2.12.3 CCTM Commands The tables listed below identify the test mode commands, show what to enter (or select) to send the commands, and describe the responses that appear on the screen. Table 2.9 CCTM commands for the radio CCTM command 32 Receive mode Sets the radio into receive mode 33 Transmit mode Sets the radio into transmit mode 46 Battery level 63 RSSI level 72 Lock status 93 SSN 94 Radio serial number 96 Firmware version1 97 Boot software version 98 FPGA version 101 Set radio frequency 111 Read volume level Enter 32 33 46 63 72 93 94 96 97 98 101 <tx_freq> <rx_freq> 0

(frequencies in Hz) 111 133 Hardware version Reads the product code and the hardware version 133 203 Clear system error Clears the last recorded system error 204 Read system error Reads the last recorded system error and the associated data 203 204 Response None None Supply voltage in mV ADC voltage (0 to 255) Averaged RSSI in 0.1 dBm steps Returns xyz x = main synth y = digital clock z = not used

(1 = locked, 0 = unlocked) SSN or MMI board serial number (if programmed), else 0 Radio serial number (if programmed) else output for CCTM 93 xxxxxxxx, the eight-digit serial number (S/N) of the radio, which is also on the chassis label; see Labels on page 23 Firmware version number Boot software version number FPGA version number None Volume level Wiper setting (0 to 255) Product code and hardware version See Tait Product Numbering on page 25. None SysErr: x y where x is the error number and y represents the associated data 66 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Table 2.9 CCTM commands for the radio (Continued) CCTM command 205 Erase persistent data Effectively resets the calibration parameters to their default values 326 Set transmitter power level 611 Show terminal operating times2 Shows the radios operating times in milliseconds Enter 205 326 x where x specifies the level

(0=off, 1=very low, 2=low, 3=medium, 4=high, 5=maximum) 611 612 Clear terminal operating times2 Resets the radios operating time counters to zero 612 Response None None Total operating time High power Tx time Low power Tx time3 All operating time data cleared 1. To display the radios firmware and hardware version, see also Pressing Keys When Turning On the Radio on page 70. 2. This command is only available in the TM9480. 3. Low power also includes medium, low and very low power. Table 2.10 CCTM commands for fault finding of the control head CCTM command 1000 All function key LEDs and status LEDs Sequentially switches the function key LEDs and the status LEDs on and off 1001 Individual function key LEDs and status LEDs Switches individual LEDs on and off 1002 LED intensity Sets the LED intensity 1003 Keypad backlighting Activate keypad backlighting at specified intensity 1004 LCD backlighting Activate LCD backlighting at specified intensity 1005 LCD contrast Sets the LCD contrast (16 levels) 1006 LCD elements Switches all LCD elements on and off 1007 LCD temperature sensor Reads the LCD temperature sensor 1008 LCD heating Switches the LCD heating on and off Enter 1000 0 = off 1000 1 = on Response None 1001 x y where x is the LED number

(0=F1, 1=F4, 2=yellow, 3=green, 4=red), and y is the state (0=off, 1=on) 1002 0 = off 1002 1 = low 1002 2 = medium 1002 3 = high 1003 0 = off 1003 1 = low 1003 2 = medium 1003 3 = high 1004 0 = off 1004 1 = low 1004 2 = medium 1004 3 = high 1005 x where x is the contrast level

(0 to 15) 1006 0 = off 1006 1 = on 1007 1008 0 = off 1008 1 = on None None None None None None Value between 00 (0) and FF (255) TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 67 Table 2.10 CCTM commands for fault finding of the control head (Continued) CCTM command 1009 Key press Detects and notifies individual key press and release events 1010 Volume potentiometer Reads and notifies the volume potentiometer setting 1011 Microphone Selects the microphone input source 1012 Remote amplifier Turns the audio amplifier on and off in the remote head 1013 Mute audio amplifier Mutes and unmutes the remote audio amplifier 1014 Digital potentiometer Reads the remote digital potentiometer 1017 Audio amplifier gain sets the audio amplifier gain (4 levels) 1019 Read/set control head GPIO Reads the input state or sets the output state of the microphone port GPIO signal (J106 pin 8) 1203 Clear last system error Enter 1009 0 = off 1009 1 = on 1010 1011 0 = microphone connector 1011 2 = concealed microphone 1012 0 = off 1012 1 = on 1012 0 = mute 1012 1 = unmute 1014 1017 x where x is the gain (0 to 3) 1019 = read 1019 1 = set high 1019 0 = set low 1019 = read (reset to input) 1203 1204 Read last system error 1204 Response serial output value between 00 (0) and FF (255) none None None Value between 0 and 255 None Value 1 if high Value 0 if low None None CH: no system errors dumped if there are errors: an error dump if there are no errors:

CH: no system errors dumped 68 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Table 2.11 CCTM commands for fault finding of the handheld control head CCTM command Entry at keyboard Response on screen 1000 All function key LEDs and status LEDs sequentially switches the function key LEDs and the status LEDs on and off 1001 Individual function key LEDs and status LEDs switches individual LEDs on and off 1002 LED intensity sets the LED intensity 1003 Keypad backlighting Activate keypad backlighting at specified intensity 1004 LCD backlighting Activate LCD backlighting at specified intensity 1005 LCD contrast sets the LCD contrast (16 levels) 1006 LCD elements switches all LCD elements on and off 1009 Key press detects and notifies individual key press and release events 1020 Microphone mute 1000 0 = off 1000 1 = on 1001 x y where x is the LED number

(2=orange, 3=green, 4=red), and y is the state (0=off, 1=on) 1002 0 = off 1002 1 = low 1002 2 = medium 1002 3 = high 1003 0 = off 1003 1 = low 1003 2 = medium 1003 3 = high 1004 0 = off 1004 1 = low 1004 2 = medium 1004 3 = high 1005 x where x is the contrast level

(0 to 15) 1006 0 = off 1006 1 = on 1009 0 = off 1009 1 = on 1020 0 = mute 1020 1 = unmute none none none none none none none serial output TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 69 2.12.4 CCTM Error Codes Table 2.12 shows error messages that can be displayed when the radio is in test mode. For detailed assistance please refer to the online help for the calibration application. If an error persists contact your Regional Repair Centre. Table 2.12 CCTM error codes Error code Description C01 C02 C03 C04 C05 An invalid CCTM command has been received. Enter a valid CCTM command. A valid CCTM command with invalid parameters has been received. Re-enter the CCTM command with valid parameters. A valid CCTM command has been received but cannot be processed at this time. Enter the CCTM command again. If the error persists, power the radio down and up again, and re-

enter the CCTM command. An error occurred the initialization of test mode. Power the radio down and up again, and place the radio in CCTM again. The radio has not responded within the specified time. Re-enter the CCTM command. 2.13 Pressing Keys When Turning On the Radio If you hold down the PTT key when turning on the radio, the radio will briefly display the firmware and hardware versions, and the radios frequency band. This information is also available from the Radio info menu. This function does not work with the handheld control head. Figure 2.12 Radio Firmware, hardware and frequency band information radio display firmware version 6.02.0001 H5 0101 frequency band hardware version 70 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.14 Visual and Audible Indicators The radio uses a combination of visual and audible indicators to indicate its current state and activity. These can be useful when servicing the radio. 2.14.1 Visible Indicators LCD Screen The LCD screen in the control head displays:

channel and user information error messages. Table 2.12 on page 70 lists some of the error messages. For more information about what appears on the LCD screen, please refer to the relevant radio Users Guide. LED Indicators The information conveyed by the STATUS LEDs is listed in Table 2.13 on page 71. The behavior of the function-key LEDs depends on the way the function keys are programmed. Table 2.13 Visual indications provided by the STATUS LEDs LED color LED name Indications Meanings Red Transmit LED is on The radio is transmitting LED flashes

(1) The transmit timer is about to expire

(2) The radio has been stunned Green Receive and monitor LED is on There is activity on the current channel, although it might not be audible LED flashes

(1) The radio has received a call with valid special signaling

(2) The monitor has been activated

(3) The squelch override has been activated Amber Scanning LED is on The radio is scanning a group of channels for activity LED flashes The radio has detected activity on a certain channel and scanning has halted on this channel 2.14.2 Audible Indicators The radio emits audible beeps and tones to advise you about its status. Audible indicators include keypress confidence tones, received call signals, transmit timer, and unanswered call signals. For example, the radio may be programmed to indicate whether an action is permitted (short, medium-pitched beep) or not permitted (long, low-pitched beep). Some audible indicators supplement visual indicators. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 71 When Troubleshooting the Radio The information conveyed by the tones is given in Table 2.14. When troubleshooting the radio, make sure that audible tones are enabled and that they are set to a useful volume. For example, if the radio is programmed so that a particular indicator is set to a volume of 0 you will not hear that indicator. If necessary, use the relevant programming application to increase the volume settings. Notice Before changing any settings, read the programming file as described in Chapter 4, Servicing Procedures. Restore all customized volume settings before returning the radio to the customer. List of Audible Indicators For a comprehensive list of audible indicators, including those that relate to signaling and modes, search for Indicator Types in the online help for the relevant programming application. For a summary of the indicators, see the following table. Table 2.14 Audible indications Type of tone One short beep Meanings

(1) After power-up Radio is locked; PIN is required

(2) On power-down Radio is off

(3) On pressing key Key-press is valid

(4) On pressing function key Function has been initiated One short low-pitched beep On pressing function key again Function has been terminated One short high-pitched beep While powered up Radio has been stunned One long low-pitched beep (1) On pressing key Key-press is invalid

(2) On entry of PIN PIN is invalid

(3) On pressing PTT switch Transmission is inhibited Two short beeps

(1) On power-up Radio is ready to use

(2) On entry of PIN PIN has been accepted and radio is ready to use

(3) After radio has been stunned Radio has been revived and is ready to use Two low-pitched beeps While powered up Temperature of radio is high Two high-pitched beeps While powered up Temperature of radio is very high and all transmissions will be at low power; if temperature rises further, transmissions will be inhibited Three short beeps While powered up Previously busy channel is now free Three beeps Warble During transmission Transmit time-out is imminent; transmission will be terminated in 10 seconds While powered up Frequency synthesizer is out of lock on current channel; LCD will usually display Out of Lock. Continuous low-pitched tone While powered up System error has occurred and radio might be inoperable; LCD usually displays System Error (graphical display), E1 or E2. 72 General Servicing Information TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2.15 RSSI Performance Characteristics The analog RSSI output is available on pin 6 of the auxiliary connector, and is measured with regard to pin 15 (ground) of the same connector (refer to Auxiliary Connector on page 44). As shown in Figure 2.13, the linear range of the output starts at 0.6V for a 120dBm RF input, and increases at a rate of 25mV per 1dB increase in received signal strength to reach 2.35V at 50 dBm received signal strength. The error margin on the analog voltage pin is 50mV with an accuracy of 3dB for the actual received signal strength measurement in the radio. Figure 2.13 RSSI voltage vs. signal strength

) V m

e g a t l o V I S S R 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0

-120

-110

-100

-90

-80

-70

-60

-50 Signal Strength (dBm) TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 General Servicing Information 73 3 Disassembly and Reassembly This section describes how to:

remove and mount the control head disassemble and reassemble the radio body disassemble and reassemble the control head disassemble and reassemble the handheld control head. General Notice Before disassembling the radio, disconnect the radio from any test equipment or power supply. Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts. Inspect all disassembled parts for damage and replace them, if necessary. Observe the torque settings indicated in the relevant figures. For information on spare parts, refer to Spare Parts on page 179. 74 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 3.1 Removing and Mounting the Control Head Notice Before removing the control head, disconnect the radio from any test equipment or power supply. Removing the Control Head 1. 2. Note which way up the control head is attached to the radio body in order to return the radio to the customer in its original configuration. On the underside of the radio body, two lever points are indicated on the radio body by a dot-dash-dot pattern (

The lever point is between the control head seal and the plastic of the control head.

). Figure 3.1 Disconnecting the control head from the radio body control head lever point control head seal indication of lever point Notice When inserting the flat-bladed screwdriver, take care not to damage the control head seal. At either of the lever points, insert a 3/16 inch (5mm) flat-bladed screwdriver between the control head and the control head seal. Use the screwdriver to lift the edge of the control head up and off the clip, then repeat in the other position. The control head can now be removed. Disconnect the control head loom. Inspect the control head seal for damage, and replace if necessary. Plug the control head loom onto the control head connector. Notice When mounting the control head, make sure you do not pinch and damage the control head loom. Insert the bottom edge of the control head onto the two clips in the front of the radio body, then snap into place. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. Mounting the Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 75 3.2 Disassembling the Radio Body Removing the Cover Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts. For reassembly instructions, refer to Reassembling the Radio Body on page 82. 1. 2. 3. At the upper edge of the lower screw bosses on both sides of the radio body, insert a 1/8 inch (3mm) flat-bladed screwdriver. Push the screwdriver under the cover towards the upper screw boss to release the cover from the upper screw boss. Remove the cover. Figure 3.2 Removing the cover upper screw boss insertion point lower screw boss cover 76 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Opening the Radio Body The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.3 on page 78. 1. Use a Torx T20 screwdriver to remove the four screws c. Notice If an options board is fitted inside the lid, an options loom will connect the options board to the internal options microphone input on the main board. In this case, carefully fold over the lid and disconnect the loom. 2. 3. Carefully remove the lid assembly d. Inspect the main seal in the lid for damage, and replace if necessary. Removing the Main-Board Assembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.3 on page 78. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the auxiliary connector bung h (if fitted). Remove the RF connector seal j using one of the tabs located at the bottom of the sealpreferably by hand. If necessary, lift up the tap using the blade of a small flat-bladed screwdriver. Do not damage the seal with the screwdriver. Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to remove the screws e connecting the main board to the chassis. Use a Torx T20 screwdriver to remove the screws i connecting the heat-transfer block to the rear of the chassis. Notice Make sure not to touch the thermal paste on the chassis, the heat-transfer block, and the underside of the main board. If the thermal paste is contaminated, you must re-apply thermal paste as described in Fitting the Main-Board Assembly to the Chassis on page 84. Holding a hand over the chassis to catch the main-board assembly, turn the chassis upside down and tap its fins on the edge of the workbench. This will release the heat-transfer block from the chassis. The gap pad 19x12mm 1! must be replaced each time the main board is removed. 7. With the >25W radio, the gap pad 1) on the L-shaped ridge must be replaced each time the main board is removed.

>25W TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 77 Figure 3.3 Components of the radio body B Torx T20 22lbfin (2.5Nm) Cx4 D Torx T10 15lbfin (1.7Nm) Ex5 F thermal paste 1!

G H Ix2 Torx T20 22lbfin (2.5Nm) B cover C screw M4x16 (x4) D lid assembly E screw M3x10 (x5) f main-board assembly g chassis 1)

>25W J H auxiliary connector bung I screws M4x16 (x2) J RF connector seal 1) gap pad (>25W radio only) 1! gap pad 19x12mm 78 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembling the Main-Board Assembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.4 on page 80. This figure shows the >25W configuration. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the power connector seal I. Use a torque-driver with a 3/16 inch (5mm) socket to remove the D-range screwlock fasteners H. Use a torque-driver with a 9/16 inch (14mm) long-reach socket to remove the RF connector nut 1!. Also remove the lock washer 1@. Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to remove the three screws b securing the main board 1$ to the heat-transfer block F. Notice Make sure not to touch the thermal paste on the heat-transfer block and the underside side of the main board. If the thermal paste is contaminated, you must re-apply thermal paste as described in Reas-

sembling the Main-Board Assembly on page 82. Separate the main board 1$ from the heat-transfer block F. Inspect the inner foam D-range seal E and the outer foam seal G, and replace if necessary. The gap pad 1) (>25W radio only) must be replaced each time the heat-transfer block is separated from the main board. To replace the power connector J:

With the >25W radio, use a Torx T6 screwdriver to undo the two screws C. With the 25W radio, use a Torx T10 screwdriver to undo the two screws C.

>25W

>25W 25W TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 79 Figure 3.4 Components of the main-board assembly Bx3 Torx T10 15lbfin (1.7Nm) Torx T6 1lbfin (0.11Nm) Torx T10 3lbfin (0.34Nm) Cx2 D

>25W 25W E F G H I 3/16 inch (5mm) 8lbfin (0.9Nm) thermal paste J 1) 1$

1#

>25W 1@

1!

9/16 inch (14mm) 15lbfin (1.7Nm) B M3x10 screw (x3) C

>25W radios:

M2.2x10 PT screw (x2) 25W radios:

K30x8 PT screw (x2) D auxiliary connector E inner foam D-range seal F heat-transfer block G outer foam seal H D-range screwlock fastener (2x) I power connector seal J power connector 1) gap pad (>25W radio only) 1! RF connector nut 1@ RF connector lock washer 1# RF connector 1$ main board 80 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Removing an Options Board

(Optional) The radio may be fitted with an options board in the lid assembly, which may or may not have an external options connector fitted in a provision in the lid assembly. The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.5. 1. 2. 3. If an external options connector is fitted:

Undo the two screws b and remove the protective rubber cap c

(if fitted). Undo the two D-range screwlock fasteners d. Undo up to nine screws h and remove the options board G from the lid assembly E. If an external options connector is fitted, a foam seal for the D-range connector f is fitted to the inside of the lid. Remove the foam seal only if it is damaged. Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly. Figure 3.5 Removing an options board d 3/16 inch (5mm) 8lbfin (0.9Nm) b c e f g h Torx T10 17lbfin (1.9Nm) B screw 4-40x4.8 (x2) C protective rubber cap D D-range screwlock fastener 4-40 (x2) H screw M3x10, self-tapping (x9) E lid assembly F foam seal for D-range connector G options board (example) TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 81 3.3 Reassembling the Radio Body Inspect all disassembled parts for damage and replace them, if necessary. Reassembling the Main-Board Assembly The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.4 on page 80. This figure shows the >25W configuration.

>25W 25W

>25W 1. 2. If the power connector has been replaced:

With the >25W radio, use a Torx T6 torque-driver to tighten the two screws C to 1lbfin (0.11Nm). With the 25W radio, use a Torx T10 torque-driver to tighten the two screws C to 3lbfin (0.34Nm). If the outer foam seal E or the inner foam D-range seal G have been removed, fit new seals to the heat-transfer block F. 3. With the >25W radio, the rectangular gap pad 1) must be replaced each time the heat-transfer block F is separated from the main board 1$:

Remove any residue of the old rectangular gap pad from the underside of main board and the heat-transfer block. Peel off the transparent film on one side of the gap pad and evenly press the gap pad on the contact surface of main board (refer to Figure 3.6). Peel off the transparent film on other of the gap pad. Figure 3.6 Contact surfaces on the bottom side of the main board

>25W contact surface of L-shaped gap pad

>25W contact surface of rectangular gap pad tin-plated copper plate contact surface of gap pad 19x12mm audio-PA area 82 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. If the thermal paste on the heat-transfer block F or the tin-plated copper plate of the main board 1$ has been contaminated, new thermal paste must be applied:

Remove any residue of the old thermal paste from both contact surfaces. Use Dow Corning 340 silicone heat-sink compound

(IPN 937-00000-55). Notice Ensure that no bristles from the brush come loose and remain embedded in the paste. The paste needs to be completely free of con-

taminants. Use a stiff brush to apply 0.1cm3 of thermal paste over the complete contact surface on the tin-plated copper plate (refer to Figure 3.6 on page 82). Place the main board 1$ in position on the heat-transfer block F, and push them together to spread the thermal paste. Notice You must observe the following order of assembly to ensure that the main board and the connectors are not assembled under stress. Use a torque-driver with a 3/16 inch (5mm) socket to fasten the D-range screwlock fasteners H to 8lbfin (0.9Nm). Fit the RF connector lock washer 1@. Use a torque-driver with a 9/

16 inch (14mm) long-reach socket to fasten the RF connector nut 1!

to 15lbfin (1.7Nm). Use a torque-driver with a Torx T10 bit to fasten the three screws b to 15lbfin (1.7Nm). Loosen both the D-range screwlock fasteners H and the RF connector nut 1!. 10. Re-tighten both the D-range screwlock fasteners H and the RF connector nut 1! to the torques indicated in steps 7. and 8. 11. Fit the power connector seal I. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 83 Fitting the Main-

Board Assembly to the Chassis The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.3 on page 78. This figure shows the >25W configuration. 1. The gap pad 19x12mm 1! must be replaced each time the main-

board assembly F is removed from the chassis G. 2. With the >25W radio, the L-shaped gap pad 1) must be replaced each time the main-board assembly F is removed from the chassis G:

Remove any residue of the old gap pad from the audio-PA area on the underside of the main board (refer to Figure 3.6 on page 82) and the L-shaped ridge of the chassis (refer to Figure 3.3 on page 78). Peel off the transparent film on one side of the gap pad and evenly press the gap pad on the L-shaped ridge of the chassis. Peel off the transparent film on other of the gap pad. 3. 4. 5. If the thermal paste on the heat-transfer block or the underside of the main board has been contaminated, new thermal paste must be applied:

Remove any residue of the old thermal paste from both contact surfaces. Use Dow Corning 340 silicone heat-sink compound

(IPN 937-00000-55). Notice Ensure that no bristles from the brush come loose and remain embedded in the paste. The paste needs to be completely free of con-

taminants. Use a stiff brush to apply 0.1cm3 of thermal paste on the heat-

transfer block (refer to Figure 3.3 on page 78). Use a stiff brush to apply 0.01cm3 of thermal paste on the audio-PA heat sink of the chassis (refer to Figure 3.3 on page 78) Place the main-board assembly F in position in the chassis G. Loosely screw in the two screws I through the heat-transfer block by hand. 6. While pressing down firmly on the diagonal edge of the PAD TOP can (refer to Figure 3.7), use a Torx T20 torque-driver to tighten the two screws I to 22lbfin (2.5Nm). This will ensure that the main board is seated correctly on the bosses for the five internal screws E. 84 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 3.7 PAD can on the top side of the main board PAD can 7. 8. 9. Clean off any excess thermal paste on the heat-transfer block. Screw in the five screws E through the main board by hand as far as possible. Use a Torx T10 torque-driver to tighten the screws to 17lbfin (1.9Nm). Fit the RF connector seal j. Ensure that the seal is properly seated around its entire periphery. 10. If an auxiliary connector bung h was fitted, fit the bung. Closing the Radio Body The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.3 on page 78. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If an internal options board is fitted inside the lid, connect the loom to the internal options microphone input. Inspect the main seal in the lid for damage, and replace if necessary. Place the lid assembly D on the chassis G. Use a Torx T20 torque-driver to tighten the four screws c to 22lbfin (2.5Nm). Slide the cover b over the radio body and snap holes in the side of the cover over the screw bosses. Inspect the control head seal for damage, and replace if necessary. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 85 3.4 Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head 3.4.1 Graphical Control Head Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts. Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly. The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.9 on page 88. The connectors of the control head board and the orientation of the speaker and speaker clamp are illustrated in Figure 3.8. 1. With your fingers, pull off the volume control knob 1&. Do not use any tools as this might cause damage. 2. 3. 4. 5. Unscrew the two screws B and remove the adaptor flange C. Disconnect the control head loom D. Note whether the speaker is connected or disconnected. If it is connected, disconnect the speaker cable from the speaker connector of the control head board F (refer to Figure 3.8). Note that the radio must be returned to the customer in its original configuration. Release the lock of the LCD connector and unplug the loom of the LCD assembly 1@ (refer to Figure 3.8). Note that the loom runs through a slot in the space frame J. Figure 3.8 Speaker orientation and connectors of the control head board legs of the speaker clamp pads for leads of concealed microphone connector for loom of LCD assembly speaker terminals connector for speaker connector for control head loom 3470z_01 6. Unscrew the four screws E and remove the control head board F. 86 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7. 8. 9. If a concealed microphone is fitted, pull the concealed microphone 1% capsule out of its rubber seal when removing the control head-

board F. If necessary, unsolder the leads from the pads on the control head board (refer to Figure 3.8). Remove the light pipes H and I. The space frame J clips into three clips of the front panel. Unclip the spaceframe and remove it along with the two seals G. Check the seals G and replace them, if necessary. 10. Remove the speaker 1! and speaker clamp 1). Notice When fitting the speaker and the speaker clamp, observe the orientation of the speaker terminals. Make sure that the larger of the three legs of the speaker clamp is placed between the two clips of the front panel assembly as shown in Figure 3.8 on page 86. 11. Remove the LCD assembly 1@, main keypad 1#, and power keypad 1$. Notice When replacing the LCD, carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft polarizer material on the top side of the LCD. The LCD seal is replaced whenever the LCD is replaced. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 87 Figure 3.9 Components of the graphical control head B M4 x 12 Taptite screw (x2) C adaptor flange D control head loom assembly with female-female adapter E 3 x 10 PT screw (x4) F control head board G space frame seal (x2) H short light pipe I long light pipe J space frame 1) speaker clamp 1! speaker 1@ LCD assembly (including LCD seal) 1# main keypad 1$ power keypad 1% concealed microphone 1^ front panel assembly 1& knob for volume-control potentiometer Torx T20 18lbfin (2.0Nm) B x2 C Torx T10 5.5lbfin (0.62Nm) D E x4 H I F G J G 1) 1!

1%

1^

1@

1#

1$

1&

88 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 3.4.2 2- or 3-Digit Control Head Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts. Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly. The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.11 on page 90. 1. With your fingers, pull off the volume control knob 1%. Do not use any tools as this might cause damage. 2. 3. Note whether the speaker I is connected or disconnected. If it is connected, disconnect the speaker cable from the speaker connector of the control-head board (refer to Figure 3.10). Note that the radio must be returned to the customer in its original configuration. Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to unscrew the three screws D securing the control-head board. The screws are labelled screw 1 to screw 3;

these numbers are also inscribed on the PCB. The control-head board is now held down only by the clips labelled clip 1 to clip 3 in Figure 3.10. 4. While pressing on the shaft of the volume-control potentiometer, push clip 2, clip 1 and then clip 3 away from the control-head board. The board will be freed from the space frame. Remove the board. Figure 3.10 Speaker orientation, connectors and clips of the 2- or 3-digit control-head board speaker terminals connector for speaker clip 1 clip 2 connectors for optional circuit board legs of the speaker clamp connector for control-head loom clip 3 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 89 5. While pulling upwards on the space frame G at the corner where the microphone connector is situated, release the clips labelled B to G in Figure 3.11 in the order: B and C, D and E, and then F and G. To release each clip use a 3/16 inch (5mm) flat-bladed screwdriver to lever the clip out of its recess. Pulling on the space frame helps release the clips. Notice When fitting the space frame G, make sure that the clips labelled B to G fully snap into the front panel assembly. If necessary, use a flat-bladed screwdriver to push down the clips until they snap into place. Figure 3.11 Components of the 2- or 3-digit control head adapter B control-head loom with female-female C control-head options board (optional) D 3 x 8 PT screw (x3) E control-head board F elastomeric strip (x2) G space frame H speaker clamp I speaker J short light pipe 1) long light pipe 1! keypad 1@ LCD 1# concealed microphone (future release) 1$ front panel assembly 1% knob for volume-control potentiometer Torx T10 5lbin (0.6Nm) d x3 F Fx2 d G E j C B 1) 1#

1@

h i B C E g 1!

1$

1%

90 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 6. Remove the elastomeric strips F, speaker clamp h, speaker I, LCD 1@, keypad 1!, light pipes j and 1). Notice When replacing the LCD, carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft polarizer material on the top side of the LCD. Notice When fitting the speaker and the speaker clamp, observe the orientation of the speaker terminals. Make sure that the legs of the speaker clamp are positioned under the space frame as shown in Figure 3.10 on page 89. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 91 3.4.3 Programming Control Head Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts. Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly. The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.12. 1. 2. 3. Release the clip of the PCB bracket E and remove the control-head board B. Disconnect the control-head loom C from the control-head-board B. Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to unscrew the four screws D and remove the PCB bracket E. Figure 3.12 Components of the programming control head Torx T10 5lbin (0.6Nm) B C D x4 E F G x2 B control-head board C control-head loom with female-female adapter D 3 x 8 PT screw (x4) E PCB bracket F front panel G RJ45 bung (x2) 92 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 3.4.4 Handheld Control Head Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts. Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly. The connectors and board mounted user interface components are illustrated in Figure 3.13 (main board) and Figure 3.14 (UI board). The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 3.15 on page 95. Notice Take care when disconnecting looms during the disassembly process. Refer to the instructions outlined in Disconnect Looms and FPC Cables Carefully on page 35. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Insert the supplied programming cover tool 2$ into the matching hole in the programming cover 2#. Alternatively, use an 8mm Allen key with a flat rather than a ball head instead of the supplied cover tool. Rotate the tool turn counterclockwise to unlock the programming cover. Remove the programming cover. When reinstalling the programming cover, rotate the tool turn clockwise, and ensure that the seal on the programming cover is undamaged and is seated correctly. Unscrew the five rear cover screws 2@ using a Torx T7 driver. When reassembling, use a Torx T7 torque-driver to tighten the screws to 4.5lbfin (0.5Nm). Remove the rear panel 2), leaving the rear panel seal 2! in place. When reassembling, ensure the seal is undamaged and is seated cor-

rectly around the entire perimeter of the rear panel. Unplug the hookswitch loom 1( from the main board 1%. The rear panel is now separate from the front panel assembly. Unplug the microphone loom g and curly cord connector 1& from the main board 1%. Lift the right side of the main board away from the front panel assembly, to expose the loom between the main and UI boards. Disconnect the loom that connects the main board to the UI board. The main board is now separate from the front panel assembly. Removing the Programming Cover Removing the Rear Panel Removing the Main Board TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 93 Figure 3.13 Connectors of the hand-held control headmain board switch for function key 2 switch for function key 3 switch for PTT key connector for internal hookswitch loom programming connector connector for curly cord to radio body rear panel switch for function key 1 connector for microphone loom keypad support switch for on/off key S604 S602 S 6 0 1 3 0 6 S J107 5 0 6 S J105 J106 J101 top side main board orange LED green LED red LED DS602 DS603 DS601 connector for main board to UI board loom J104 switch for function key 1 3 1 6 S bottom side main board Removing the LCD Assembly and UI Board 1. 2. 3. Unscrew the five UI board screws 1$ using a Torx T6 driver. When reassembling, use a Torx T6 torque-driver to tighten the screws to 2lbfin (0.2Nm). Unplug the LCD assembly loom from the UI board 1#. Remove the LCD assembly 1! and UI board from the front panel assembly. Figure 3.14 Connectors of the hand-held control headUI board connector for LCD loom connector for UI board to main board loom J2 J1 bottom side UI board 94 Disassembly and Reassembly TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 3.15 Components of the hand-held control head c d b 1!

g j f 1) h i x3 e Torx T7 4.5lbfin (0.5Nm) 2) 2@

x5 2!

1(

1^

1@

1#

1$

x5 1%

Torx T6 2lbfin (0.2Nm) 1*

1&

2#

2$

B PTT keypad frame C PTT keypad actuator d PTT/function key keypad e front panel f microphone grommet g microphone and loom h light spreader i light pipes (x3)1 j top keypad 1) keypad support 1! LCD assembly, including loom and foam tape 1@ main keypad 1# user interface (UI) board 1$ K18x5 T6 PT screw (x5) 1% main board 1^ main to UI board loom 1& curly cord to radio body 1* foam tape 1( hookswitch loom 2) rear panel 2! rear panel seal 2@ K25x20 T7 PT screw (x5) 2# programming cover and seal 2$ tool for programming connector cover 1. For hand-held control heads other than black: A 7mm length of heat shrink (IPN 400-00020-06) is slid over each light pipe, to provide additional light shielding. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Disassembly and Reassembly 95 4 Servicing Procedures Notice Before starting to service a mobile radio read Chapter 2, Gen-

eral Servicing Information. When you receive a radio for servicing, perform the tasks described here, skipping any that do not apply:

4.1 Initial Tasks Initial tasks help with fault diagnosis and ensure that you do the repair in the proper way. Complete the full set of tasks as described here, in the order shown. Do not omit the initial administration. Complete this sequence of initial tasks for every radio received for servicing:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Complete the Initial Administration Perform a Visual Inspection Power Up the Radio Read and Save the Programming File Obtain the Details of the Software Feature Enabler (SFE) Read and Save the Calibration File Task 1 Complete the Initial Administration When a radio is received for repair, details of the customer and the fault are recorded in a fault database. State whether the reported fault indicates:

mechanical damage or loss of a mechanical part failure of a radio function mechanical damage and failure of a radio function 96 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Task 2 Perform a Visual Inspection Visually check the exterior of the radio for mechanical damage or loss. Do this even if the reported fault indicates a function failure only. Inspect the following:

knob for volume-control potentiometer microphone grommet rubber seal for RF connector bung for auxiliary connector bung for aperture for external options connector. The bung for aperture for external options connector should be replaced by a cover seal if an external options connector is present. All the parts are illustrated in Spare Parts on page 179. Except for the microphone grommet, if any of these parts is missing or damaged, replace it as described below. In the case of the microphone grommet, refer to the accessories section for the repair procedure. Replace Damaged or Missing Knob Remove the volume-control knob if it is damaged. Push the replacement knob onto the shaft of the volume-control potentiometer. Ensure that the knob turns freely. Replace Damaged or Missing Seals and Bungs Check for Additional Damage Remove any damaged seal or bung. Obtain a replacement seal for the RF connector or a replacement bung from Spares kit 2. Order a replacement cover seal (and screws) from your regional Tait office; the IPNs of the parts are listed in Spare Parts on page 179. When fitting a replacement bung, ensure that it is not upside down and that it is properly seated. To fit the seal for the RF connector, first fit the upper part of the seal and then press down around the sides of the seal to the bottom. Ensure that the seal is properly seated along its entire length. Also check for damage to exterior parts that can be replaced only by partly disassembling the radio. These parts are:

cover assembly for radio body keys, lens and LCD of control head front panel of control head. In the case of the front panel, inspect particularly the light pipes for the STATUS LEDs and the membrane behind the speaker grille. If the radio is reported to have a functional fault, continue with Task 3. Any additional mechanical damage will be repaired during the course of rectifying the functional fault. If the radio has no functional fault, repair any additional damage as described below; conclude with the tasks of Final Tasks on page 108. Repair Damaged Control Head If the control head is damaged, detach it from the radio body as described in Removing and Mounting the Control Head on page 75. The procedure includes inspecting the interior of the control head for evidence of other damage. Disassemble the control head and repair all damage as described TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 97 in Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head on page 86. Then reassemble the control head and re-attach it to the radio body. Task 3 Power Up the Radio Set up the radio test equipment and connect the radio to it. See Setting Up the Test Equipment on page 61. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Apply power to the radio. If the radio is programmed not to start on power-on, press the ON/OFF switch. If the radio powers up but keeps resetting itself, check the power-sens-

ing circuitry. If the radio powers up but fails to enter user-mode, or dis-

plays an error, refer to Table 4.1 on page 103. If the radio powers up successfully, go to Task 4. If it does not, go to Step 3. Check the fuses, cables, and the power supply. Check whether the control head loom, the control head or the radio body is faulty by first connecting a spare control head loom and then a spare control head. The radio may fail to power up if the firmware of the spare control head doesnt match the firmware of the radio body. If either firmware version is unknown, you can try to use a RJ-45 control head to power up the radio (if available). If the control head is faulty, check the control head connector

(pin 2: +13V8, pin 14: +3V3, pin 6: AGND), and repair or replace the control head board. Do one of the following:

If able to repair the radio without replacing the main board, go to the next task. Replace the main board, reassemble the radio and go to Final Tasks on page 108. If unable to repair the radio, reassemble the radio and go to Final Tasks on page 108. 98 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Task 4 Read and Save the Programming File Notice Always read and the programming file before starting to ser-

vice the radio. It is especially important to do this if updating the firm-

ware and replacing or installing a board. If the radio powers up, read the radios programming file or upload a default file:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Once the radio is on and startup is complete, use the relevant programming application and click the Read icon to read the programming database that is currently in the radio. If the application reads the programming database from the radio, save a copy of the programming database to the test computer and go to the next task (Task 5 Obtain the Details of the Software Feature Enabler (SFE)). If the application cannot read the programming database, continue with Step 2 of the current task (below). If it seems that the file cannot be read, cycle the power to the radio and again attempt to read the file. First cycling the power is essential if the radio is programmed to power up in transparent-data mode

(1200 baud FFSK) and if the selected data port is the microphone connector. Make sure that:

the radio is connected to the correct serial port of the test computer the Mode switch of the Test Unit (TOPA-SV-024) is set to Rx. the programming application is set up correctly If necessary, see the troubleshooting section in the Help for the pro-

gramming application. Repeat Step 1 above. If the application reads the programming database from the radio, save a copy of the programming database to the test computer and go to the next task (Task 5). If the application cannot read the programming database, continue with Step 5 of the current task (below). Check whether the control head loom, the control head or the radio body is faulty by first connecting a spare control head loom and then a spare control head. If the control head is faulty, check:

the control head connector (pin 3: TXD, pin 7: RXD), the microphone connector, the path between the control head connector and the microphone connector, and repair or replace the control head board. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 99 7. 8. Repeat Step 1 above:

If the application reads the programming file, save a copy of the file to the test computer and go to the next task (Task 5). If the application cannot read the programming file, continue with Step 8 of the current task (below). Set up a suitable default programming file and upload it to the radio:

If the upload is successful, go to the next task (Task 5). If the upload fails, replace the main board. Then set up a suitable default programming file and upload that to the radio. If the upload is successful, go to the next task (Task 5). If the upload fails, reassemble the radio and go to Final Tasks on page 108. Task 5 Obtain the Details of the Software Feature Enabler

(SFE) Task 6 Read and Save the Calibration File Use the programming application to obtain and record the details of any software-enabled features (Tools > Optional Features). Refer to the Help for the programming application. Notice Always read and save the calibration file before starting to service the radio. Although adjustments are still needed, the original calibration file, read from the radio, is the best starting point. 1. With the radio still turned on, use the calibration application to read the calibration file:

If the application reads the calibration file, save a copy of the file to the test computer and go to Task 7. If the application cannot read the calibration file, continue with the Step 2 of the current task (below). 2. Set up a suitable default calibration file and upload it to the radio:

If the upload is successful, go to Task 7. If the upload fails, go to Final Tasks on page 108. Task 7 View the Firmware Version Depending on the customer, it may be required to return the radio with either the same firmware version or to update the radio to the latest firmware version. It is important to record the installed firmware version in case the main board needs to be replaced. To view the installed firmware version number, do one of the following:

Use the radio menu to display the firmware version number. From the relevant programming application, select Radio > Interrogate. The screen that appears displays the product code, radio band and 100 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 model, and firmware, hardware and database version numbers. Task 8 Update the Firmware

(if necessary) Depending on the customer, it may be required to return the radio with either the same firmware version or to update the radio to the latest firmware version. If necessary, contact Technical Support to obtain the relevant firmware version. To install a firmware upgrade on the radio:

From the relevant programming application select Tools > Download. For details, see the Help for the programming application. The firmware is transferred from the computer to the radio. Upload the saved programming file to the radio. Upload the saved calibration file to the radio. Task 9 Calibrate the Radio It is good practice to calibrate a TDMA radio during servicing. With the radio still connected to the test equipment, use the calibration application to calibrate the radio. Refer to the Help for the calibration application. Save a copy of the calibration file to the test computer. 4.2 Checking the User Interface This procedure does not apply to the programming control head. Use the relevant programming application to identify any user interface behavior that is specific to the radio under repair. This includes startup behavior, settings for quiet/silent modes, programmed function keys, channels, and scan groups. Check the user interface as follows:

1. 2. Use the programming application to activate backlighting, deactivate silent and quiet modes, and view the programmed function keys, channels and scan groups. Turn on the radio, make sure that the volume control is not set to low, and check the start-up sequence:

the LEDs light up red briefly the speaker gives two short beeps LCD and keypad backlighting activates the LCD displays a power-up message then a channel number, or an error message. 3. Check the following elements of the user interface:

TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 101 volume control: Use CCTM command 1010 to read the volume potentiometer. The returned value should be between 0 and 255. LCD: Check visually or use CCTM command 1006 1 to switch on all LCD elements. Power-cycle the radio to reset the LCD to its original state. PTT key: While pressing the PTT key, the transmit symbol or should appear on the radio display (unless transmit is inhibited on the selected channel). scroll and selection keys: Scroll through all settings and observe the radio display. function keys: Check whether the programmed function is activated. keypad: Use CCTM command 1009 1 to turn on keypad notification. Check that each keypress returns a different number. CCTM command 1009 0 turns keypad notification off. backlighting (if programmed): Any keypress should activate backlighting. 4. Do one of the following:

If there is no fault in the user interface, go to Responding to Error Messages on page 103. If there is a fault in the user interface, disassemble the radio as described in Chapter 3, Disassembly and Reassembly. Repair or replace any damaged parts. Retest the radio and record whether the repair was successful. If the problem is solved go straight to Final Tasks on page 108. 102 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 4.3 Responding to Error Messages If the radio indicates an error message at any stage see Table 4.1 and take the action indicated. See also Visual and Audible Indicators on page 71. Table 4.1 Error messages Error message Corrective action Error E0001 Unknown Error E0002 Unknown Error E0003 Corrupt FW System error 0xabcdefgh Turn the radio off and then back on. Continue with servicing tasks to locate the problem. Re-download the radios firmware. Turn the radio off and then back on. If the system error persists, consult the product's technical notes for further information on the system error. If there is no relevant information in the technical notes, continue with servicing tasks to locate the problem. To capture details of the system error, use CCTM command 204. Temperature threshold exceeded Wait until the radio has cooled down. Cannot tx Go to Task 4.4 on page 104. Programming mode, invalid radio ... Reprogram the radio with a new programming database. If the problem persists, update or reload the radios firmware, and reprogram the radios calibration database. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 103 4.4 Checking the Transmit and Transmit-Audio Functions Complete this task only if the reported fault indicates a problem with these functions. Notice Do not allow the radio to overheat during test transmissions or transmitter faultfinding. Before starting this task see Observe Trans-

mitter Safety Precautions on page 37. The radio may fail to transmit if:

the synthesizer is not in lock the carrier power is wrong or there is no carrier power the incorrect frequency was entered when the radio was programmed there is no modulation, indicating a problem with the CODEC-audio circuitry or with the microphone If you know the cause of the problem, replace the damaged part. Otherwise complete the following steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use CCTM command 101 as described in CCTM Commands on page 66 to set the transmit frequency to the bottom of the band. Set the radio to transmit mode (CCTM command 33). Read the lock status (CCTM command 72):

If the value returned is 110, the frequency synthesizer is in lock as it should be. Continue with Step 4 of the current task (below). If the value returned is not 110, the synthesizer is not in lock. Replace the main board or repair the frequency synthesizer circuitry. Retest the radio and record whether the repair was successful. If the problem is solved go to Final Tasks on page 108. Use CCTM command 101 as above to set the transmit frequency to the top of the band. Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 with the transmit frequency set to the top of the band. Notice Do not operate the transmitter without a suitable antenna load. The radio is designed to operate with a 50 termination imped-

ance. Transmitting without a suitable load can damage the power output stage of the transmitter. Notice Ensure that all instruments are protected at all times from accidental transmissions. Under certain circumstances, the micropro-

cessor can activate the transmitter. 104 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 6. 7. 8. 9. Use CCTM command 33 to set the radio to transmit. Set the transmit power level to very low (CCTM command 326 1). Connect an RF power meter and measure the carrier power (or transmit power) of the radio. Do one of the following:

If the carrier power is correct, set the carrier power to high (CCTM command 326 4) and repeat Step 7. Then continue with Step 9 of the current task (below). If the carrier power is incorrect, recalibrate the radio and then measure the carrier power again. If recalibration does not solve the problem, replace the main board or repair the transmitter circuitry. Retest the radio and record whether the repair was successful. If the problem is solved go to Final Tasks on page 108. If no audio is being transmitted, check the microphone. a. Use a known good microphone to eliminate the microphone as the source of the problem. b. Test whether the radio can transmit audio:

If the radio can transmit audio, the original microphone was the source of the fault. Reassemble the radio and go to Final Tasks on page 108. If the radio still cannot transmit audio, continue with Step 10 of the current task (below). When you reassemble the radio, use the original front panel. 10. 11. Check whether the speaker is the source of the fault, as described in Speaker Faulty on page 136. Replace the main board or repair the audio circuitry. Retest the radio and record whether the repair was successful. If the problem is solved go to Final Tasks on page 108. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 105 4.5 Check the Receive and Receive-Audio Functions Complete this task if the reported fault indicates a problem with the receive and receive-audio functions. The radio may fail to receive if:

the synthesizer is not in lock no carrier is detected the speaker is faulty the volume potentiometer (volume control) is faulty there is no modulation If you already know the cause of the problem, replace the damaged part. Otherwise complete the following steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Use CCTM command 101 as described in CCTM Commands on page 66 to set the receive frequency to the bottom of the band. Use CCTM command 72 to read the lock status:

If the returned value is 111, the frequency synthesizer is in lock as it should be. Continue with Step 3 of the current task (below). If the returned value is not 111, the frequency synthesizer is not in lock. Replace the RF board or repair the frequency synthesizer circuitry. Retest the radio and record whether the repair was successful. Then go to Final Tasks on page 108. Use CCTM command 101 as above to set the receive frequency to the top of the band and then repeat Step 2. Remove any RF carrier. Then use CCTM command 63 to read the RSSI value. Record the RSSI value. In CCTM mode, command 63 returns the signal strength in steps of 0.1dBm when a receive signal is detected. The speaker operates. In user mode, a conventional radio displays RSSI bars, if these are enabled. The green LED is lit. Apply an unmodulated 47dBm signal to the receive channel. Use CCTM command 63 to read the RSSI value again. Record the new RSSI value. If the new RSSI value is greater than the RSSI value recorded previously, the receiver is detecting the carrier correctly. Continue with Step 7 of the current task (below). If the new RSSI value is not greater than the RSSI value recorded 106 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7. 8. 9. 10. previously, recalibrate the radio and check the RSSI value again. If recalibration does not solve the problem, replace the RF board or repair the receiver circuitry. Retest the radio and record whether the repair was successful. Then go to Final Tasks on page 108. Feed an unmodulated 117dBm signal to the receive channel and make sure that the squelch opens. All receive signalling must be disabled before the squelch will open. Check whether the speaker is the source of the fault, as described in Speaker Faulty on page 136:

Test whether the radio can output audio:

If the radio can output audio, the original speaker was the source of the fault. Reassemble the radio and go to Final Tasks on page 108. If the radio cannot output audio, continue with Step 10 of the current task (below). Use the original front panel when you reassemble the radio. Check the status of the volume potentiometer. CCTM command 111 returns a volume setting of 0 to 255. Turn the volume knob on the radio. The second value returned should vary as you do so:

If the value varies appropriately, the volume potentiometer is good. Continue with Step 11 of the current task (below). If the volume potentiometer is faulty, repair or replace it. See Chapter 3, Disassembly and Reassembly. Retest the radio and record whether the repair was successful. If the problem is solved go straight to Final Tasks on page 108. 11. Replace the main board or repair the audio circuitry. Use the original front panel when you reassemble the radio. Retest the radio and record whether the repair was successful. If the problem is solved go toFinal Tasks on page 108. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 107 4.6 Final Tasks Repair and reassemble the radio as described above, carry out a full and final inspection and test, complete these final tasks in the order shown, and then return the radio to the customer. Skip any of the final tasks that do not apply or that you have already completed in the course of the repair. For example, if you replaced a board, you have already loaded the programming file and recalibrated the radio. Do not omit the final administration. Complete this sequence of final tasks for every radio received for servicing:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Enable Software Features (SFE). Load the Programming File. Reprogram the Radio Serial Number (if necessary). Reprogram the Electronic Serial Number (MPT trunked mode only)

(if necessary). Recalibrate the Radio (if necessary). Perform a Final Inspection. Test the Radio. Complete the Final Administration. If you replaced the RF board, ensure that the correct software features, if any, are enabled for the customer. If software features need to be enabled, a special license file is required for the replacement main board. The file must allow for the enabling of the same software features as in the original assembly. Proceed as follows:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If it was possible to read the software features in Obtain the Details of the Software Feature Enabler (SFE) on page 100, go to Step 2. If it was not possible, go to Step 3. Reading the software features will have revealed if any software features were enabled for the radio under repair. If there were, go to Step 3. If there were none, go to Task 2. Contact your Tait regional office regarding the radios software features. Supply the serial number of the radio under repair, and the serial number of the replacement main board (located on a label on the main board). If it is known that the radio had software features enabled, go to Step 6. Otherwise go to Step 7. Task 1 Enable Software Features (SFE) 108 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 6. 7. 8. 9. From your Tait regional office, request a license file for the replacement main board. Go to Step 8. Ask your Tait regional office whether the radio under repair had any software features enabled, and if so, to send a license file for the replacement main board. They will either indicate that the radio had no software features enabled, or supply the required file. If the radio had no software features enabled, go to Task 5. If the required file is supplied, go to Step 8. On receiving the license file, run the programming application on the test computer. On the menu bar click Tools > Optional Features. The Optional Features dialog appears. Use the license file to enable the appropriate software features. The procedure is given in the Help under the heading Activating a feature. Go to Task 2. Task 2 Load the Programming File Perform this task if you reprogrammed the radio for servicing, or replaced the RF board. 1. 2. Connect the radio to the test equipment. Use the relevant programming application to load the programming file that you read or set up in Initial Tasks. If you reprogram the radio with a default programming file:

If the radio will be returned directly to a customer who has no programming facilities, obtain and upload either the original programming file or the data used to create that file. If the radio will be returned to a Tait dealer or distributor, or directly to a customer who has programming facilities, advise them that they will need to reprogram the radio. Warning Unexpected radio behavior! How the radio is config-

ured determines how it behaves. If possible, restore all customized settings before returning the radio to the customer. If there are any new settings, test them or urge the customer to test them before the radio user faces a real-life situation. For example, when giving pri-

ority to a signal make sure that the radio user will be able to break in (get through) in an emergency. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 109 Task 3 Reprogram the Radio Serial Number If you replaced the RF board, the electronically stored radio serial number

(RSN) is no longer the same as the (original) radio serial number that is marked S/N on the chassis label. 1. 2. 3. Use the programming application to view the Specifications form. Note the new radio serial number. Note the old radio serial number (S/N) that still appears on the chassis label. See Figure 1.2 on page 23. Supply both numbers to the network provider and explain that they belong to the same radio. Task 4 Reprogram the Electronic Serial Number

(MPT trunked mode only) If you replaced the RF board, the electronically stored Electronic Serial Number (ESN) that a trunked radio network uses to identify a trunked radio has changed. The ESN consists of three parts:

Manufacturers Code + Model Code + Electronic Serial Number Example:

Manufacturers Code: 4 Model Code: 7 Electronic Serial Number: 5163 Together these give the radio an ESN of 475163 1. 2. Use the programming application to view the Trunked Networks form. Note the values in the three fields in the ESN panel. Supply the new ESN to the trunked network provider. Task 5 Recalibrate the Radio (if necessary) It is good practice to recalibrate a TDMA radio after servicing (unless you installed a new, pre-calibrated RF board). With the radio still connected to the test equipment, use the calibration application to calibrate the radio. Refer to the Help for the calibration application. Task 6 Perform a Final Inspection Carry out a full and final inspection of the radio exterior. See Perform a Visual Inspection on page 97. If any mechanical part was damaged during the repair, rectify the damage. Task 7 Test the Radio Test the radio to confirm that it is fully functional. If the radio works, go to the next task. If the radio does not work, go to Task 8 Complete the Final Administration below. Best practice is to record test results on a separate sheet and to provide the customer with a copy of the sheet as confirmation of the repair. 110 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Table 4.2 Final tests of general radio functions (analog mode) Test PTT switch Microphone Description Check that PTT switch works. Check operation of microphone. Check operation of hookswitch. Data communications Test 1200 baud data transmission (standard). Direct-connect GPS

(global positioning system) Selcall Check that GPS poll returns correct position (if feature is enabled). Check that radio encodes Selcall. Check that radio decodes Selcall. Audio tap points and digital I/O Check configuration of programmed options and test operation of these lines to confirm that Customer requirements are satisfied. Caution To prevent injury or damage during test transmissions, gen-

eral servicing, and transmitter faultfinding, observe the precautions described in Observe Transmitter Safety Precautions on page 37. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 111 Table 4.3 Test Final tests of transmitter function (analog mode) Limits 0.5ppm Error in transmit frequency i o d a r W 5 2 25W

>25W i o d a r W 5 2

Transmit power:

B1 and C0 band High Medium Low Very low High Medium Low Very low G1, H5 and H7 bands Transmitter current at high power:

B1 band C0 band G1 band H5 and H7 bands Transmit power:

B1 band High Medium Low Very low HK, H5 and H7 bands High Medium Low Very low K5 band L3 band High Medium Low Very low High (757MHz to 806MHz) High (806MHz to 870MHz) Medium Low Very low Transmitter current at high power:

B1 and band H5 and H7 bands K5 band L3 band Peak deviation (sweep tone of 300Hz to 3kHz):

Narrow band Medium band1 Wide band1 Distortion:

1kHz at 1.5kHz deviation (narrow band) 1kHz at 3.0kHz deviation (wide band) CTCSS deviation:

Narrow band Medium band1 Wide band1 23.2W to 29.2W 11.1W to 14.0W 4.6W to 5.8W 0.9W to 1.2W 23.2W to 29.2W 11.1W to 14.0W 4.6W to 5.8W 0.9W to 1.2W

< 5.5A

< 4.5A

< 4.0A

< 6.5A 46.3W to 58.3W 23.2W to 29.2W 13.9W to 17.5W 9.3W to 11.7W 37.1W to 46.7W 18.5W to 23.3W 13.9W to 17.5W 9.3W to 11.7W 26.7W to 33.7W 32W to 38W 13.4W to 16.8W 4.5W to 5.8W 1.8W to 2.2W 26.7W to 33.7W 13.4W to 16.8W 4.5W to 5.8W 1.8W to 2.2W

< 10.5A

< 9.5A

< 7.5A

< 7A

< 2.5kHz

< 4.0kHz

< 5.0kHz

< 3%

< 3%

250 to 350Hz 500 to 560Hz 580 to 680Hz 112 Servicing Procedures TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Task 8 Complete the Final Administration 1. SFE TMAS083 is required to operate the radio in medium or wide band. Table 4.4 Final tests of receiver functions (analog mode) Test Receive sensitivity Mute opening:

Country City Hard Limits

< 118dBm for 12dB SINAD

>6dB and <10dB SINAD

>8dB and <14dB SINAD

>18dB and <22dB SINAD Audio power (maximum volume at 47dBm):

at Rx Audio/SINAD connector on Test Unit at pins 3 (SPK) and 4 (SPK+) of power connector on radio 1

>500mVrms

>5.00Vrms Distortion (at 47dBm, 60% rated system deviation at 1 kHz, with volume set to give 3W into 16 load) <3.00%

1. The Rx Audio/SINAD output on the test unit has 10dB of attenuation switched in when the test unit PORTABLE/MOBILE switch is set to MOBILE. Refer to TOPA-

SV-024 Test Unit on page 191 for details. If the repair was successful:

1. 2. Enter details of the repair in the faults database. Return the repaired radio to the customer with confirmation of the repair. If the repair was not successful:

Send the radio to your regional Tait office. Include the customer details, the reported fault, and a description of the repair action to date. (If you are at a regional Tait office, send the radio and details to the Global Repair Center.) Regard a repair as not successful if, for example:

You cannot locate the fault within a reasonable and economic period of time. You can locate the fault, but the repair is beyond your current level of training and/or expertise, or you lack the necessary facilities. The repair failed. For more information about the handling of problematic repairs see Repair Recommendations on page 29. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Servicing Procedures 113 5 Overview Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head This section describes the fault finding of the control head for the following faults:

power supply faulty (initial check) LCD display faulty LCD back lighting faulty LCD heating faulty function key LEDs, status LEDs, or backlighting LEDs faulty ON/OFF key faulty function, scroll, or selection keys faulty speaker faulty volume control faulty PTT faulty The faults can be detected by visual inspection (refer to Checking the User Interface on page 101) or using the CCTM commands in Table 2.10 on page 67. General The following applies for all fault finding procedures:

Notice Do not disconnect or connect the control head while power is supplied to the radio. To connect to ground use one of the screw bosses of the metal spaceframe or the screw bosses of the radio body. If the radio does not switch on when power is supplied, the radio may be programmed to go into the state it was in when powered down. Connect a known good control head, power up the radio, and change the relevant setting in the programming application. Remember to program the original setting before returning the radio to the customer. These fault finding procedures use CCTM commands to test the basic functions of the control head (see Computer-Controlled Test Mode

(CCTM) on page 64). For disassembly and re-assembly instructions, refer to Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head on page 86. If the repair fails or the fault could be found, replace the control head board. After completing the repair, carry out the tasks in Servicing Procedures on page 96. 114 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 5.1 Power Supply Faulty A 3.3V regulator (U1) converts the switched 13.8V supply from the radio body to 3.3V. A 1.2V regulator (U203) converts the 3.3V to 1.2V, and a 2.5V regulator (U206) converts the 3.3V to 2.5V. A power-sense module

(U205) verifies the outputs of the voltage regulators andin the case of a faultcreates a power reset signal which is processed by the FPGA. If the start-up of the control head fails, the radio body reduces the switched 13.8V supply shortly after power is supplied. Figure 5.1 Circuit diagram of the power supply circuitry J103 13V8 2 6 Control-

Head Connector E107 F101 L1 E201 13V8_FILT 9 2 2 C 5 0 2 C 9 0 2 C 1 D 1 3 2 R Q201 0 3 2 R 0 3 2 C 3V3 4 3 2 R 3 3 2 R LCD_RESETN LCD Module Q201 0 2 2 C MR 1 2 2 C From FPGA PWR_WDT 3V3 5 VDD U205 GND 2 3 4 MR WDI 1 RST 8 1 2 C 8 0 2 R 6 0 2 E 6 0 2 C 8 0 2 C 7 0 2 C 1 3 2 C 2 3 2 C 2 3 2 R 8 VCC OUT U1 VREF FB HSLUG 1 6 5 HSLUG 2 4 3 SYNC COMP INH GND 7 L201 3V3_RAW E202 3V3 3V3 1 0 2 D 5 0 2 R 6 0 2 R 3+

3 2 C 0 1 2 C 1 3 IN EN 5 4 OUT NC U203 GND 2 1 0 2 C 1V2_RAW E203 1V2 1V2 3 1 2 C 2 0 2 C 1 1 2 C FPGA R202 0 1 2 R 1 0 2 R 4 1 2 C R200 0 0 2 C 1 3 IN EN E204 1V2_PLL 1V2_PLL 5 4 OUT NR U206 GND 2 2V5_RAW E205 5 1 2 C 6 1 2 C 2 1 2 C 7 1 2 C 2V5 2V5 PWR_RESET#

Refer to Figure 5.2 on page 118 for the PCB layout. For all faults, check that the supply voltages are correct:

1. Check the 3.3V supply voltage on pin 4 of J105, and C201 or C214. J105 pin 4: 3.3V C201 or C214: 3.3V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 5. If it is incorrect, remove shielding can E200 and continue with Step 2. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 115 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check the 3.3V supply voltage between E202 and C210. E202/C210: 3.3V If the signal is not correct, visually inspect the components E202, D201, L201, R205, and R206 for open or shorted contacts. Replace if necessary. Continue with Step 3. Check the 13.8V supply voltage (9.7V to 17.2V) between pin 2 of the control head connector J103 and pin 8 of U1. J103 pin 2: 13.8V (Vs=9.7V17.2V) U1 pin 8: 13.8V (Vs=9.7V17.2V) If the signal is correct, continue with Step 4. A fault in the control head can cause the radio body to reduce the switched 13.8V supply shortly after power is supplied. In this case, the control head must be supplied directly through pin 2 of connector J103. If the signal is not correct, check the 13.8V supply voltage from the radio body. Return to Step 1. Check the inhibit signal at pin 3 of U1. U1 pin 3: high: >2.2V, low: < 0.7V D1: Vs 5.1V If the signal is above 2.2V, visually inspect the components D1, R231, R230, R208, and Q201 for open or shorted contacts. Replace if necessary. Return to Step 1. If the signal is low, replace U1. Return to Step 1. Check the 1.2V supply voltage at C211 and C212. C211, C212: 1.2V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 8. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 6. Check the 1.2V supply voltage at pin 5 of U203. U203 pin 5: 1.2V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 7. If the signal is not correct, replace U203. Check E203 and E204 for continuity. E203, E204: 1.2V If E203 and E204 are correct, check the PCB track for open circuits or shorts. Replace the PCB if necessary. If E203 and E204 are faulty, replace E203 and E204 and return to Step 5. 116 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 8. 9. 10. Check the 2.5V supply voltage at C217. C217: 2.5V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 11. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 9. Check the 2.5V supply voltage at pin 5 of U206. U206 pin 5: 2.5V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 10. If the signal is not correct, replace U206. Check E205 for continuity. E205: 1.2V If E205 is correct, check the PCB track for open circuits or shorts. Replace the PCB if necessary. If E205 is faulty, replace E205 and return to Step 8. 11. U205 detects a possible power failure and generates an output signal on pin 1. Check whether this signal is low. U205 pin 5: 3.3V U205 pin 1: 3.3V U205 pin 3: 3.3V If pin 5 and pin 3 measure 3.3V and pin 1 is low, replace U205. If pin 5 measures 3.3V, pin 3 is low and pin 1 is high, replace U205. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 117 U203 1 0 2 C U206 1 1 2 C 4 0 2 E 2 1 2 C E203 C217 4 1 2 C 5 0 2 E 5 0 2 U Junction of C210 and E202 Figure 5.2 PCB layout of the power supply circuitry 6 0 2 R 5 0 2 R 1 U 3 L201 8 R208 2 0 2 E 0 1 2 C 2 7 0 1 E Q201 R230 1 3 2 R D1 top side 4 K 1 0 2 D A 1 0 1 F 118 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 5.2 LCD Display Faulty The LCD module is connected to the control head board via the LCD connector. The LCD module display is controlled by a serial data link to the FPGA. A faulty LCD display can be caused by the following:

a loose or dirty LCD loom connection, a faulty LCD, or a fault on the control head board This section only deals with the display of the LCD. For faults of the LCD backlighting, refer to LCD Backlighting Faulty on page 122. Refer to Figure 5.4 on page 121 for the PCB layout. Figure 5.3 Circuit diagram of the LCD circuitry 3V3 E102 R133 C103 C100 C132 C106 2 3 4 L102 U102 8 7 6 5 1 R101 E122 C107 E104 C111 3V3 C108 C124 From Power Supply LCD_RESETN 3V3 R100 U101 3 4 LCD_BACKLIGHT_CTRL LCD_HEATER_CTRL FPGA LCD_RESETN LCD_D/C LCD_SCLK LCD_DAT LCD_CEN R140 R142 R144 R141 R143 U601 LCD _TEMP_SENSE 2 3V3 C126 2 Q100 E108 C125 LCD Connector 7 2 1 C 8 2 1 C 9 2 1 C 0 3 1 C 1 3 1 C LED_W+

LED_W-

R120 R121 E112 HEATER C102 R124 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 J102 C122 22 21 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 119 If some of the LCD pixels are faulty (usually complete rows or lines), send CCTM command 1006 1 to activate all LCD pixels. If some of the LCD pixels are faulty, replace the LCD. If the LCD display is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect the LCD loom, visually inspect and clean the contacts, and reconnect the LCD loom. Visually inspect connector J102 for open or shorted contacts. Check the 3.3V supply voltage at pin 2 of the LCD connector J102. J102 pin 2: 3.3V If the signal is not correct, refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 115. For a quick check of the LCD without having to disassemble the control head, connect a good LCD to the control head, or disconnect the LCD loom and connect it to a good control head. Replace the LCD. Carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft polarizer material on the top side of the LCD. Use an oscilloscope to check the signals of pins 3, 4, 5, 7 and 8 of connector J102. J102 pins 3, 4, 5, 7, 8:

If any of the signals are missing or distorted, check the signals on the FPGA side of the 100 resistors R140 to R144. If necessary, replace the corresponding 100 resistor(s) R140 to R144. The signals should be switching 0 to 3.3V in bursts of 125s at approximately 1s intervals. 120 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 5.4 PCB layout of the LCD circuitry U601 2 0 1 E 3 3 1 R L102 6 0 1 C 2 0 1 U E122 R101 4 0 1 E R142 R143 R140 top side bottom side 4 4 1 R 1 4 1 R 0 0 1 Q E112 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 121 5.3 LCD Backlighting Faulty The backlighting incorporated in the LCD module is controlled by a data line from the FPGA, which enables backlighting driver U102. The LCD backlighting has four brightness settings: off=GND, on=3.3V, and two intermediate settings which are implemented by pulse-width modulation. For a circuit diagram and PCB layout, refer to Figure 5.3 on page 119 and Figure 5.4 on page 121. If the LCD backlighting is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Make sure that LCD backlighting has been enabled in the programming application. Connect a good LCD module to verify this if necessary. Check the 3.3V supply voltage at pin 2 of U102 or C106. U102 pin 2/C106: 3.3V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3. If the signal is not correct, check R133 and E102 for continuity. Otherwise refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 115. Send CCTM command 1004 3 to switch on LCD backlighting. Check the signal at pin 3 of U102. U102 pin 3: high (with backlighting switched on) If the signal is correct, continue with Step 5. If the signal is not correct, visually inspect pin 3 for open contact. Check the signals at U101. U101 pin 5: 3.3V U101 pin 4: high U101 pin 3: low If the signals are correct, continue with Step 6. If the signals are not correct, replace U101. If the signals are still not correct, the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. Check the signal at pin 7 of U102. U102 pin 7: 14V (with backlighting switched on) If the signal is correct, continue with Step 7. If the signal is not correct, check the continuity of L102. If L102 is OK, replace U102 (or replace the PCB). 122 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7. 8. Check the signal at pin 5 of U102. U102 pin 5: 0.2V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 8. If the signal is not correct, check that the resistance of R101 is 18. Check the continuity of E122 and E104. Visually inspect whether the contacts of pins 9 and 10 of connector J102 are open or shorted. Check the signal at pins 9 and 10 of connector J102. J102 pins 9 and 10: 14V (with backlighting switched on) If the signal is correct, replace the LCD. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 123 5.4 LCD Heating Faulty The heating incorporated in the LCD module is controlled by a data line from the FPGA, which switches a transistor on MOSFET Q100. A temperature signal from the LCD module is converted to a digital signal by an analog/digital converter (U601) and processed by the FPGA. The temperature sensor signal is independent from the heating and is also used to control the LCD contrast. For a circuit diagram and PCB layout, refer to Figure 5.3 on page 119 and Figure 5.4 on page 121. If the LCD heating is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Check the temperature sensor signal at pin 20 of J102. J102 pin 20: 1.52V at 30C, 1.58V at 25C, 1.64V at 20C, 1.69V at 15C If the signal is below 0.7V (low) or above 2.5V, (high), the LCD temperature sensor is faulty. Send CCTM command 1007 to read the temperature sensor value. If the value does not correspond to the ambient temperature, U601 is faulty. Check the 3.3V supply voltage at the source of Q100. Q100 source: 3.3V If the signal is not correct, refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 115. Send CCTM command 1008 1 to switch on the LCD heating. Check the signal at the gate of Q100. Q100 gate: GND (with heating switched on) If the signal is not correct, visually inspect pin 4 for open contact. Otherwise the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. Check the signal at the drain of Q100. Q100 drain: 3.3V (with heating switched on) If the signal is missing, replace Q100. Visually inspect pins 13 to 18 of connector J102 for open or shorted contacts. Check the signal at pins 13, 15 and 17 of connector J102. J102 pins 13, 15 and 17: 3.3V (with heating switched on) If the signal is not correct, check the continuity of E112. Otherwise replace the LCD. 124 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 5.5 LEDs Faulty Function Key LEDs, Status LEDs or Backlighting The function key LEDs (F1 and F4), the red, green and orange status LEDs, and the backlighting LEDs are each controlled by an FPGA signal and a transistor current sink (Q620 to Q631). The brightness level is set by PWM of the FPGA control signals, resulting in four intensity levels (off, low, medium and high). For a PCB layout, refer to Figure 5.6 on page 128. Figure 5.5 Circuit diagram of the function key LEDs and status LEDs TP601 R607 LED_ENABLE_N R603 3V3 Q602 R611 R658 C609 V_PROG Q602 1 3 U610 4 R659 LED_VREF C613 13V8_FILT_LED R613 3V3 FPGA C614 C604 R605 R601 R616 R600 R631 F1 Key D613 F4 Key D614 Red D615 Green D616 Orange D617 Q620 Q621 Q623 Q625 Q626 C600 R612 R636 Q620 R609 R637 Q621 R617 R638 Q623 R619 R664 R665 Q625 R630 R604 Q626 TP602 LED_FUNC_1 LED_FUNC_4 LED_IND_TX LED_IND_RX LED_IND_BUSY 4 1 6 R TP603 5 1 6 R TP604 8 1 6 R TP605 9 2 6 R 1 4 6 R TP606 All LEDs Faulty If none of the function key LEDs, status LEDs or backlighting LEDs work:

1. Send CCTM command 1003 3 to set the backlighting intensity to high. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 125 Status LED or Function LED Faulty 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the signal at TP601 (LED_ENABLE_N) with an oscilloscope. TP601: low (with backlighting switched on high) If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3. If the signal is not correct, the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. Check the signal at V_PROG (pin 1 of U610). V_PROG: 0.95V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 4. If the signal is not correct, check R611, R658, Q602 (pnp), Q602

(npn) and R613. Replace if necessary. Continue with Step 4. Check that the voltage at pin 4 of U610 (LED_VREF) is the same as the voltage at V_PROG. U610 pin 4=V_PROG If the signal is correct, continue with Step 5. If the signal is not correct, replace U610. Check that the voltage at the junction of R659 and C613 (LED_VREF) is the same as the voltage at pin 4 of U610. LED_VREF=U610 pin 4 If the signal is correct, but one or two LEDs still do not work, refer to Status LED or Function LED Faulty below. If the signal is not correct, check R659 and replace if necessary. If one of the function key LEDs or status LEDs is faulty:

1. 2. 3. Send CCTM command 1001 x 1 (where x is the LED number: 0=F1, 1=F4, 2=orange, 3=green, 4=red) to activate the relevant LED. Send CCTM command 1002 3 to set the LED intensity to high. Check that the corresponding control signal from the FPGA is active. F1: LED_FUNC_1 high F4: LED_FUNC_4 high Tx: LED_IND_TX high Rx: LED_IND_RX high Busy: LED_IND_BUSY high If the signal is correct, continue with Step 4. If the signal is not correct, the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. TP602 TP603 TP604 TP605 TP606 4. Check the resistors R605, R601, R616, R600 and R631 in the paths of the LEDs. 126 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 LED Intensity Faulty 5. Check the LED voltages. For the non-operating voltage, use a DMM diode test. For the operating voltage, measure the forward voltage. D613 (F1 LED):

D614 (F4 LED):

D615 (red status LED):

D616 (green status LED):

D617 (orange status LED):

If the voltage is incorrect, replace the LED. Diode Test 3V 3V 1.4V 1.4V 1.4V Operating 2.8V 2.8V 1.8V 1.9V 1.8V 6. Replace the corresponding transistor pair. If the intensity of any of the LEDs is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Send CCTM command 1001 x 1 (where x is the LED number: 0=F1, 1=F4, 2=orange, 3=green, 4=red) to activate the LED under test. Monitor the signal on TP602 (LED_FUNC_1) with an oscilloscope. Use CCTM command 1002 to step through the LED intensity levels from low to high. LED Intensity off low medium high If the signal is correct, continue with Step 4. If the signals are incorrect or missing, the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. Duty Cycle 0%

10% (4s) 50% (21s) 100%

CCTM 1002 0 1002 1 1002 2 1002 3 Check the base resistors and replace if necessary. F1 LED: R612/R614 F4 LED: R609/R615 red status LED: R617/R618 green status LED: R619/R629 orange status LED: R630/R641 Use CCTM command 1002 3 to set the LED intensity to high and check that the lower transistor of the pair turns on fully (saturated). Replace the dual transistor if necessary. Check the collector resistors and replace if necessary. F1 LED: R636 F4 LED: R637 red status LED: R638 green status LED: R664/R665 orange status LED: R604 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 127 Figure 5.6 PCB layout of the function key LED and status LED circuitry 5 0 6 R R601 7 3 6 R 1 2 6 Q 5 1 6 R 9 0 6 R top side 3 1 6 R 2 0 6 Q 8 5 6 R R611 top side C613 9 5 6 R U610 7 1 6 R 8 1 6 R 3 2 6 Q 8 3 6 R 9 1 6 R 9 2 6 R 5 2 6 Q 4 6 6 R 5 6 6 R 0 3 6 R 1 4 6 R 6 2 6 Q 4 0 6 R R616 R600 R631 bottom side 4 1 6 D 3 1 6 D TP602 R612 4 1 6 R 6 3 6 R 0 2 6 Q bottom side TP601 7 1 6 D 6 1 6 D 5 1 6 D bottom side 128 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 5.7 Circuit diagram of the keypad backlighting circuitry 13V8_FILT_LED R632 C605 R633 C606 R634 C607 R635 C608 R639 D605 D606 D609 D612 D610 D611 Q627 Q628 Q629 D608 Q630 D607 On/Off Key D618 R640 Q631 R657 Q631 C615 U610 4 LED_VREF LED_KPAD_BL0 FPGA LED_KPAD_BL1 R643 R660 R642 Q627 R646 R654 Q628 R647 R655 Q629 R648 R656 Q630 R649 4 4 6 R 3 6 6 R 2 5 6 R 3 5 6 R R645 2 6 6 R One LED or One Group of Backlighting LEDs Faulty For a PCB layout, refer to Figure 5.8 on page 131. If one LED or one group of backlighting LEDs is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. Send CCTM command 1003 x (where x is the intensity: 0=off, 1=low, 2=medium, 3=high) to switch on keypad backlighting. Check the 13V8_FILT_LED supply voltage is present across C611. If it is not present, check the continuity of L601 and R650. Replace if necessary. Check the control signals from the FPGA. LED_KPAD_BL0: active (high) LED_KPAD_BL1: active (high) If the signals are correct, check the continuity of R643 and R660. If the signals are incorrect or missing, the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. R643 R660 From top to bottom for each LED string, check the resistor, the LEDs, and the transistor for continuity. 10 R632 D605 2.8V (on) D606 1.8V (on) Q627 R642 R633 D609 D612 Q628 R654 R635 D607 D608 Q630 R656 R639 D618 R640 Q631 R657 R634 D610 D611 Q629 R655 10 2.8V (on) 120 82 82 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 129 LED Intensity Faulty If the backlighting intensity is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Send CCTM command 1003 x (where x is the intensity: 0=off, 1=low, 2=medium, 3=high) to switch on keypad backlighting. Monitor the signals on LED_KPAD_BL0 (R643) and LED_KPAD_BL1 (R660) with an oscilloscope. Use CCTM command 1003 to step through the LED intensity levels from low to high. LED Intensity off low medium high If the signal is correct, continue with Step 4. If the signals are incorrect or missing, the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. Duty Cycle 0%

10% (4s) 50% (21s) 100%

CCTM 1003 0 1003 1 1003 2 1003 3 Check the base resistors and replace if necessary. R645/R662 R646/R644 R647/R663 R648/R652 R649/R653 Use CCTM command 1003 3 to set the LED intensity to high and check that the lower transistor of the pair turns on fully (saturated). Replace the dual transistor if necessary. Check the collector resistors and replace if necessary. R642 R654 R655 R656 R657 130 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 5.8 PCB layout of the keypad backlighting circuitry 2 1 6 D 1 1 6 D bottom side R652 R648 0 6 6 R 6 5 6 R 2 3 6 R top side R645 2 4 6 R 2 6 6 R 6 0 6 D 8 1 6 D R640 9 4 6 R 7 5 6 R 3 5 6 R 9 0 6 D 7 0 6 D 5 0 6 D R646 4 4 6 R 4 5 6 R 8 0 6 D 0 1 6 D R650 L601 5 5 6 R 7 4 6 R 3 6 6 R 5 3 6 R R634 R643 3 3 6 R R639 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 131 5.6 On/Off Key Faulty When battery power (13.8V) is applied to the radio, a press of the ON/OFF key will create an active low signal (CH_ON_OFF) back to the radio body to initiate the power-on or power-off sequence. This key-press will also be detected by the FPGA of the control head through Q611 as an active high signal (POWER_ON_OFF_3V3). Figure 5.9 Circuit diagram of the ON/OFF key Control-Head Connector 13V8 D621 R606 (DNI) CH_ON_OFF J103 9 R626 R610 R627 3V3 R628 POWER_ON_OFF_3V3 FPGA Q611 Power On/Off 1 2 S610 If the ON/OFF key is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pads S610 on the control head board for the ON/OFF key. Try a known good ON/OFF key. Check the PWR_ON/OFF signal level from the radio at pin 9 of the control head connector J103. J103 pin 9: 13V If the signal is approximately 13V, continue with Step 6. If near or at ground, continue with Step 4. Visually inspect pin 9 of connector J103 for open or shorted contacts. Verify the source of the signal to pin 9 of connector J103 from the radio (without the control head connector). Visually inspect R610 and R627 for short-circuit to adjacent components. Replace if necessary. Return to Step 3. Visually inspect R610 for shorted or open circuits. Repair if necessary. Retest switch. Verify continuity between R610 and switch S610, and continuity between switch S610 and ground. If the continuity cannot be restored, replace the control head board. 132 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 5.10 PCB layout of the power on/off key circuitry 9 6 0 6 R 1 2 6 D R628 1 1 6 Q 0 1 6 R R627 R626 top side 0 1 6 S bottom side TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 133 5.7 Function, Scroll, or Selection Keys Faulty The eight keys of the main keypad (function, scroll, and selection keys) are connected to the FPGA by an array of three columns and three rows. During idle operation, the KEY_ROW signals are driven low by the FPGA and the KEY_COL signals (pulled high by an external resistor) are monitored for activity by the FPGA. A key-press will generate a high-to-low transition on the associated column KEY_COL signal. This, in turn, will initiate a sequence of high output levels on the KEY_ROW signals to identify which key was pressed. Figure 5.11 Circuit diagram of the function, scroll, and selection keys 3V3 3V3 3V3 3V3 3V3 3V3 D604 D620 D602 R620 R621 R622 KEY_COL1 KEY_COL2 KEY_COL3 D604 D620 D602 KEY_ROW1 R623 A1 1 0 6 S 2 B1 1 0 6 S 2 A1 2 0 6 S 2 B1 2 0 6 S 2 A1 3 0 6 S 2 B1 3 0 6 S 2 F4 Key Right Selection Key F3 Key FPGA KEY_ROW2 R624 A1 4 0 6 S 2 B1 4 0 6 S 2 A1 5 0 6 S 2 B1 5 0 6 S 2 A1 6 0 6 S 2 B1 6 0 6 S 2 Scroll-Up Key Scroll-Down Key Left Selection Key KEY_ROW3 R625 A1 7 0 6 S 2 B1 7 0 6 S 2 A1 8 0 6 S 2 B1 8 0 6 S 2 F2 Key F1 Key The signal at the column side of the switch should be 3.3V. The row side of the switch should be GND. A successful press will cause transition on associated KEY_COL signal to low. CCTM command 1009 1 can be used to monitor keypad press and release events (refer to Table 2.10 on page 67). One Key Faulty If an individual key is faulty:

1. 2. Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pad of the PCB switch contacts. Visually inspect both PCB switch contacts (A and B) of a key for short-circuits. Repair if necessary. 134 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Several Keys Faulty The keys can be grouped into columns and rows of three or two keys, as illustrated in Figure 5.11. If one column of keys is faulty:

1. Visually inspect the associated resistor and diodes for open or shorted circuits. F2 key F4 key scroll-up key F1 key right selection key scroll-down key F3 key left selection key R621 D620 R620 D602 R622 D604 If one row of keys is faulty:

2. Visually inspect the associated resistor for open or shorted circuits. F3 key R625 F4 key right selection key scroll-down key left selection key R624 F1 key F2 key R623 scroll-up key Figure 5.12 PCB layout of the function, scroll, and selection key circuitry 4 2 6 R D602 0 2 6 R D604 2 2 6 R D620 1 2 6 R 3 2 6 R 5 2 6 R top side bottom side TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 135 5.8 Speaker Faulty The two speaker lines (SPK+ and SPK) are connected to the speaker connector (J104) which is connected to the control head connector (J103) through two ferrite beads (E105 and E106). Figure 5.13 Circuit diagram of the speaker circuitry Control-Head Connector J103 SPKR+

18 SPKR 17 E105 C116 DNI E106 C117 DNI Speaker Connector J104 1 2 If the speaker functions only intermittently or the audio level is low:

1. 2. 3. 4. Check the continuity from the speaker connector J104 to pin 18

(SPK+) and pin 17 (SPK) of the control head connector J103. Inspect E105 and E106. Replace the speaker. If there is still a fault, go to Volume Control Faulty on page 137. Figure 5.14 PCB layout of the speaker circuitry 8 1 7 1 E106 E105 2 1 top side 136 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 5.9 Volume Control Faulty The voltage level of the volume control potentiometer is converted to a digital signal by an analog/digital converter, processed by the FPGA and transmitted to the main board. This section only describes faults to the volume control caused by the control head, which has been established during the initial servicing tasks by means of elimination test. Figure 5.15 Circuit diagram of the volume control circuitry 3V3 R105 RV101 3V3 8 VCC VOL_WIP_DC 3 CH1 U601 DO 6 ADC_DO FPGA 4 If the volume control works only intermittently, works only at full volume, or does not work at all:

1. 2. 3. Isolate the fault to the control head by using a known good radio body. Check that the voltage between pins CW and WIP of the volume-

control potentiometer RV1 varies linearly between about 0V and 3.3V. RV1: 0 to 3.3V If the voltage is not correct, replace the potentiometer RV1. Send CCTM command 1010 to read the volume potentiometer. No volume: reading 0 (1V) Full volume: reading 255 (3.3V) If the signal is not correct, remove can E100 and replace the analog/digital converter U601. If the signal is correct, go to Speaker Faulty on page 136. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 137 Figure 5.16 PCB layout of the volume control circuitry E100 U601 W C C I P W W C top side bottom side 138 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 5.10 PTT Faulty The PTT signal from the microphone connector is connected to the FPGA via a resistor (R129) and relayed to the radio as a digital command. Figure 5.17 Circuit diagram of the PTT circuitry 3V3 FP_PTT_DIG D421 R430 3V3 R431 D421 3V3 Q410 FPGA CH_HOOK R439 Microphone Connector PTT 4 J106 R450 FP_PTT R129 C120 VR100 V ESD This section only describes faults to the PTT caused by the control head, which has been established during the initial servicing tasks by means of elimination test. If the PTT is faulty:

1. With no PTT switch and hookswitch operated, check whether pin 4 of J106 is 3V. J106 pin 4: 3V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 2. If the signal is incorrect, inspect R129 and VR100 for open or shorted contacts. Repair if necessary. Repeat Step 1. 2. With the PTT switch operated, check whether the same 3V are pulled to ground on the other side of R129. If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3. R129: GND If the signal is incorrect, inspect the PTT switch in the microphone and J106. Repair if necessary. 3. Verify continuity between pin 4 of J106, the sensing circuitry, and the FPGA. Check the continuity of R129. Check R431 pullup resistor. Check the continuity of R430. Check D421 for short-

circuits. Replace if necessary. Repair the PCB track if possible. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head 139 If the hookswitch is faulty:

1. 2. Carry out the tests for a faulty PTT, as described above. Check Q410, R450 and R439. Figure 5.18 PCB layout of PTT circuitry R129 E100 1 2 4 D R430 1 3 4 R 9 3 4 R 0 1 4 Q 0 5 4 R top side bottom side VR100 4 140 Fault Finding of the Graphical Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 6 Overview Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head This section describes the fault finding of the 2- or 3-digit control head for the following faults:

display faulty but not LEDs some LEDs faulty all LEDs faulty display and all LEDs faulty some but not all keys faulty all keys faulty speaker faulty volume control faulty The faults can be detected by visual inspection (refer to Checking the User Interface on page 101). General The following applies for all fault finding procedures:

Notice Do not disconnect or connect the control head while power is supplied to the radio. If the radio does not switch on when power is supplied, the radio may be programmed to go into the status it was in when powered down. Connect a known good control head, power up the radio, and change the relevant setting in the programming application. Remember to program the original setting before returning the radio to the customer. For disassembly and re-assembly instructions, refer to Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head on page 86. If the repair fails or no fault could be found, replace the control-head board. After completing the repair, carry out the tasks in Initial Tasks on page 96. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head 141 Figure 6.1 Top side of the 2- or 3-digit control-head board D C L r o f s d a p D C L r o f s d a p s y e k r o f s d a p 142 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 6.2 Bottom side of the 2- or 3-digit control-head board 1 V R f o s n p i TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head 143 6.1 Display Faulty but not LEDs Elastomeric Strips Faulty If all the LEDs function correctly but the display functions only partially or not at all, first check the elastomeric strips:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disconnect the control-head loom from the control head. Remove the control-head board. Remove the elastomeric strips and check the conductors in the strips for continuity. Replace the strips if they are faulty. Ensure that the conductors along the edges of the strips are clean. Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the edges. Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pads for the LCD on the control-head board. Insert the elastomeric strips in their slots in the space frame. Re-assemble the control-head board. Reconnect the control-head loom to the control head and test the user interface. If the fault has been removed, return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, replace the LCD as follows. LCD Faulty If the elastomeric strips are not the cause of the fault, replace the LCD:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the control-head loom. Remove the control-head board and disassemble the control head. Remove the LCD. Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the electrical contact points on the spare LCD. Carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft polariser material on both sides of the LCD. Re-assemble the control head. Reconnect the control-head loom and test the user interface. If the fault has been removed, return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, go to the following task. Control-Head Board Faulty If neither the elastomeric strips nor the LCD are faulty, check the relevant components on the control-head board:

1. Use an oscilloscope to display the signal at pin 5 of IC5

(see Figure 6.2). The signal should be a square wave with a frequency of about 60Hz and an amplitude that alternates between 0.0 and 3.3V. If the signal is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not, go to Step 2. 144 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 2. 3. 4. Replace IC2 (see Figure 6.2). Test the user interface. If the fault has been removed, return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, go to Step 3. Use the oscilloscope to display the signal at pin 12 of IC7 (see Figure 6.2). The signal should be a square wave with a frequency of about 120Hz and an amplitude that alternates between 0.0 and 3.3V. If the signal is correct, replace IC5 and go to Step 4. If it is not, replace IC7 and go to Step 4. Test the user interface. If the fault has been removed, return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, the repair failed; replace the control-head board. 6.2 Some LEDs Faulty If the display functions correctly but one or more (but not all) of the LEDs D1 to D18 are faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect the control-head loom. Remove the control-head board. Reconnect the loom to the board. Use a multimeter to measure the forward voltage across each faulty LED. See Figure 6.1. The voltage should be 2.00.4V DC. If it is, go to Step 3. If it is not, replace the LED and go to Step 4. If the forward voltage is correct, the LED is functional but the associated switching transistor is suspect. Replace the transistor corresponding to the LED in question. The switching transistors associated with the LEDs D1 to D18 are Q1 to Q4. See Figure 6.2. Continue with Step 4. Test the user interface. If the fault has been removed, re-assemble the control-head board, and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, replace the control-head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head 145 6.3 All LEDs Faulty If the display functions correctly but all the LEDs are faulty:

1. 2. 3. Disconnect the control-head loom. Replace IC3 which drives the switching transistors for the LEDs. See Figure 6.2. Reconnect the loom and test the user interface. If the fault has been removed, return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, replace the control-head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. 6.4 Display and All LEDs Faulty If the display and all LEDs are faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Use a multimeter to measure the 3.3 V DC supply voltage across C1

(see Figure 6.2). If it is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not, go to Step 2. Check for shorts to ground of the 3.3 V supply. Repair any fault and go to Step 8. Use the multimeter to check that the RST line at pin 6 of IC7 is high. The level should be 3.3 V. If it is, go to Step 5. If it is not, go to Step 4. Check for continuity in the LCD driver circuitry D22, C12 and R27

(see Figure 6.2). Repair any fault and go to Step 8. If there is no continuity fault, replace IC7 and go to Step 8. Use the multimeter to check that the OE line at pin 8 of IC5 is low. The level should be less than 0.6 V. If it is, replace IC7 and go to Step 8. If it is not, go to Step 6. Check that the voltage at pins 4, 10 and 14 of IC5 is 3.3 V DC. Also check that pin 7 of IC5 is at ground. If the voltages are correct, replace IC7 and go to Step 8. If they are not, go to Step 7. Check for continuity between IC5 and the control-head connector SK1. Also check for shorts to ground between IC5 and SK1. Repair any fault and go to Step 8. Confirm the removal of the fault. If the fault has been removed, return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, replace the control-

head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. 146 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 6.5 Some but not All Keys Faulty If one or more (but not all) of the keys are faulty, repair the control head as follows:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the control-head loom and remove the control-head board. Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pads on the control-head board for those keys that are faulty. Re-install the control-head board. Reconnect the control-head loom and test the keys. If the fault has been removed, return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, go to Step 5. Replace the keypad. Re-assemble the control head. Reconnect the control-head loom, test the keys to confirm the removal of the fault, and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. 6.6 All Keys Faulty If all the keys, with the exception of the ON/OFF key, are faulty:

1. 2. Disconnect the control-head loom. Replace IC4, which reads the status of the keys. See Figure 6.2. Reconnect the control-head loom and test the keys to confirm the removal of the fault. If the fault has been removed, return to Initial Tasks on page 96. If it has not, replace the control-head board and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head 147 6.7 Speaker Faulty If the speaker functions only intermittently or the audio level is low:

1. 2. 3. Replace the speaker. Check the continuity from the speaker connector SK2 to pin 17 (SPK) and pin 18 (SPK+) of the control-head connector SK1 (see Figure 6.2). If there is no fault, go to Step 3. If there is still a fault, go to Volume Control Faulty. Reconnect the control-head loom, test the speaker to confirm the removal of the fault, and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. 6.8 Volume Control Faulty If the volume control works only intermittently, works only at full volume, or does not work at all:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disconnect the control-head loom. Check that the resistance between pins 1 and 2 of the volume-control potentiometer RV1 varies linearly between about 0 and 10k. (see Figure 6.2). If it does, go to Step 3. If it does not, go to Step 6. Replace the speaker. Re-assemble the control head. Reconnect the control-head loom. Confirm the removal of the fault, and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. Remove the control-head board. Replace the potentiometer RV1. See Figure 6.1. Re-assemble the control-head board. Reconnect the control-head loom. Confirm the removal of the fault, and return to Initial Tasks on page 96. 148 Fault Finding of the 2- or 3-Digit Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7 Overview Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head This section describes the fault finding of the hand-held control head for the following faults:

power supply faulty (initial check) LCD display faulty LCD backlighting faulty status LEDs faulty keypad and LCD backlighting faulty ON/OFF key faulty PTT faulty keys faulty microphone faulty communications faulty. The faults can be detected by visual inspection (refer to Checking the User Interface on page 101) or using the CCTM commands in Table 2.11 on page 69. General The following applies for all fault finding procedures:

Notice Do not disconnect or connect the hand-held control head while power is supplied to the radio. To connect to ground, use a ground test point (e.g. TP117, TP118) or the screw bosses of the radio body. If the radio does not switch on when power is supplied, the radio may be programmed to go into the status it was in when powered down. Connect a known good hand-held control head, power up the radio, and change the relevant setting in the programming application. Remember to program the original setting before returning the radio to the customer. For disassembly and re-assembly instructions, refer to Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head on page 86. If the repair fails or no fault could be found, replace either the main board or the UI board in the hand-held control head. After completing the repair, carry out the tasks in Initial Tasks on page 96. Unless otherwise stated, all illustrations in this chapter refer to the main board. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 149 7.1 Power Supply Faulty The switched 13.8V supply from the radio body is converted to 8V by regulator U204 and to 3.3V by regulator U201. A 1.2V regulator (U205) and 2.5V regulator (U206) convert the 3.3V to the FPGA supply voltages. A power-supervision module (U203) verifies the output of the 3.3V voltage regulator and, in the case of a fault, creates a power reset signal which is processed by the FPGA. If the start-up of the hand-held control head fails, the radio body cuts the switched 13.8V supply shortly after power is supplied. Notice It is possible that a hand-held control head appears dead yet all the power supply levels are correct. Pay close attention to the status LEDs at startup (application of power to the unit). If they flash once and then the unit seems dead, suspect a communications error and proceed to Communications Faulty on page 176. 150 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 7.1 Circuit diagram of the power supply circuitry 13V8 1V2 3V3 8V0 2V5 TP103 IN IN IN IN 13V8 MR PWR_WDT DGND POWER_SUPPLY 1V2 3V3 8V0 2V5 PWR_RESET#

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 13V8_FILT 13V8_FILT 13V8 L201 E204 22UH 120 3A C215 4.7UF C203 4.7UF C201 4.7UF C216 4.7UF C217 4.7UF C218 100NF 50V FLASH_RESETN 1V5 3V3 MEMORY IN IN IN IN 3V3 1V5 DGND FPGA_CONFIG FPGA OUT PWR_WDT I I C R C U T O U T L N E I D202 BZX84 5.1V R201 10K R202 47K C202 100NF R243 10K R242 4.7K 2 4 3 8 VCC VCC SYNC SYNC OUT OUT COMP COMP U201 3.3V VREF VREF INH INH L5973AD FB FB HSLUG HSLUG HSLUG L202 15UH D203 30BQ060 1 6 5 Q244 BC847BS GND 7 C205 27NF R203 4.7K C204 220PF Q244 BC847BS E201 120 3A C206 220UF 3V3_RAW R204 5.6K

R205 3.3K U204 3V3 C253 10UF C255 1UF 1V2 C254 10UF C256 1UF 1V2_PLL C257 1UF 2V5 C258 1UF 1 3 C208 1UF 1 3 C245 1UF U205 REGULATOR OUT IN OUT IN LP3990 1.2V EN EN NC NC 5 4 1V2_RAW C209 10UF E202 120 3A GND 2 U206 OUT OUT IN TPS79325 EN NR NR 2.5V GND GND 2 E205 120 3A 5 4 2V5_RAW C249 10UF E206 120 3A C207 100NF R246 560K R245 22K R247 47K E203 120 3A C250 10UF 8V0 8V0 C213 100NF TP103 PWR_WDT 1K3^

IN MR R208 DNI 3V3 3 4 MR MR WDI WDI 1 5 VDD RST RST U203 TPS3823 GND GND 2 C210 100NF 3V3 R211 47K PWR_RESET#

1K5^

OUT 4 5 C211 100NF 50V REGULATOR OUT IN OUT IN 3008 0.6-44.5V SD SD GND GND 6 ADJ ADJ HSLUG 2 3 1 C248 DNI HSLUG TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 151 Figure 7.2 PCB layout of the power supply circuitry Junction of C253 and E201 U203 5 0 2 U 6 0 2 U U201 U204 7 top side 152 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Task 1 Check the 3.3V Supply For all faults, check that the supply voltages are correct:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Check the 3.3V supply voltage between E201 and C253. E201/C253: 3.3V If the signal is correct, continue with Task 2. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 2. Visually inspect the components E201, D203, L202, R204, and R205 for open or shorted contacts. Replace if necessary. If the signal is now correct, continue with Task 2. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 3. Check the 13.8V supply voltage between pin 7 of J101 and pin 8 of U201. J101 pin 7: 13.8V U201 pin 8: 13.8V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 4. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 7. Check the inhibit signal at pin 3 of U201. U201 pin 3: high: >2.2V, low: < 0.7V Normal operation: low If the signal is correct (low), continue with Step 5. If the signal is not correct (high), continue with Step 6. Replace U201. If the 13.8V is supplied directly through pin 7 of J101, change to the 13.8V supply from the radio body and return to Step 1. Check D202, C202, R201, R202, R242, R243 and Q244 for open or shorted contacts. Replace if necessary. If the 13.8V is supplied directly through pin 7 of J101, change to the 13.8V supply from the radio body and return to Step 1. Check F101 and E111 for continuity. Replace if necessary. If the signal is correct (13.8V), return to Step 1. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 8. Connect a 13.8V supply directly to pin 7 of J101. Check the 3.3V supply between E201 and C253. E201/C253: 3.3V If the signal is correct, continue with Task 2. If the signal is not correct, return to Step 4. Notice A fault in the hand-held control head can cause the radio body to reduce the switched 13.8V supply shortly after power is supplied. In this case, the hand-held control head must be supplied directly through pin 7 of J101. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 153 Task 2 Check the 1.2V Supply Task 3 Check the 2.5V Supply 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the 1.2V supply voltage at C256 (1V2) and C257 (1V2_PLL). 1V2/1V2_PLL: 1.2V If the signal is correct, continue with Task 3. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 2. Check E202 and E205 for continuity. Replace if necessary. If the signal is correct (1.2V), continue with Task 3. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 3. Check the 1.2V supply voltage at pin 5 of U205. U205 pin 5: 1.2V If the signal is correct, continue with Task 3. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 4. Replace U205. If the 13.8V is supplied directly through pin 7 of J101, change to the 13.8V supply from the radio body and return to Task 1. Check the 2.5V supply voltage at C258 (2V5). 2V5: 2.5V If the signal is correct, continue with Task 4. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 2. Check E206 for continuity. Replace if necessary. If the signal is correct (2.5V), continue with Task 4. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 3. Check the 2.5V supply voltage at pin 5 of U206. U206 pin 5: 2.5V If the signal is correct, continue with Task 4. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 4. Replace U206. If the 13.8V is supplied directly through pin 7 of J101, change to the 13.8V supply from the radio body and return to Task 1. 154 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Task 4 Check the 8V Supply Task 5 Check the Reset Line 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Check the 8V supply voltage at C213 (8V0). 8V0: 8V If the signal is correct, the power supplies are OK. Continue with Task 5. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 2. Visually inspect the components E203, R245, R246, and R247 for open or shorted contacts. Replace if necessary. If the signal is now correct, the power supplies are OK. Continue with Task 5. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 3. Check the 8V supply voltage at pins 2 and 3 of U204. U204 pin 2, pin 3: 8V If the signal is correct, the power supplies are OK. Continue with Task 5. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 4. Replace U204. If the 13.8V is supplied directly through pin 7 of J101, change to the 13.8V supply from the radio body and return to Task 1. If the 13.8V is supplied directly through pin 7 of J101, change to the 13.8V supply from the radio body. 2. With the 3.3V power supply correct and present, check the reset line at pin 1 of U203. U203 pin 1: high: >2.2V, low: < 0.7V Normal operation: low If the signal is correct (low), the reset line is OK. If the signal is not correct (high), continue with Step 3. 3. Replace U203 and return to Task 1. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 155 7.2 LCD Display Faulty The LCD module is connected to the hand-held control head UI board by the LCD loom. This loom connects to J2 on the bottom side of the UI board. Another loom then runs between J1 on the bottom side of the UI board to J104 on the bottom side of the main board. The LCD module display is controlled by a serial data link to the FPGA. Figure 7.3 Connections between the hand-held control head boards and the LCD A faulty LCD display can be caused by the following:

a faulty LCD a loose or dirty LCD loom connection a faulty connection between the UI and main board a fault on the main board. For a quick check of the LCD, connect a good LCD to the UI board. If the fault disappears, replace the LCD. Carefully remove the protective plastic film from the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft polarizer material on the top side of the LCD. Notice This section deals only with the display of the LCD. For faults of the LCD backlighting, refer to LCD Backlighting Faulty on page 159. 156 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 7.4 Circuit diagram of the LCD control circuitry LCD_BACKLIGHT_CTRL KP_BACKLIGHT_CTRL KP_BACKLIGHT_CTRL OUT 3V3 3V3 R166 10K R164 10K U109 74LVC2G04 1 6 E107 1800 3 4 U109 74LVC2G04 C169 470PF C171 470PF E113 1800 FPGA LCD_RESETN LCD_RESETN LCD_D/C LCD_D/C LCD_SCLK LCD_SCLK LCD_DAT LCD_DAT LCD_CEN LCD_CEN E114 1800 FL168 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 C165 470PF 50MHZ GND1 GND2 3V3 C123 1UF E101 120 3A C112 1UF LCD_RESETN LCD_D/C LCD_SCLK LCD_DAT LCD_CEN 13V8_FILT C124 100NF 50V E108 120 3A C113 100NF 50V 28 27 J104 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 8 3 If the LCD display is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If some of the LCD pixels are faulty (usually complete rows or lines), send CCTM command 1006 1 to activate all LCD pixels. If some of the LCD pixels are faulty, replace the LCD. Ensure the board-to-board loom is secure (snapped in to place). Also inspect for obvious connector damage or shorted and lifted connector-to-board contacts in J104 on the main board and J1 on the UI board. Disconnect the LCD loom between the LCD assembly and the UI board. Visually inspect and clean the contacts, and reconnect the LCD loom. Visually inspect connector J2 on the UI board for open or shorted contacts. Disconnect the loom between the UI board and the main board. Visually inspect and clean the contacts, and reconnect the loom. Visually inspect connector J1 on the UI board and J104 on the main board for open or shorted contacts. Check the 3.3V supply voltage at pin 25 of J104 on the main board through to the LCD connector pin 4 of J2 on the UI board. J104 (main) pin 25: 3.3V J1 (UI) pin 2: 3.3V J2 (UI) pin 4: 3.3V If the signal on J104 pin 25 is not correct, refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 150. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 157 6. Use an oscilloscope to check the signals of pins 20 to 24 of connector J104 on the main board. J104 pins 20 to 24 The signals should be switching 0 to 3.3V in bursts of 0.125ms at approximately 1s intervals. If any of the signals are missing or distorted, remove can E100 and check for continuity between the FPGA and the LCD connector. If necessary, replace the 22 resistor array R305, 22 resistor R308, LC filter array FL168, or bead E114. Figure 7.5 PCB layout of the LCD control circuitry R308 R305 U109 E114 8 6 1 L F E107 E113 top side 158 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7.3 LCD Backlighting Faulty The backlighting incorporated in the LCD module is controlled by a data line from the FPGA, which enables backlighting driver U1. The LCD backlighting has four brightness settings: off=GND, on=3.3V, and two intermediate settings which are implemented by pulse-width modulation. Figure 7.6 Circuit diagram of the LCD backlighting circuitry - UI board 3V3 E1 120 3A R0 0 C8 10UF C7 100NF C9 10UF C10 100NF J1 LCD_BACKLIGHT 9 LCD_BACKLIGHT R4 0 I D R A O B N A M M O R F L1 22UH 8 7 6 5 2 3 4 LX U1 97634 VIN VOUT LED DRIVER PWM/EN FBSW NC FB GND 1 HSLUG R8 27 C12 470NF 50V E3 120 3A E2 120 3A C13 100NF C11 470PF R6 R7 0 0 LED_W+

LED_W-

20 19 18 17 16 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 2 1 22 21 VSS LED_A+

LED_A-

LED_W+

LED_W-

VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS J2 SK20FL E L U D O M D C L O T If the LCD backlighting is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. Make sure that LCD backlighting has been enabled in the programming application. Connect a good LCD module to verify this if necessary. Check the 3.3V supply voltage at pin 2 of U1 or C10. U1 pin 2/C10: 3.3V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3. If the signal is not correct, check R0 and E1 for continuity. Otherwise refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 150. Send CCTM command 1004 3 to switch on LCD backlighting. Check the signal at pin 3 of U1. U1 pin 3: high (with backlighting switched on) If the signal is correct, continue with Step 6. If the signal is not correct, visually inspect pin 3 for open contact. Continue with Step 5. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 159 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Check R4 for open circuit. Trace LCD_BACKLIGHT through pin 9 of J1 to pin 18 of J104 on the main board. Replace the connectors or loom if necessary. If the backlighting is still faulty, continue with Step 6. Check the continuity of E107. Check the signal at pins 1 and 6 of U109 (refer to Figure 7.4 and Figure 7.5). U109 pin 1: low U109 pin 6: high Replace U109 if necessary. If the signals are correct, continue with Step 7. If the signals are still not correct, the FPGA is faulty and the control head main board must be replaced. Check the signal at pin 7 of U1. U1 pin 7: 8.4V (with backlighting switched on) If the signal is correct, continue with Step 8. If the signal is not correct, check the continuity of L1. If L1 is OK, replace U1 (or replace the PCB). Check the signal at pin 5 of U1. U1 pin 5: 0.2V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 9. If the signal is not correct, check that the resistance of R8 is 27. Check the continuity of E2 and E3. Visually inspect whether the contacts of pins 17 and 16 of connector J2 are open or shorted. Check the signal at pins 17 and 16 of connector J2. J2 pins 17 and 16: 8.4V (with backlighting switched on) If the signal is correct, replace the LCD. Figure 7.7 PCB layout of the LCD backlighting circuitry - UI board L1 U1 R8 3 E E2 R0 1 E 0 1 8 C 4 R bottom side 160 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7.4 Status LEDs Faulty The red, green and amber (orange) status LEDs are each controlled by an FPGA signal and individual high-side MOSFETs. The LEDs have four brightness settings: off=GND, on=3.3V, and two intermediate settings which are implemented by pulse-width modula-

tion. Figure 7.8 Circuit diagram of the status LEDs 3V3 C680 1UF E601 120 3A R686 0 C687 1UF 3V3 R677 10K R678 10K R679 10K BUSY_LED IN RX_LED IN TX_LED IN R681 1K R682 1K R683 1K C685 120PF C689 120PF BSH205 Q688 R616 560 BSH205 Q691 R665 120 R666 120 C693 150PF BSH205 Q696 R630 1K R631 560 RED DS601 YELLOW-GREEN DS603 ORANGE DS602 If one of the status LEDs is faulty:

1. 2. 3. 4. Check the 3.3V supply voltage at C687. C687: 3.3V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 2. If the signal is not correct, check E601 and R686 for continuity. Otherwise refer to Power Supply Faulty on page 150. Send CCTM command 1001 x 1 (where x is the LED number:

2=orange, 3=green, 4=red) to activate the relevant LED. Send CCTM command 1002 3 to set the LED intensity to high. Check that the corresponding control signal from the FPGA is active

(low). Tx: TX_LED low Rx: RX_LED low Busy: BUSY_LED low If the signal is correct, continue with Step 5. If the signal is not correct, the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. R683 R682 R681 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 161 5. 6. Check the resistors R616, R665, R666, R630 and R631 in the paths of the LEDs. Check the LED voltages. For the non-operating voltage, use a DMM diode test. For the operating voltage, measure the forward voltage. DS601 (red status LED):

DS603 (green status LED):

DS602 (orange status LED):

If the voltage is incorrect, replace the LED. Diode Test 1.4V 1.4V 1.4V Operating 1.8V 1.9V 1.8V Figure 7.9 PCB layout of the status LED circuitry top side bottom side R682 6 6 6 R 5 6 6 R R631 R630 1 8 6 R 6 1 6 R 3 8 6 R 7 8 6 C R686 1 0 6 E red LED green LED orange LED 1 0 6 S D DS603 2 0 6 S D 162 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7.5 Keypad Backlighting Faulty The backlighting LEDs are controlled by an FPGA signal and a transistor current sink (Q4 to Q8). The brightness level is set by PWM of the FPGA control signals, resulting in four intensity levels (off, low, medium and high). For PCB layouts, refer to Figure 7.11 on page 165 and Figure 7.12 on page 166. Figure 7.10 Circuit diagram of the keypad backlighting - UI board 13V8_FILT 13V8_FILT_LED L2 22UH R34 0 C16 4.7UF C17 4.7UF C18 4.7UF R16 10 C19 4.7UF R18 10 C20 4.7UF R22 10 C21 4.7UF R26*

10 C22 4.7UF R30 10 WHITE DS1 WHITE DS2 WHITE DS3 WHITE DS4 WHITE DS5 WHITE DS6 WHITE DS7*

WHITE DS8*

WHITE DS9 WHITE DS10 LED_VREF Q4 BC847BS R17 100 Q5 BC847BS R19 100 Q6 BC847BS R23 100 Q7*

BC847BS R27*

100 Q8 BC847BS R31 100 C23 470PF R14 10K Q4 BC847BS R20 10K Q5 BC847BS R24 10K Q6 BC847BS R28*

10K Q7*

BC847BS R32 10K Q8 BC847BS R15 4.7K R21 4.7K R25 4.7K R29*

4.7K R33 4.7K

*not placed 3V3 R9 0 R10 10K V_PROG Q3 BC847BS 1

3

U2 LMV321 4 R13 10 C24 470PF R11 1K J1 KP_BACKLIGHT 10 KP_BACKLIGHT I D R A O B N A M M O R F C15 470PF R12 0 All LEDs Faulty If none of the backlighting LEDs work:

1. 2. Check the 13V8_FILT_LED supply voltage is present across C18. If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3. If it is not correct, check the continuity of L2 and R34. Replace if necessary. Replace the connectors or loom to the main board if nec-

essary. Check the signal at V_PROG (pin 1 of U2). V_PROG: 0.8V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3. If the signal is not correct, check R9, R10, Q3. Replace if necessary. Continue with Step 3. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 163 One Group of Backlighting LEDs Faulty 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Check that the voltage at pin 4 of U2 (LED_VREF) is the same as the voltage at V_PROG. U2 pin 4=V_PROG If the signal is correct, continue with Step 4. If the signal is not correct, replace U2. Check that the voltage at the junction of R13 and C15 (LED_VREF) is the same as the voltage at pin 4 of U2. LED_VREF=U2 pin 4 If the signal is correct, continue with Step 5. If the signal is not correct, replace R13 or check C15 and C23 for shorts to ground. Send CCTM command 1003 3 to set the backlighting intensity to high. Check the signal at R12 (KP_BACKLIGHT) with an oscilloscope. R12: low (with backlighting switched on high) If the signal is correct, replace the UI board. If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 7. Trace KP_BACKLIGHT through pin 10 of J1 to pin 17 of J104 on the main board. Replace the connectors or loom if necessary. If the backlighting is still faulty, continue with Step 8. Check the continuity of E113. Check the signal at pins 3 and 4 of U109 (refer to Figure 7.4 and Figure 7.5). U109 pin 3: low U109 pin 4: high Replace U109 if necessary. Otherwise the FPGA is faulty and the control head board must be replaced. If one group of backlighting LEDs is faulty:

1. 2. 3. Send CCTM command 1003 x (where x is the intensity: 0=off, 1=low, 2=medium, 3=high) to switch on keypad backlighting. Check the 13V8_FILT_LED supply voltage is present across C18. If it is not present, check the continuity of L2 and R34. Replace if necessary. Check the enable transistor for each group Q4, Q5, Q6, and Q8 (the lower NPN of each pair). Transistor base: 0.6V Transistor collector: 0.1V Notice Q7 and its associated components are not placed. 164 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 4. If the signals are correct, continue with Step 4. If the signals are incorrect, check the base resistors for shorts or open circuits. From top to bottom for each LED string, check the resistor, the LEDs, and the transistor for continuity. R16 DS1 DS2 Q4 R17 Replace faulty parts as necessary. 10 2.8V (on) 1.8V (on) R30 DS9 DS10 Q8 R31 R18 DS3 DS4 Q5 R19 R22 DS5 DS6 Q6 R23 100 Figure 7.11 PCB layout of the keypad backlighting - UI board bottom side 7 1 R 4 Q C23 3 2 R 6 Q 5 Q 9 1 R 6 1 R 8 1 C R34 8 1 R L2 R22 9 R 0 1 R U2 Q3 3 1 R 5 1 C 1 3 R 8 Q 0 3 R TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 165 Figure 7.12 PCB layout of the keypad backlighting - UI board top side S1 I O K 1 1 S S D D A K 3 3 S S D D A S2 I O S3 I O S4 I O S10 I O S16 I O A 2 2 S S D D K A 4 4 S S D D K S5 I O S11 I O S17 I O S6 I O S7 I O S8 I O S9 I O K 5 5 S S D D A K 7 S D A K 9 9 S S D D A S12 I O S18 I O S13 I O S14 I O K 6 6 S S D D A A 8 S D K 0 A 0 1 1 S S D D K S19 I O S20 I O S15 I O S21 I O 166 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7.6 On/Off Key Faulty When battery power (13.8V) is applied to the radio, a press of the on/off key or PTT key will create an active low signal (CH_ON_OFF) back to the radio body to initiate the power-on or power-off sequence. This key press will also be detected by the FPGA of the control head through Q604 or Q603 (for PTT and on/off respectively) as an active low signal. Figure 7.13 Circuit diagram of the on/off key and PTT 3V3 D611 BAV70W D611 PTT 1 2 S604 TACT R621 5.6K PTT POWER-ON DISABLE R620 0 BAV70W 5 4 PWR S605 TACT C613 4.7UF R622 1M R623 2.2K 3V3 R6101 47K C2 Q604 PUMH11 E2 3V3 R6102 47K R625 1K R603 10K B2 10K 10K BC857BW Q602 OUT PTT_SENSE B1 10K 10K Q604 PUMH11 C1 E1 Q603 PUMH11 10K 10K OUT PWR_SENSE OUT PWR_CTRL 1 3 REGULATOR OUT IN OUT IN EN EN NC NC U601 5233 3V GND GND 2 C614 470NF 50V R602 330 D609 BZX84 3.6V R601 330 Q624 PUMH11 10K 10K Q624 PUMH11 10K 10K If the on/off key will not power up or shut down the radio:

1. 2. 3. Check the signal level at pin 1 of U601. U601 pin 1: 13V If not 13.8V, work backwards through E110 and to J101 pin 1. Replace E110 if the signal continuity is broken at the component, otherwise visually inspect J101 and finally the connectivity to the radio remote interface board. Check the signal level at pin 5 of U601. U601 pin 1: 3V If the signal level is incorrect, replace U601. Depress S605 and check that the signal level matches on both sides. S605: 3V or continuity when pressed If continuity is not present, replace S605. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 167 4. Inspect the signal level at the junction of Q603 and R6102

(PWR_SENSE). It should be the opposite of the signal level measured at S605. Q603 / R6102: 3.3V when switch open 0.0V when switch closed If this is incorrect, first check R6102 visually and for proper resis-

tance value. Replace the transistor if R6102 is okay. Figure 7.14 PCB layout of the on/off key and PTT U601 D611 S604 4 0 6 Q 1 0 1 6 R 2 0 1 6 R Q603 top side 168 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7.7 PTT Faulty For a circuit diagram and PCB layout, refer to Figure 7.13 on page 167 and Figure 7.14 on page 168. If the PTT key will not power up the radio:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the signal level at pin 1 of U601. U601 pin 1: 13V If not 13.8V, work backwards through E110 and to J101 pin 1 (refer to Figure 7.19 on page 176). Replace E110 if the signal continuity is broken at the component, otherwise visually inspect J101 and finally the connectivity to the radio remote interface board. Check the signal level at pin 5 of U601. U601 pin 1: 3V If the signal level is incorrect, replace U601. Check the signal level at D611. D611 anode: 3V D611 cathode: 2.5V Notice This test is only valid when the unit is turned off. If the device has already been turned on, the local 3.3V rail will provide power to the PTT switch circuit via D611b. This is isolated from U601 by D611a. If the signal level is incorrect, replace D611. Depress S604 and check that the signal level matches on both sides. S604: continuity when pressed If continuity is not present, replace S604. Inspect the signal level at the junction of Q604 and R6101

(PTT_SENSE). It should be the opposite of the signal level measured at S604. Q604 / R6101:

3.3V when switch open 0.0V when switch closed If this is incorrect, first check R6101 visually and for proper resis-

tance value. Replace the transistor if R6101 is okay. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 169 7.8 Keys Faulty All keys are connected to the FPGA in an array of four columns and six rows. During idle operation, the KB_ROW signals are driven low by the FPGA and the KB_COL signals (pulled high by an external resistor) are monitored for activity by the FPGA. A key press will generate a high-to-

low transition on the associated column KB_COL signal. This, in turn, will initiate a sequence of high output levels on the KB_ROW signals to identify which key was pressed. The signal at the column side of the switch should be 3.3V. The row side of the switch should be GND. A successful press will cause transition on associated KB_COL signal to low. CCTM command 1009 can be used to monitor keypad and power button press and release events (including PTT and hook switch). For a PCB layout, refer to Figure 7.16 on page 172. Figure 7.15 Circuit diagram of the keys KB_ROW1 KB_ROW2 KB_ROW3 KB_ROW4 KB_ROW5 KB_ROW6 IN IN IN IN IN IN KB_COL1 KB_COL2 KB_COL3 KB_COL4 OUT OUT OUT OUT 3V3 3V3 3V3 3V3 R624 10K 1 8 2 7 R624 10K 3 6 R624 10K 4 5 R624 10K

'SK1'

S601 TACT

'SK2'

S602 TACT

'EMER'

S603 TACT

'EMER'

S613 TACT 50MHZ FL697 2 1 3 4 7 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL699 50MHZ GND1 GND2 4 3 2 1 FL6100 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT KP_ROW1 KP_ROW2 KP_ROW3 KP_ROW4 KP_ROW5 KP_ROW6 GND1 GND2 IN IN IN IN KP_COL1 KP_COL2 KP_COL3 KP_COL4 50MHZ GND1 GND2 One Key Faulty:

Main Keypad If an individual keypad key (activated through the UI board) is faulty:

1. 2. Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pad of the PCB switch contacts. Visually inspect both PCB switch contacts (A and B) of a key for short-circuits. Repair if necessary. One Key Faulty:

Side or Top Function Key If an individual key is faulty, check switch continuity with a multimeter, and replace the switch if necessary. 170 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Several Keys Faulty The keypad matrix is arranged as six rows by four columns, as shown in the following table. Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Row 5 Row 6 F1 F2 F3 F4 1 4 7 F4 2 5 8 0 F6 3 6 9 Keys can be failing in groups of four or six, correlating with a specific fault in the column and row detection scheme. If one column of keys is faulty (for example, column 1), check the associated connecting pins on the inline filter FL6100 and pull-up resistor R624. Also check the continuity between the main board (J104) and the UI board (J1), including the seating of the loom. If one row of keys is faulty, check the associated inline filters FL699 and FL697. Also check the continuity between the main board (J104) and the UI board (J1), including the seating of the loom. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 171 Figure 7.16 PCB layout of the keys R624 FL697 9 9 6 L F 0 0 1 6 L F top side 172 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 7.9 Microphone Faulty If the microphone audio is not heard during transmission, trace the signal from its source, J107, through to the cable connector, pin 4 of J101. For a PCB layout, refer to Figure 7.18 on page 175. Figure 7.17 Circuit diagram of the microphone 8V0 R501 47K R502 22K 3

2

U501 TS912 1 R500 22K C512 100PF R503 4.7K IN MIC_IN IN MIC_UNMUTE C502 4.7UF C511 470PF R504 2.2K C504 1UF 8V0 V+

V+

8 U501 TS912 4 V-

V-

C501 100NF R507 47K R508 47K R509 DNI C513 100PF C509 1UF R505 22K Q501 BFR31 C508 10NF R510 10K 5

6

U501 TS912 7 C506 1UF OUT MIC_OUT E501 1800 C510 470PF R506 150K C505 100PF 1. 2. 3. Remove the microphone loom and check the DC bias on pin 1 of J107 (MIC_IN). MIC_IN: 2.2V If the signal is correct, continue with Step 5. If the signal is incorrect, continue with Step 2. Visually inspect and check the signal on R501 and U501 pin 8. R501: 8.0V If this signal is incorrect, suspect U204. Check and replace if neces-

sary. Verify the remaining levels in the voltage divider made up by R501 to R503. R501 / R502: 4.1V U501 pin 3: 2.2V If any of these levels are incorrect, first visually inspect and then measure the resistors to verify proper assembly. Also inspect C502, C511 and U501 for short circuit or poor assem-

bly. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 173 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Notice These signals must be correct before proceeding. Check the signal on pin 1 of U501. U501 pin 1: 2.2V If this signal is incorrect, replace U501. Use a signal generator to apply a known signal (suggest 1kHz sine wave with amplitude of 100 mVp-p) to the input J107. Quickly check the system output, either through a radio transmission or measured by an oscilloscope, at pin 4 of J101. If the problem has been solved, replace the microphone loom with a known good one. Check the signal on pin 6 of U501. U501 pin 6: equal to input signal (1kHz sine wave, 100mVp-p) If this signal is incorrect, visually inspect and check the signal at C504, Q501, C509, and R505. C504, Q501, C509, R505: equal to input signal Check that MIC_UNMUTE is high and the gate of Q501 is high. CCTM command 1020 can be used to toggle the line. Once the input signal reaches pin 6 of U501, check the signal at pin 7 of U501. U501 pin 7: 7x input signal (1kHz sine wave, 0.7Vp-p) If this signal is correct, proceed to Step 10. Visually inspect R506 and R505 for assembly. If no faults are found, verify the values. R506: 150k R505: 22k Incorrect values of R505 and R506 will give an output signal other than 7x the input signal. Specifically, the output signal will be

(R506/R505)x input signal. Replace if necessary. If no assembly faults are found and the amplifier output signal (at pin 7 of U501) is still incorrect, replace U501. Inspect C506, E501 and R103 for assembly. Check the signal level at each. (R103 is shown in Figure 7.19 on page 176 and Figure 7.20 on page 178.) C501: 7x input signal E501: 7x input signal R103: 7x input signal If incorrect, replace as needed. 11. Check D101 for assembly and possible internal short circuit. Replace as required. 174 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 7.18 PCB layout of the microphone 1 0 1 D E110 top side Q501 4 0 5 C C511 9 0 5 C 5 0 5 R 6 0 5 R E501 C506 R503 R502 2 0 5 C 1 0 5 U C501 R501 U204 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 175 7.10 Communications Faulty The control head is dependant on communications from the radio body to perform a proper startup. If the control head does not receive synchronisation messages or its message responses are not received by the radio body, the system will not start properly. This can often appear to be a completely dead unit. The signals transmitted from the radio to the control head and back are changed from single ended to differential signals (mirrored images) for travel through the cable. These paired and opposite signals are translated back to single ended signals by U101. It is important to note that the radio body may send only a limited number of messages to the control head. These will be sent in bursts of varying length that are separated by approximately 100ms for about 10 seconds total. Triggering the oscilloscope on one of these lines will be required. It may also be necessary to restart the radio body occasionally to reactivate the incoming messages during the troubleshooting process. Figure 7.19 Circuit diagram of the communications with the radio body 13V8 F101 1.25A E111 120 3A C159 470PF E T O M E R Y D O B 9 10 J101 SHIELD 13V8 RS485+

AGND MIC_AUDIO RS485-

DGND ON/OFF PL8HR 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 E104 120 3A E105 120 3A E103 120 3A E102 120 3A C100 470PF E116 1800 C101 100PF C102 100PF R103 120 C103 470PF R102 120 1 DNI J108 1 2 PL2HR 3V3 R112 10K D102 BZX84 9.1V 6 7 1 A A B B RO RO 8 VCC VCC U101 3175E RS485 GND GND 5 3V3 E106 120 3A C163 100NF FPGA CH_GPI01 R162 0 CH_TXD CH_GPI01 CH_GPI01 CH_RXD CH_RXD CH_TXD CH_TXD C105 10UF 3 4 2 DE DE DI DI RE RE CH_RXD R104 10K 3 4 6 2 5 C104 1UF NON-COMPLIANT D101 DALC208 E110 1800 C160 470PF MIC_OUT PWR_CTRL From microphone pre-amp From keypad interface 176 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 1. Check the incoming signals. Verify the differential signals from pins 3 and 6 of J101 through to pins 6 and 7 of U101. Suggest a horizontal scale of 100s per divisions. J108 can be fitted with a 0.1 inch pin header that matches many differential probes. 2. 3. 4. Problem areas may include:

E104 and E105 assembly errors (open circuits). Incorrect value or assembly of R102. Incorrect assembly of D101 (external short circuits) Internal fault of D101. If the incoming signals reach pins 6 and 7 of U101, proceed to step 2. Check the signal at pin 1 of U101. This output should match the incoming differential signal. While triggering on pin 6 or 7, verify that the signal on pin 1 matches the same pulse width and duration. (The signal may be opposite in polar-

ity, depending on triggering). If no signal is present, or the signal is notably different than the incoming signals, replace U101. Check the signal at pin 4 of U101. The control head outgoing signals will be sent to the RS485 trans-

ceiver through pin 4. If messages are being properly received (steps 1 and 2 passed), a reply should be present on pin 4. If no signal is ever present on pin 4 (and the incoming signal path appears to be operating correctly), the FPGA is damaged and the control board must be replaced. Check the outgoing signals at pins 6 and 7 of U101. If the response is evident on pin 4 of U101, then the outgoing mes-

sage should be relayed through to pins 6 and 7. It will be necessary to trigger on pin 4 because incoming messages will also be present on pins 6 and 7. While triggering on pin 4, observe pins 6 and 7 to verify a signal that matches the waveform of pin 4. If no output signal is generated, replace U101. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head 177 Figure 7.20 PCB layout of the communications with the radio body 1 0 1 D J108 R102 U101 R162 top side bottom side E104 E105 R103 178 Fault Finding of the Hand-Held Control Head TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 8 Spare Parts This chapter identifies serviceable parts in a TM9300 or TM9400 radio and, where applicable, shows which spares kit provides each part. For information on the numbering systems associated with the TM9300 and TM9400 radios, see Tait Product Numbering on page 25. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Spare Parts 179 8.1 Illustrated Spare Parts Catalogue The parts of the radio are listed in the following tables:

radio body graphical control head 2- or 3-digit control head handheld control head programming control head Table 8.1 Table 8.2 Table 8.3 Table 8.4 Table 8.5 The number in the Pos. column refers to the position of the item in the associated illustration:

radio body graphical control head 2- or 3-digit control head handheld control head programming control head Figure 8.1 and Figure 8.2 Figure 8.3 Figure 8.4 Figure 8.5 Figure 8.6 The tables list the IPN or product code of each individual part, and the order code of the spares kit that contains that part. An -xx in an IPN or product code represents an issue number. Unless otherwise indicated, you can generally order only the latest issue of a part. Board Components Board components are not listed in this chapter. For details of board components please obtain the relevant PCB Information document as described in Obtain a PCB Information Document on page 55. Before ordering a board component see also SMT Repairs (PCB Components) on page 54. It may be more cost effective to replace a board than to replace a board component. 180 Spare Parts TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Figure 8.1 Spare parts of the radio body B Cx4 D E F Gx5 H I 1@

1!

1#

x2 C Use Table 8.1 on page 183 as the key to this figure. J 1) TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Spare Parts 181 Figure 8.2 Spare parts of the radio body (main board assembly) G x3 1$x2 1%

1^

1&

1*

x2 1(

2@

2!

2) 2#

3641z_01 Use Table 8.1 on page 183 as the key to this figure. 182 Spare Parts TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Table 8.1 Spare parts of the radio body Pos. Description B Cover C Screw M4 x 16mm D Lid E Bung for aperture for external options connector F Main seal G Screw M3 x 10mm H Main-board assembly (TM9300) H Main-board assembly (TM9400) I Bung for auxiliary connector J Seal for RF connector 1) Chassis (>25W radio) Chassis (25W radio) 1! Gap pad for chassis (>25W radio only) 1@ Gap pad for chassis 1# Control head seal 1$ Screw for power connector (>25W radio) Screw for power connector (25W radio) 1% Auxiliary connector [SK101]

1^

Inner foam seal for auxiliary connector 1& Outer foam seal for auxiliary connector 1*

Lock-nut for auxiliary connector 1( Rubber seal for power connector (>25W radio) Rubber seal for power connector (25W radio) 2) Power connector [PL100] (>25W radio) Power connector [PL100] (25W radio) 2! Gap pad for copper plate (50W/40W radio only) 2@ Heat-transfer block 2# Antenna connector [SK103] (mini-UHF), or Antenna connector [SK103] (BNC)

(both incl. lock washer and hexagonal nut) Qty. 1 6 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Spares Kit IPN1 TMAA22-02 mech. kit 349-02067-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 312-01091-xx 302-50000-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 362-01109-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 349-02066-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit Contact Tait Support with the product code and serial number of your RF board. 302-50001-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 362-01113-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 303-11301-xx 303-11225-xx 369-01048-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit TMAA22-98 gap pad kit 316-80040-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 362-01115-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit TMAA22-07 seals kit TMAA22-02 mech. kit 346-10022-07 346-10030-08 240-02022-xx 362-01110-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 362-01112-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 354-01043-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit 362-01127-xx 362-01114-xx 240-00040-xx 240-00027-xx 369-01049-xx TMAA22-02 mech. kit TMAA22-98 gap pad kit 308-13147-xx 240-00029-xx 240-00028-xx 1. The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number. Items will always be the latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Spare Parts 183 Figure 8.3 Spare parts of the graphical control head D H I B x2 C E x4 F G J G 1) 1!

1%

1^

1@

1#

1$

1&

Use Table 8.2 on page 185 as the key to this figure. 184 Spare Parts TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023

 

 

Table 8.2 Spare parts of the graphical control head Pos. Description B M4 x 12 Taptite screw C Adaptor flange D Control head loom (with female-female adaptor) female-female adaptor E 3 x 10 PT screw F Control head board G Seal H Short light pipe I Long light pipe J Space frame 1) Speaker clamp 1! Speaker 1@

LCD assembly (including LCD seal)3 1# Main keypad - F1, F2, F3, F4 Main keypad - E, L, S, A 1$ Power keypad 1% Concealed microphone 1^

Front-panel assembly 1& Knob for volume-control potentiometer Qty. 2 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Spares Kit2 IPN1 349-02058-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 301-00020-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 219-02882-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) 240-00021-41 T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 346-10030-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) T02-00032-0003 362-01124-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 262-00003-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 262-00004-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 319-30077-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 303-50111-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 252-00011-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) T02-00032-0004 311-03124-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 311-03187-xx 311-03120-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 311-01054-xx T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) 1. The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number. Items will always be the latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured. 2. Spares kits T02-00032-0001 (TM9300) and T02-00032-0002 (TM9400) contain an assembled control head with-

out control head board, concealed microphone and LCD assembly. 3. The LCD seal IPN 362-01126-xx is part of the LCD assembly and must be replaced whenever the LCD is re-

placed. This seal is included in the T02-00032-0004. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Spare Parts 185 Figure 8.4 Spare parts of the 2-digit control head d x3 Fx2 j h i 1) 1#

1@

B C E g 1!

1$

1%

Use Table 8.3 on page 187 as the key to this figure. 186 Spare Parts TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Table 8.3 Spare parts of the 2-digit control head Pos. Description Qty. IPN B Control-head loom (with female/female adaptor) female-female adaptor C Control-head options board (optional) dynamic microphone board D 3 x 8 PT screw E Control-head board F Elastomeric strip G Space frame h Speaker clamp i Speaker j Short light pipe 1) Long light pipe 1! Keypad 1@

LCD 1# Concealed microphone (future release) 1$

Front-panel assembly 1% Knob for volume-control potentiometer 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Spares Kit1 TMAA22-01 219-02882-xx 210-00021-41 TMAA02-06 346-10030-08 TMAA22-01 TMAA22-03 (x6) 209-00011-xx TMAA22-01 319-30073-02 TMAA22-01 303-50111-xx TMAA22-01 252-00011-xx TMAA22-01 262-00003-xx TMAA22-01 262-00004-xx TMAA22-01 311-03114-xx TMAA02-01 008-00031-xx TMAA22-01 TMAA22-01 311-01054-xx TMAA22-01 The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number. Items will always be the latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured. 1. Spares kit TMAA22-01 contains an assembled 2-or 3-digit-display control head without the control-head board. Spares kit does not include the optional parts of the concealed microphone. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Spare Parts 187 Figure 8.5 Spare parts of the hand-held control head c d b g j f h i 1) e 1!

1@

2) 2@

2!

1#

1$

1%

1^

2#

2$

1&

1(

1*

Use Table 8.4 on page 189 as the key to this figure. 188 Spare Parts TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Table 8.4 Spare parts of the hand-held control head Pos. Description B PTT keypad frame C PTT keypad actuator D PTT/function key keypad E front panel, including lens (TM9300) front panel, including lens (TM9400) F microphone grommet G microphone and loom H light spreader I light pipes2 J top keypad 1) 1!

1@

keypad support LCD assembly, including loom foam tape for LCD assembly 1# main keypad 1$

user interface (UI) board 1% K18x5 T6 PT screw 1^ main board 1& main to UI board loom 1*

1(

2) 2!

curly cord to radio body foam tape rear panel, including hookswitch and loom rear panel seal 2@ K25x20 T7 PT screw 2#

2$

programming cover and seal tool for programming connector cover Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 IPN1 306-01050-xx 311-03132-xx 311-03133-xx contact Tait Support 360-02032-xx 219-03088-xx 304-07039-xx 262-00011-xx 311-03134-xx 306-01051-xx 008-00044-xx 369-01060-xx 311-03135-xx T02-00075-xxxx 349-00030-02 T02-00074-xxxx 219-03114-xx 219-03080-xx 369-01063-xx contact Tait Support 369-01062-xx 346-10025-20 303-23188-xx 369-01061-xx 319-60100-xx 1. The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number. Items will always be the latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured. 2. For hand-held control heads other than black: A 7mm length of heat shrink (IPN 400-00020-06) is slid over each light pipe, to provide additional light shielding. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Spare Parts 189 Figure 8.6 Spare parts of the programming control head Torx T10 5lbin (0.6Nm) B C D x4 E F G x2 Table 8.5 Spare parts of the programming control head Pos. Description B Control-head board C Control-head loom (with female/female adaptor) female-female adaptor D 3 x 8 PT screw E PCB bracket F Front panel G RJ45 bung Qty. IPN 1 1 3 1 1 2 T02-00086-AAAA 219-02882-xx 210-00021-41 346-10030-08 302-10063-xx 316-06843-xx 302-50002-xx 190 Spare Parts TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 9 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit The TOPA-SV-024 test unit is used to test and maintain Tait portable and mobile radios by providing an interface between the radio, a test PC, and an RF communications test set. The diagram below shows the front panel of the test unit. Figure 9.1 TOPA-SV-024 test unit Radio 9.1 Test Equipment Setup The diagram on the following page shows how the test unit is connected to the radio, the test PC, and the RF communications test set. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit 191 Figure 9.2 Test equipment setup Test PC T03-00118-0601 cable RF comms RF in/out

(N-type) AUDIO OUT

(BNC) AUDIO IN HI

(BNC) audio monitor out (BNC) Oscilloscope AC input

(BNC) computer connector

(RJ11) TOPA-SV-024 Radio radio connector

(DB15) speaker connector microphone connector (RJ45) transmit audio connector (BNC) receive audio /

SINAD connector

(BNC) TMAA21-01 cable TM9300/TM9400 radio power connector auxiliary connector

(DB15) TMAA23-02 cable

(>25W radios) TMAA20-03 cable

(25W radios) RF connector

(mini UHF or BNC) DC power banana plugs 192 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 9.2 Operation Portable / Mobile Switch This section explains the function of the TOPA-SV-024 test unit controls. The procedure for using the test unit is described in the relevant section on test equipment setup. This 2-way toggle switch is used to switch attenuation resistors (R4, R5, R6) in and out of the line from the radios positive speaker output to the positive Rx Audio/SINAD output of the test unit (before the isolating transformer). When set to Portable, the attenuation resistors are switched out. When set to Mobile, the attenuation resistors are switched in (attenuation 10:1). Notice Selecting the wrong switch position may result in incorrect SINAD readings and damage to the test unit. Mod Audio/Audio Tap In / Off / Mic Audio Switch This 3-way toggle switch is used to switch between Mod Audio/

Audio Tap In, Mic Audio, and Off (no audio signal). For normal transmit deviation tests, this switch is set to Mic Audio. On Hook / Off Hook Switch This 2-way toggle switch is used to simulate the microphone hookswitch opening (hook off) and closing (hook on). This is done by switching a 12k resistor in or out of the microphone PTT line. When set to Off Hook, the 12k resistor is switched out of the microphone-PTT line. This simulates the microphone being removed from the microphone clip. When set to On Hook, a 12k resistor is switched into the microphone-PTT line. This simulates the microphone being placed on the microphone clip. 9.2.1 Rx / Tx/PTT Switch This 2-way toggle switch is used to switch between receive and transmit mode. When set to Rx, the PTT line is switched to high impedance. When set to Tx/PTT, the PTT line is pulled to ground. TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit 193 9.2.2 Speaker / Radio / Load Switch This 3-way toggle switch is used during receive audio tests to switch the audio to the test unit speaker (Speaker), to the radios internal speaker

(Radio) or to a dummy load consisting of R1 and R2 (Load). This switch does not disconnect the radios internal speaker on mobiles. If the switch is set to Speaker or Load, this simulates an external speaker being connected in parallel to the radios internal speaker. With all settings, a low level audio signal is available for testing through the SINAD port. When set to Speaker, only the speaker of the test unit is active. When set to Radio, only the speaker of the portable is active. When set to Load, no speaker is active. The audio signal is terminated in the test unit dummy load. When set to Speaker, the speakers of the test unit and the mobile are both active. The speaker of the mobile cannot be disconnected. When set to Radio, only the speaker of the mobile is active. When set to Load, the speaker of the mobile remains active. Portable Mobile 9.3 PCB Information 9.3.1 Parts List (PCB IPN 220-01418-03) Ref. BNC1 BNC2 C1 C2 C3 C4 PL1 PL2 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 SPKR SW1 IPN 240-02100-11 240-02100-11 011-54100-01 011-54100-01 020-59100-06 011-54100-01 240-00010-55 240-04021-60 032-31820-01 032-31820-01 030-55120-20 030-53560-20 030-54270-20 030-52560-20 030-55100-20 032-31820-01 230-00010-42 Description Skt Coax BNC 3.5mm Pnl N/Tag Skt Coax BNC 3.5mm Pnl N/Tag Cap Cer AI 1n 10% T/C B 50v Cap Cer AI 1n 10% T/C B 50v Cap Elec Rdl 100m 16v 6.3x11 Cap Cer AI 1n 10% T/C B 50v Plg 15w Drng W-Wrap Pnl Mtg Skt 6w Modr Ph Vrt T-Ent Res M/F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5% 2.5w Res M/F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5% 2.5w Res Flm 4x1.6 12k 5% 0.4w Res Flm 4x1.6 560e 5% 0.4w Res Flm 4x1.6 2k7 5% 0.4w Res Flm 4x1.6 56e 5% 0.4w Res Flm 4x1.6 10k 5% 0.4w Res M/F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5% 2.5w Sw Tgl On Off On Dpdt Ms500hb IPN 230-00010-57 230-00010-03 230-00010-16 230-00010-03 Ref. SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 TRAN 054-00010-17 Xfmr Line 600 Ohm 1:1 Description Sw Tgl Dpdt On-On Pnl Mtg Sw Tgl Spst Mini Pnl Mtg Sw Tgr Spst 3-Pos Pnl Mtg Sw Tgl Spst Mini Pnl Mtg 220-01418-03 PCB T/Orca calib Kit 250-00010-19 SPKR c/w rbr sealing ring 303-03034-00 CASE Sloped pnl encl 307-01015-01 GRILLE A2M1128 spkr sml blk 316-06645-03 PNL frt test unit port & mbl PILLAR M3x13.4mm A4M2857 316-87066-00 345-00040-10 SCRW M3x6 P/H Pz BZ Mc SCRW M3x8 P/H T10 blk T/T 349-00020-36 352-00010-08 NUT M3 cold form hex S/T BZ 353-00010-13 WSHR M3 sprf int BZ 353-00010-16 WSHR M3 Fibre 8x1.5 TAG sldr BNC pnl mtg 356-00010-73 369-00010-11 FOOT rbr bump on slfadh 410-01172-00 PKGN blnk T/Orca 194 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 9.3.2 Board Layout IPN 220-01418-03 IPN 220-01418-03 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit 195 9.3.3 Circuit Diagram 196 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 Tait General Software Licence Agreement This Software License Agreement ("Agree-

ment") is between you (Licensee) and Tait International Limited (Tait"). By using any of the Software items embedded and pre-loaded in the related Tait Designated Product, included on CD, downloaded from the Tait website, or provided in any other form, you agree to be bound by the terms of this Agree-

ment. If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement, do not install or use any of the Soft-

ware. If you install or use any of the Software, that will be deemed to be acceptance of the terms of this Agreement. For good and valuable consideration, the parties agree as follows:

Section 1 DEFINITIONS Confidential Information means all or any information supplied to or received by Licensee from Tait, whether before or after installation or use and whether directly or indirectly pertaining to the Software and Documentation supplied by Tait, including without limitation all informa-

tion relating to the Designated Products, hard-

ware, software; copyright, design registrations, trademarks; operations, processes, and related business affairs of Tait; and including any other goods or property supplied by Tait to Licensee pursuant to the terms of this Agreement. Designated Products means products pro-

vided by Tait to Licensee with which or for which the Software and Documentation is licensed for use. Documentation means product and software documentation that specifies technical and per-

formance features and capabilities; user, opera-

tion, and training manuals for the Software; and all physical or electronic media upon which such information is provided. Executable Code means Software in a form that can be run in a computer and typically refers to machine language, which is comprised of native instructions the computer carries out in hardware. Executable code may also refer to programs written in interpreted languages that require additional software to actually execute. Intellectual Property Rights and Intellec-

tual Property mean the following or their sub-

stantial equivalents or counterparts, recognized by or through action before any governmental authority in any jurisdiction throughout the world and including, but not limited to all rights in patents, patent applications, inventions, copy-

rights, trademarks, trade secrets, trade names, and other proprietary rights in or relating to the Software and Documentation; including any adaptations, corrections, de-compilations, dis-

assemblies, emulations, enhancements fixes, modifications, translations and updates to or derivative works from, the Software or Docu-

mentation, whether made by Tait or another party, or any improvements that result from Tait processes or, provision of information services. Licensee means any individual or entity that has accepted the terms of this License. Open Source Software means software with freely obtainable source code and license for modification, or permission for free distribu-

tion. Open Source Software License means the terms or conditions under which the Open Source Software is licensed. Person means any individual, partnership, corporation, association, joint stock company, trust, joint venture, limited liability company, governmental authority, sole proprietorship, or other form of legal entity recognized by a gov-

ernmental authority. Security Vulnerability means any flaw or weakness in system security procedures, design, implementation, or internal controls that if exer-

cised (accidentally triggered or intentionally exploited) could result in a security breach such that data is compromised, manipulated, or sto-

len, or a system is damaged. Software (i) means proprietary software in executable code format, and adaptations, trans-

lations, de-compilations, disassemblies, emula-

tions, or derivative works of such software; (ii) means any modifications, new versions and new releases of the software provided by Tait;

(iii) means any upgrades, enhancements or other functions or features to the Software provided by Tait; and (iv) may contain one or more items of software owned by a third-party supplier. The term "Software" includes the applicable Soft-

ware Key and does not include any third-party software provided under separate license or not licensable under the terms of this Agreement. Source Code means software expressed in human readable language necessary for under-

standing, maintaining, modifying, correcting, and enhancing any software referred to in this Agreement and includes all states of that soft-

ware prior to its compilation into an executable programme. Software Key means a code or key that is supplied by Tait to access, enable and use the Software or certain functions or features of the Software. Tait means Tait International Limited and includes its Affiliates. Section 2 SCOPE This Agreement contains the terms and condi-

tions of the license Tait is providing to Licensee, and of Licensees use of the Software and Doc-

umentation. Tait and Licensee enter into this Agreement in connection with Tait delivery of certain proprietary Software and/or products containing embedded or pre-loaded proprietary Software. Section 3 GRANT OF LICENSE 3.1. Subject to the provisions of this Agreement TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 197 and the payment of applicable license fees, Tait grants to Licensee a personal, limited, non-

transferable (except as permitted in Section 7), and non-exclusive license to use the Software in executable code form, and the Documentation, solely in connection with Licensee's use of the Designated Products for the useful life of the Designated Products. This Agreement does not grant any rights to source code. 3.2. The Licensee acknowledges that one or more Software Keys may be required from Tait for the Software or certain functions or features of the Software. The Licensee may only access, enable and use such Software or functions or features of the Software with Software Keys issued by Tait. Tait may provide the Licensee with a Software Key for the Software or certain functions or features of the Software agreed to by the parties as part of this Agreement. The Software Key may control the functions or fea-

tures of the Software licensed in accordance with this Agreement. The Licensees license to the Software Key is limited to a license to use the Software Key only to access, enable and use the Software or certain functions or features of the Software that Tait has agreed to provide to the Licensee and only in accordance with the Documentation. 3.3. If the Software licensed under this Agree-

ment contains or is derived from Open Source Software, the terms and conditions governing the use of such Open Source Software are in the Open Source Software Licenses of the copy-

right owner and not in this Agreement. If there is a conflict between the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the terms and conditions of the any applicable Open Source Software Licenses, the terms and conditions of the Open Source Software Licenses will take precedence. For information about Open Source Compo-

nents contained in Tait products and the related Open Source licenses, see:

https://www.taitradio.com/opensource Section 4 LIMITATIONS ON USE 4.1. Licensee may use the Software only for Licensee's internal business purposes and only in accordance with the Documentation. Any other use of the Software is strictly prohibited. Without limiting the general nature of these restrictions, Licensee will not make the Soft-

ware available for use by third parties on a "time sharing," "application service provider," "ser-

vice bureau" basis, or for any other similar com-

mercial rental or sharing arrangement. 4.2. Licensee will not, and will not directly or indirectly allow or enable any third party to: (i) reverse engineer, disassemble, extract compo-

nents, decompile, reprogram, or otherwise reduce the Software or any portion thereof to a human perceptible form or otherwise attempt to recreate the source code; (ii) modify, adapt, cre-

ate derivative works of, or merge the Software;

(iii) copy, reproduce, distribute, lend, or lease the Software or Documentation to any third party; (iv) grant any sublicense or other rights in the Software or Documentation to any third party; (v) take any action that would cause the Software or Documentation to be placed in the public domain; (vi) remove, or in any way alter or obscure any copyright notice or other notice of Tait or third-party licensors proprietary rights; (vii) provide, copy, transmit, disclose, divulge or make the Software or Documentation available to, or permit the use of the Software by, any third party or on any machine except as expressly authorized by this Agreement; or

(viii) use, or permit the use of, the Software in a manner that would result in the production of a copy of the Software by any means whatsoever other than what is permitted in this Agreement. Licensee may make one copy of the Software to be used solely for archival, back-up, or disaster recovery purposes; provided that Licensee may not operate that copy of the Software at the same time as the original Software is being operated. Licensee may make as many copies of the Doc-

umentation as it may reasonably require for the internal use of the Software. 4.3. Unless otherwise authorized by Tait in writ-

ing, Licensee will not, and will not enable or allow any third party to: (i) install a copy of the Software on more than one unit of a Designated Product; or (ii) copy or transfer Software installed on one unit of a Designated Product to any other device. Licensee may temporarily transfer Software installed on a Designated Product to another device if the Designated Product is inoperable or malfunctioning. Tem-

porary transfer of the Software to another device must be discontinued when the original Desig-

nated Product is returned to operation and the Software must be removed from the other device. 4.4. Licensee will maintain, during the term of this Agreement and for a period of two years thereafter, accurate records relating to this license grant to verify compliance with this Agreement. Tait, or a third party nominated by Tait, may inspect Licensees premises, books and records, upon reasonable prior notice to Licensee, during Licensees normal business hours and subject to Licensee's facility and security regulations. Tait is responsible for the payment of all expenses and costs of the inspec-

tion, provided that Licensee shall indemnify Tait for all costs (including audit costs and legal costs on a solicitor client basis) if Licensee has breached the terms of this Agreement. Any information obtained by Tait during the course of the inspection will be kept in strict confi-

dence by Tait and used solely for the purpose of verifying Licensee's compliance with the terms of this Agreement. Section 5 OWNERSHIP AND TITLE Tait, its licensors, and its suppliers retain all of their Intellectual Property Rights in and to the Software and Documentation, in any form. No rights are granted to Licensee under this Agree-

ment by implication, estoppel or otherwise, except for those rights which are expressly granted to Licensee in this Agreement. All Intel-

lectual Property developed, originated, or pre-

pared by Tait in connection with providing the Software, Designated Products, Documenta-

198 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 tion, or related services, remains vested exclu-

sively in Tait, and Licensee will not have any shared development or other Intellectual Prop-

erty Rights. Section 6 LIMITED WARRANTY;

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY 6.1. The commencement date and the term of the Software warranty will be a period of one (1) year from Tait shipment of the Software. If Licensee is not in breach of any obligations under this Agreement, Tait warrants that the unmodified Software, when used properly and in accordance with the Documentation and this Agreement, will be free from a reproducible defect that eliminates the functionality or suc-

cessful operation of a feature critical to the pri-

mary functionality or successful operation of the Software. Whether a defect has occurred will be determined solely by Tait. Tait does not warrant that Licensees use of the Software or the Designated Products will be uninterrupted, error-free, completely free of Security Vulnera-

bilities, or that the Software or the Designated Products will meet Licensees particular requirements. Tait makes no representations or warranties with respect to any third-party soft-

ware included in the Software. 6.2 Tait sole obligation to Licensee, and Licensees exclusive remedy under this war-

ranty, is to use reasonable efforts to remedy any material Software defect covered by this war-

ranty. These efforts will involve either replacing the media or attempting to correct significant, demonstrable program or documentation errors or Security Vulnerabilities. If Tait cannot cor-

rect the defect within a reasonable time, then at Tait option, Tait will replace the defective Soft-

ware with functionally equivalent Software, license to Licensee substitute Software which will accomplish the same objective, or terminate the license and refund Licensees paid license fee. If Tait investigation of the perceived defect reveals that no such defect in fact exists, Tait may recover its costs in respect of such investi-

gation from Licensee. 6.3. Tait disclaims any and all other warranties relating to the Software or Documentation other than the express warranties set forth in this Sec-

tion 6. Warranties in Section 6 are in lieu of all other warranties whether express or implied, oral or written, and including without limitation any and all implied warranties of condition, title, non-infringement, merchantability, or fit-

ness for a particular purpose or use by Licensee

(whether Tait knows, has reason to know, has been advised of, or is otherwise aware of any such purpose or use), whether arising by law, by reason of custom or usage of trade, or by course of dealing. In addition, Tait disclaims any war-

ranty to any person other than Licensee with respect to the Software or Documentation. Section 7 TRANSFERS 7.1. Licensee will not transfer the Software or Documentation to any third party without spe-

cific prior written consent from Tait. Tait may withhold such consent or at its own discretion make the consent conditional upon the trans-

feree paying applicable license fees and agree-

ing to be bound by this Agreement. 7.2. In the case of a value-added reseller or dis-

tributor of Tait Designated Products, the consent referred to in Section 7.1 may be contained in a Tait Reseller or Tait Distributor Agreement. 7.3. If the Designated Products are Tait vehicle-

mounted mobile products or hand-carried porta-

ble radio products and Licensee transfers own-

ership of the Tait mobile or portable radio prod-

ucts to a third party, Licensee may assign its right to use the Software which is embedded in or furnished for use with the radio products and the related Documentation; provided that Licensee transfers all copies of the Software and Documentation to the transferee. 7.4. 7.4.For the avoidance of any doubt, Section 7.3 excludes TaitNet Infrastructure, or the prod-

ucts listed at any time under network products at: http://www.taitradio.com. 7.5. If Licensee, as a contractor or subcontractor

(integrator), is purchasing Tait Designated Products and licensing Software not for its own internal use but for end use only by a Customer, the Licensee may transfer such Software, but only if a) Licensee transfers all copies of such Software and the related Documentation to the transferee and b) Licensee has first obtained from its Customer (and, if Licensee is acting as a subcontractor, from the interim transferee(s) and from the ultimate end user sub license) an enforceable sublicense agreement that prohibits any other transfer and that contains restrictions substantially identical to the terms set forth in this Software License Agreement. Except as stated in the foregoing, Licensee and any trans-

feree(s) authorised by this Section may not oth-

erwise transfer or make available any Tait Soft-

ware to any third party nor permit any party to do so. Licensee will, on request, make available evidence reasonably satisfactory to Tait demon-

strating compliance with all the foregoing. Section 8 TERM AND TERMINATION 8.1. Licensees right to use the Software and Documentation will commence when the Des-

ignated Products are supplied by Tait to Licensee and will continue for the life of the Designated Products with which or for which the Software and Documentation are supplied, unless Licensee breaches this Agreement, in which case this Agreement and Licensee's right to use the Software and Documentation may be terminated immediately upon notice by Tait. 8.2. Within thirty (30) days after termination of this Agreement, Licensee must certify in writing to Tait that all copies of the Software have been removed or deleted from the Designated Prod-

ucts and that all copies of the Software and Doc-

umentation have been returned to Tait or destroyed by Licensee and are no longer in use by Licensee. 8.3. Licensee acknowledges that Tait made a considerable investment of resources in the development, marketing, and distribution of the Software that Licensee's breach of this Agreement will result and Documentation and TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023 199 in irreparable harm to Tait for which monetary damages would be inadequate. If Licensee breaches this Agreement, Tait may terminate this Agreement and be entitled to all available remedies at law or in equity including immedi-

ate injunctive relief and repossession of all non-

embedded Software and associated Documenta-

tion. Licensee shall pay all Tait costs (on an indemnity basis) for the enforcement of the terms of this Agreement. Section 9 CONFIDENTIALITY Licensee acknowledges that the Software and Documentation contain proprietary and Confi-

dential Information valuable to Tait and are Tait trade secrets, and Licensee agrees to respect the confidentiality of the information contained in the Software and Documentation. Section 10 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 10.1. In no circumstances shall Tait be under any liability to Licensee, or any other person whatsoever, whether in Tort (including negli-

gence), Contract (except as expressly provided in this Agreement), Equity, under any Statute, or otherwise at law for any losses or damages whether general, special, exemplary, punitive, direct, indirect, or consequential arising out of or in connection with any use or inability of using the Software. 10.2. Licensees sole remedy against Tait will be limited to breach of contract and Tait sole and total liability for any such claim shall be limited at the option of Tait to the repair or replacement of the Software or the refund of the purchase price of the Software. Section 11 GENERAL 11.1. COPYRIGHT NOTICES. The existence of a copyright notice on the Software will not be construed as an admission or presumption of publication of the Software or public disclosure of any trade secrets associated with the Soft-

ware. 11.2. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. Licensee acknowledges that the Software may be subject to the laws and regulations of the jurisdiction covering the supply of the Designated Products and will comply with all applicable laws and regulations, including export laws and regula-

tions, of that country. 11.3. ASSIGNMENTS AND SUBCON-

TRACTING. Tait may assign its rights or sub-

contract its obligations under this Agreement, or encumber or sell its rights in any Software, without prior notice to, or consent of, Licensee. 11.4. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement shall be subject to and construed in accordance with New Zealand law and disputes between the parties concerning the provisions hereof shall be determined by the New Zealand Courts of Law. Provided however Tait may at its election bring proceedings for breach of the terms hereof or for the enforcement of any judgment in relation to a breach of the terms hereof in any jurisdiction Tait considers fit for the purpose of ensuring compliance with the terms hereof or obtaining relief for breach of the terms hereof. 11.5. THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES. This Agreement is entered into solely for the benefit of Tait and Licensee. No third party has the right to make any claim or assert any right under this Agreement, and no third party is deemed a ben-

eficiary of this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any licensor or supplier of third-party software included in the Software will be a direct and intended third-party beneficiary of this Agreement. 11.6. SURVIVAL. Sections 4, 5, 6.3, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 survive the termination of this Agree-

ment. 11.7. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE. In the event of inconsistencies between this Agreement and any other Agreement between the parties, the parties agree that, with respect to the specific subject matter of this Agreement, this Agree-

ment prevails. 11.8 SECURITY. Tait uses reasonable means in the design and writing of its own Software and the acquisition of third-party Software in order to limit Security Vulnerabilities. While no soft-

ware can be guaranteed to be free from Security Vulnerabilities, if a Security Vulnerability is discovered, Tait will take the steps specified in Section 6 of this Agreement. 11.9 EXPORT. Licensee will not transfer, directly or indirectly, any Designated Product, Documentation or Software furnished hereun-

der or the direct product of such Documentation or Software to any country for which New Zea-

land or any other applicable country requires an export license or other governmental approval without first obtaining such license or approval. 11.10 SEVERABILITY. In the event that any part or parts of this Agreement shall be held ille-

gal or null and void by any court or administra-

tive body of competent jurisdiction, such deter-

mination shall not affect the remaining terms which shall remain in full force and effect as if such part or parts held to be illegal or void had not been included in this Agreement. Tait may replace the invalid or unenforceable provision with a valid and enforceable provision that achieves the original intent and economic effect of this Agreement. 11.11 CONSUMER GUARANTEES. Licensee acknowledges that the licenses supplied in terms of this agreement are supplied to Licensee in business, and that the guarantees and other provisions of prevailing consumer protection legislation shall not apply. 11.12 WHOLE AGREEMENT. Licensee acknowledges that it has read this Agreement, understands it and agrees to be bound by its terms and conditions. Licensee also agrees that, subject only to the express terms of any other agreement between Tait and Licensee to the contrary, this is the complete and exclusive statement of the Agreement between it and Tait in relation to the Software. This Agreement supersedes any proposal or prior agreement, oral or written, and any other communications between Licensee and Tait relating to the Soft-

ware and the Designated Products. 200 TM9300/TM9400 Service Manual Tait International Limited June 2023

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

fam Anodyne Electronics __#100-966 Crowley Ave, ua info@aem-corp.com Manufacturing Corp. Kelowna, Britsh Columbia TELEPHONE + 1.250.763.1088 Canada VIY 014 TOLL-FREE +1,888.763.1088 AWOL. OME SRESOUR OF STRUCTIRAL MONTORNG STSTENSPLCASeSuy --@BM-COT.com 2.0"

Mission Transceiver Panel Mount MTP1 38-0006N Serial No. Weight Power

(anaes) 32 im ra VOC RF Power: 10W Modification 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ication 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Status ~ BCDEFGHI J This device complies wth part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) Ths device may not cause harmful interference and (2) hrs device must accept any interference recered inching interference Tat may Case undesred operabon Made in Canada HVIN. MTPBIGN e FCC ID: ZC7-MTPB1GN ICTROMCS

(MANUFACTURING CORP IC: 9601A-MTPBIGN ion Transceiver Pane! Mount MTP136D-000GN Mission Transceiver Panel Mount MTP138-000GN SerialNo. __ Weight Date Power

<Auto> 32\b__|[MMMyyyy][_28 voc _]

RF Power: 10W talus A BCODEF GH I SJ The doce compas wh pat So ow FC Rates. Oparaion snp ftowing Mo ose Canaan Hn MTPBIGN a FCC IO ZC7MTPSIGN useracToume cour IC. SSOTANTPSIGN

 

 

Authority to Act as Agent Nemko North America, Inc. 303 River Road, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1V 1H2 Attn: Director of Certification Authority to Act as Agent for FCC and ISED application On our behalf, I appoint Spencer Zhong of Nemko Canada, Inc. at 303 River Road, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1V 1H2, to act as our agent in the preparation of this application for equipment certification. I certify that submitted documents properly describe the device or system for which equipment certification is sought. I also certify that each unit manufactured, imported or marketed, as defined in FCC and in ISED Canadas regulations will have affixed to it a label identical to that submitted for approval with this application. In signing this letter, Applicant certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to the application is not subject to a denial of Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862 because of a conviction for possession or distribution of a controlled substance. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. We also declare that the information provided to the FCC is true and correct to the best of our knowledge (47 CFR 2.911(d)) and we have been informed of the grantee responsibilities (47 CFR 2.909) with regard to certified equipment. For instances where our authorized agent signs the application for certification on our behalf, I acknowledge that all responsibility for complying with the terms and conditions for certification, as specified by Nemko Canada Inc, still resides with Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. located at 966 Crowley Ave Unit #100, Kelowna, B.C., Canada V1Y 0L1. Dated: January 5, 2024 2024-12-31

*Up to 12 months Trevor Lynch-Staunton Print name Chief Technical Officer, R&D CVM Title 1-250-763-1088 Ext 346 Phone Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. Company name Agency agreement expiration date:

Signed by:

On behalf of:

Signature

 

 

Request for Confidentiality FCC January 5, 2024 Nemko North America, Inc. 303 River Road, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1V 1H2 Attn: Director of Certification FCC ID:ZC7-MTPB1GN Pursuant to FCC 47 CFR 0.457(d)(1)(ii) and 0.459 and FCC guidance published in KDB 726920, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below. We request the exhibits selected below as long term confidential (LTC) be withheld from public view permanently:

Selection of exhibits for LTC - general Permanent (Long Term) Permanent (Long Term) Permanent (Long Term) Permanent (Long Term) Exhibit name Block Diagrams Operation Description / Theory of Operation Parts List & Placement / BOM Schematics Selection of exhibits for LTC - specific 1 Permanent (Long Term) Permanent (Long Term) Exhibit name Tune-Up Procedure SDR2 Software / Security Info Selection of exhibits for LTC (with NDA) 3 Permanent (Long Term) Permanent (Long Term) Exhibit name Users Manual Internal Photos We also request the exhibits selected below as short term confidential (STC) be withheld from public view for a period of 30 days4 from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization and prior to marketing. This is to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public:

Selection of exhibits for STC5 Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Exhibit name Block Diagrams Operation Description / Theory of Operation Parts List & Placement / BOM Schematics Users Manual Internal Photos External Photos Test Setup Photos Tune-Up Procedure (for Licensed equipment only) Our company has spent a substantial effort in developing this product and it is one of the first of its kind in the industry. Having the subject information easily available to "competition" would negate the advantage they have achieved by developing this product. Not protecting the details of the design will result in financial hardship. 1 - Tune up procedure is applicable only for licensed equipment. 2 - The FCC rules require that any radio, in which the software is designed or expected to be modified by a party other than the manufacturer that would affect the operating parameters of frequency range, modulation type, maximum output power or other radio frequency parameters outside the range under which the transmitter has been approved in accordance with the FCC rules, must be certified as a software-defined radio (SDR). 3 - These items require further information to be provided to TCB before permanent confidentiality will be extended to these exhibits. Please refer to FCC KDB 726920 and review section II, 3) regarding specific information (NDA) that must accompany these requests. 4 - Number of days can be listed up to 180 but should not go past the date of beginning of product marketing/sale. 5 - Any exhibits that may have already been requested to have Permanent confidentiality need not be repeated under Short-Term confidentiality request. Request for Confidentiality FCC The information in these documents was developed by Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. or has been acquired for use under a commercial agreement with Tait communications. The agreement with Tait Communications prohibits the transfer of technical data to a third party. When the device is marketed before the requested number of days listed above, the grantee will inform the TCB to release the Short-Term Confidentiality information withheld on the FCC equipment authorization website. The above information contains trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of this information might be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457(d)(1)(ii), disclosure of this Application and all accompanying materials will not be made before the date of the Grant for this Application. Sincerely, Signed by:

Signature Trevor Lynch-Staunton Title 1-250-763-1088 Ext 346 Print name Chief Technical Officer, R&D CVM Phone Company

#100-966 Crowley Ave., Kelowna, British Columbia, Canada V1Y 0L1 Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. Address

 

 

Covered Equipment Certification Attestation Letter Reviewing Engineer ATTN.:

FCC ID:

FRN:

(the applicant) certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Note: If the equipment for which the applicant seeks authorization is produced by any of the entities identified on the current Covered List, the applicant should include an explanation on why the equipment is not covered equipment. of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment.

(the applicant) certifies that, as of the date Signed:

Printed name:

Title:

Company:

Date:

DocuSign Envelope ID: 9B9F9B61-53AE-4AB4-A55A-D6EE2D30FC75Anodyne Electronics ManufacturingTrevor Lynch-StauntonAnodyne Electronics ManufacturingZC7-MTPB1GNChief Technical Officer0020690616Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing09 January 2024

 

 

Covered Equipment Certification Attestation Letter FCC ID: ZC7-MTPB1GN To meet the requirements of Federal Communications Commission (F.C.C.) publication, KDB634817 - Frequency Range Listings for Certification Grants, Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp submits the following attestation. This mobile transceiver has:

1. The design capability to operate in the frequency band 150-174 MHz. 2. Complies with 47CFR Part 90.203(e) in that the equipment operator cannot directly program transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. 90 74 NF Part 74 Part 22 Part 90 Programming this equipment is the responsibility of Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp approved Service Agents In addition to the following rule parts applied for:

22 This device may be utilised in systems operated by Federal and Public Safety agencies, as indicated in the table beneath. The Grant Note EF should be appended to the Grant of Authorisation, indicating this operation is required. B1 Freq. Range (MHz) 150.8-152.855 152.855-154 154-156.2475 156.2475-157.0375 157.0375-157.1875 157.1875-157.450 157.450-161.575 161.575-161.625 161.625-161.775 161.775-162.0125 162.0125-173.2 173.2-173.4 NF=Non Federal, F=Federal Date: January 5, 2024 NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF NF NF Signed by:

Signature Trevor Lynch-Staunton Name Chief Technical Officer, R&D CVM Title 1-250-763-1088 Ext 346 Phone trevor.staunton@aem-corp.com Email Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. Company name

 

 

ee IV Part 90.203 Justification Statement a 05 January 2024 Benjamin W.Tidwell

+1 Compliance LLC, 2113 Huron Circle, Denton, Texas 76210 USA United States of America Dear Benjamin, Subject: Part 90.203 (j) (5) Certification Statement FCC ID: ZC7-MTPB1GN Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. certifies that its digital mobile transceiver FCC ID: ZC7-MTPB1GN, meets a spectrum efficiency standard of one voice channel per 6.25 kHz of channel bandwidth. Additionally, Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Corp. certifies the equipment is capable of supporting a minimum data rate of 4800 bits per second per 6.25 kHz of channel bandwidth. Re: Tait Communications TMBB1A Part 90 operation on frequencies in the 150.8-162.0125 MHz, 173.2 -173.4 MHz bands. To the reviewing Engineer This letter supports the statements claimed above and defines the Tait TMBB1A Radio body operation in the AEM PMR MPT136D (FCC ID: ZC7-MTPB1GN). Section 90.203 (i) (5) states: Applications for Part 90 certification of transmitters designed to operate on frequencies 150.8-162.0125 MHz and 173.2-173.4 MHz bands, received on or after Jan 01, 2011, must include a certification that the equipment meets the spectrum efficiency standards of one voice channel per 6.25 kHz of channel bandwidth. Additionally, if the equipment is capable of transmitting data, has transmitter output power greater than 500 mW, and has a channel bandwidth of more than 6.25 kHz, the equipment must be capable of supporting a minimum data rate of 4800 bits per second per 6.25 kHz of channel bandwidth. AEM certifies the Tait TMBB1A is defined to operate in those bands and data rates. The TMBB1A has its own Part 90 certification and FCC license that shows that it meets these operating parameters. It supports the 6.25 kHz voice and data cases. AEM has validated that our implementation did not impact performance (mask, emissions and audio) from the TMBB1A radio body, and our repackaging had no detrimental affects on the base TMBB1A radio body performance. The Tait certified radio model is the TMBB1A, FCC ID: CASTMBB1A. Please contact me if you require any additional information. Sincerely, Jan Il 2024 Signature Date 7 Name: Trevor Lynch-Staunton Title: Chief Technology Officer Company: Anodyne Electronics Manufacturing Phone: 1-250-763-1088 Ext 346 email: trevor.staunton@aem-corp.com Anodyne Electronics #100-966 Crowley Ave. EMAIL info@aem-corp.com Manufacturing Corp. Kelowna, British Columbia TELEPHONE + 1.250.763.1088 Canada V1Y OL1 TOLLFREE +1.888.763.1088 A. WHOLLY QWNEN SHIRSINIARY AF STRIICTIIRAL MONITORING SYSTEMS PIC (ASYSMN1 aem-corp.com

 

 

Family Certification Request Letter January 5, 2024 Nemko North America, Inc. 303 River Road, Ottawa, ON K1V 1H2 Canada Attn: Director of Certification FCC ID: ZC7-MTPB1GN ISED certification number: IC: 9601A-MTPB1GN HVIN: MTPB1GN Models (PMNs): MTP136D-000GN, MTP138-000GN We hereby request Family Certification for the above mentioned HVINs/Models based on them being electrically, and physically identical apart from model name/number. The listed models have identical electrical circuitry, components, RF power and layout. The models differ by software through a factory configurable software key. The functional differences are described by the table below. Model MTP136D-000GN MTP138-000GN Digital Modulation (P25) Yes No Frequency Range (MHz) 136-174 138-174 Test results obtained for the MTP136D-000GN are applicable to the MTP138-000GN. The listed models have identical antenna ports. There is no difference between the two models with respect to the antenna type and gain specified. The antennas specified in submission are the same for both models in the family. The listed models have the same mechanical enclosure. The only difference between models specified is a model specific product label. There is no change in size, shape, material used, or placement in the affixed label. Sincerely, Signed by:

Signature Trevor Lynch-Staunton Print name Chief Technical Officer, R&D CVM Title 1-250-763-1088 Ext 346 Phone

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

U.S. Agent Designation for Service of Process -

Certification Attestation Letter Date:

ATTN.: Reviewing Engineer FCC ID:

Per section 2.911(d)(7) of the FCC rules, FRN:

designated to the following U.S. agent* for service of process:

certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is

(the applicant), Company Name: +1 Compliance LLC Physical U.S. Company Address: 2113 Huron Circle, Denton, Texas 76210 USA FRN: 0033497389 Agent name: Benjamin W. Tidwell Agent Email Address: contact@1compliant.com The above contact person accepts the obligation for service of process. The applicant accepts to maintain an agent for no less than one year after the grantee has terminated all marketing and importation or the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. Applicant Signed:

Agent Signed:

Signed:

Printed name:

Title:

Company:

FRN:

Date:

Signed:

Printed name:

Title:

Company:

FRN:

Date:

Benjamin W. Tidwell President

+1 Compliance LLC 0033497389

* the applicant must designate a contact located in the United States for purposes of acting as the applicants agent for service of process, regardless of whether the applicant is a domestic or foreign entity. An applicant located in the United States may designate itself as the agent for service of process. DocuSign Envelope ID: 9B9F9B61-53AE-4AB4-A55A-D6EE2D30FC75Chief Technical OfficerZC7-MTPB1GN0020690616Trevor Lynch-Staunton09 January 20240020690616Anodyne Electronics ManufacturingAnodyne Electronics Manufacturing09 January 202409 January 2024